Manual de Usuario Site Manager (CCTV)

Digital Vision Network
VisionPocket and SiteManager Software User Manual
September, 2011 24-10248-56 Revision B
Digital Vision Network
VisionPocket and SiteManager Software User Manual
September, 2011 24-10248-56 Revision B
Security Solutions (805) 522-5555 www.johnsoncontrols.com
Copyright 2011
Johnson Controls, Inc.

All Rights Reserved
No part of this document may be reproduced without the prior permission of Johnson Controls, Inc.
Acknowledgment Cardkey P2000, BadgeMaster, and Metasys are trademarks of Johnson Controls, Inc. All other company and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
If this document is translated from the original English version by Johnson Controls, Inc., all reasonable endeavors will be used to ensure the accuracy of translation. Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for any translation errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing or use of this translated material.
Due to continuous development of our products, the information in this document is subject to change without notice. Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with furnishing or use of this material. Contents of this publication may be preliminary and/or may be changed at any time without any obligation to notify anyone of such revision or change, and shall not be regarded as a warranty.
Declaration of Conformity This product complies with the requirements of the European Council Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 2004/108/EEC and the Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EEC. This equipment must not be modified for any reason and it must be installed as stated in the Manufacturers instruction. If this shipment (or any part thereof) is supplied as second-hand equipment, equipment for sale outside the European Economic Area or as spare parts for either a single unit or system, it is not covered by the Directives.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Introduction
About VisionPocket.................................................................................................................................. 1-1 About SiteManager .................................................................................................................................. 1-2 Chapter Summaries ................................................................................................................................. 1-2 Technical Support .................................................................................................................................... 1-2 Manual Conventions ................................................................................................................................ 1-3 Navigating Through the System....................................................................................................... 1-3 Related Documentation ........................................................................................................................... 1-4 DVN 5000 ........................................................................................................................................ 1-4 DVN 3000 ........................................................................................................................................ 1-4 DVN 100-NET .................................................................................................................................. 1-5
Chapter 2: VisionPocket
Using the Main Screen............................................................................................................................. 2-1 Buttons and Features....................................................................................................................... 2-2 Menu Button Reference ........................................................................................................... 2-3 Connecting to a Server ............................................................................................................................ 2-4 Disconnecting from a Server............................................................................................................ 2-5 Selecting a Camera ................................................................................................................................. 2-6 Selecting Image Resolution and Quality .......................................................................................... 2-7 Using the PTZ Panel Screen ................................................................................................................... 2-9 Buttons and Features..................................................................................................................... 2-10 Controlling a Pan/Tilt/Zoom (PTZ) Camera.................................................................................... 2-11 Using the Optical and Digital Zooms.............................................................................................. 2-12 Using Presets and Tours................................................................................................................ 2-14 Playing Back Video Footage and Audio................................................................................................. 2-16 Finding a Particular Image ..................................................................................................................... 2-19 Exporting Still Image Formats................................................................................................................ 2-22 Saving a Still Image ............................................................................................................................... 2-23 Audio...................................................................................................................................................... 2-27 Alarms and Auxiliaries ........................................................................................................................... 2-30 Exiting VisionPocket .............................................................................................................................. 2-31
Chapter 3: SiteManager
Software Upgrade Instructions................................................................................................................. 3-1 SiteManager Orientation .......................................................................................................................... 3-3 Logging on to SiteManager.............................................................................................................. 3-3 Using the Main Screen..................................................................................................................... 3-5 Buttons and Features............................................................................................................... 3-6 Saving the SiteManager Configuration .......................................................................................... 3-10
24-10248-56 Rev. B
This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls, Inc. 2011 Johnson Controls, Inc.
Table of Contents
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual
Logging Out of SiteManager .......................................................................................................... 3-10 User Management ................................................................................................................................. 3-11 Editing the Admin Account............................................................................................................. 3-11 Changing the Administrator Password........................................................................................... 3-12 Creating User Accounts ................................................................................................................. 3-13 Editing or Deleting User Accounts ................................................................................................. 3-16 Changing the User Password ........................................................................................................ 3-17 Servers................................................................................................................................................... 3-18 Server Setup .................................................................................................................................. 3-18 Connection Quality......................................................................................................................... 3-20 Creating or Importing a New Server............................................................................................... 3-20 Exporting Servers........................................................................................................................... 3-25 Editing Server Network Connections ............................................................................................. 3-26 Editing Server Dial-Up Connections............................................................................................... 3-27 Editing Server VPN Connections ................................................................................................... 3-29 Editing Server Direct Connections ................................................................................................. 3-31 Editing a Server Broadband Connection........................................................................................ 3-33 Renaming or Deleting Server Connections.................................................................................... 3-35 Connecting to the Servers.............................................................................................................. 3-38 Editing Server Properties ............................................................................................................... 3-41 Server Setup and Full Interface ..................................................................................................... 3-42 Server Resources .......................................................................................................................... 3-44 Server Resource Menu Options............................................................................................. 3-45 Resource Status..................................................................................................................... 3-46 Working with Server Resources............................................................................................. 3-46 Working with Camera Dome Internal Auxiliaries............................................................................ 3-51 Configuring Dome Control Settings................................................................................................ 3-52 Audio Channels...................................................................................................................................... 3-53 Alarm Manager ...................................................................................................................................... 3-56 Server Alarm Call Priority............................................................................................................... 3-56 Configuring the SMTP Server Settings .......................................................................................... 3-59 Configuring the Screen Recorder................................................................................................... 3-59 Alarm Manager Overview............................................................................................................... 3-62 Alarm Manager Notification.................................................................................................... 3-63 Configuring Alarm Events .............................................................................................................. 3-64 Important Notes (Configuring Alarm Events) ......................................................................... 3-65 How to Configure Alarm Events (Procedure) ......................................................................... 3-66 Send Email Alarm Action Configuration ................................................................................. 3-77 Configuring Alarm Notification Settings.......................................................................................... 3-79 Managing Alarm Events................................................................................................................. 3-80 Managing Alarm Events With Multiple Operations................................................................. 3-99 Silencing Server Alarms............................................................................................................... 3-100 Camera Video Screen Functions ......................................................................................................... 3-101 Camera Video Screens................................................................................................................ 3-102 Working with the Camera Video Screen Options......................................................................... 3-103 Controlling a Pan/Tilt/Zoom (PTZ) Camera Dome ....................................................................... 3-106 Keyboard Shortcuts for PTZ Camera Control ...................................................................... 3-108 Working with the Camera Video Screen Toolbar ......................................................................... 3-109 Buttons and Features (Camera Video Screen Toolbar)....................................................... 3-110 Selecting a Camera Sector for Playback ..................................................................................... 3-113 Playing Back Video Footage and Audio....................................................................................... 3-114 Finding a Still Image or Video Clip............................................................................................... 3-116 Exporting Image and Video Clip Formats .................................................................................... 3-120
vi
24-10248-56 Rev. B
Table of Contents
Still Image File Type Features ............................................................................................. 3-120 Video Clip File Formats........................................................................................................ 3-121 Saving a Still Image ..................................................................................................................... 3-121 Saving a Video Clip...................................................................................................................... 3-122 Configuring the Window Recorder ............................................................................................... 3-128 Saving Video Footage on the Fly................................................................................................. 3-129 Groups ................................................................................................................................................. 3-130 Group Menu Options.................................................................................................................... 3-130 Creating a New Group ................................................................................................................. 3-131 Adding Group Resources............................................................................................................. 3-132 Working with Group Resources ................................................................................................... 3-134 Group Resource Menu Options ........................................................................................... 3-134 Resource Status................................................................................................................... 3-135 Maps .................................................................................................................................................... 3-141 Map Menu Options....................................................................................................................... 3-141 The 2D Map Screen..................................................................................................................... 3-142 Buttons and Features (2D Map Toolbar).............................................................................. 3-143 The 3D Map Screen..................................................................................................................... 3-144 Buttons and Features (3D Map Toolbar).............................................................................. 3-145 Creating a New Map .................................................................................................................... 3-146 Working with 2D Maps ................................................................................................................. 3-150 Working with 3D Maps ................................................................................................................. 3-151 Map Resources............................................................................................................................ 3-155 2D Map Resource Menu Options......................................................................................... 3-155 3D Map Resource Menu Options......................................................................................... 3-156 Map Hierarchy Resource Status and 2D Map Resource Icon Status .................................. 3-157 3D Map Resource Status ..................................................................................................... 3-157 Adding Map Resources................................................................................................................ 3-158 Working with Map Resources ...................................................................................................... 3-160 Views ................................................................................................................................................... 3-165 View Menu Options...................................................................................................................... 3-166 The View Screen.......................................................................................................................... 3-168 Buttons and Features (View Screen) ................................................................................... 3-169 Creating a New View.................................................................................................................... 3-170 Working with the View Screen Options........................................................................................ 3-172 Designing the View Screen Layouts ............................................................................................ 3-175 Adding and Removing Cameras or Maps .................................................................................... 3-178 Working with View Resources...................................................................................................... 3-181 Synchronized Multiple Camera Playback..................................................................................... 3-184 Saving Still Images....................................................................................................................... 3-188 Saving Video Clips....................................................................................................................... 3-190 Views as Map Resources............................................................................................................. 3-197 Monitors ............................................................................................................................................... 3-199 Monitor Menu Options.................................................................................................................. 3-200 Monitor Menu Options for Client VGA Monitors ........................................................................... 3-200 Menu Options for Network (DVN 100-NET) Monitors .................................................................. 3-201 The Monitor Panel........................................................................................................................ 3-201 Buttons and Features (Monitor Panel) ................................................................................. 3-202 The Sequence Screen ................................................................................................................. 3-204 Buttons and Features (Sequence Screen)........................................................................... 3-205 Adding Network Monitors ............................................................................................................. 3-205 Editing Monitors ........................................................................................................................... 3-206 Adding Resources to a VGA Monitor ........................................................................................... 3-208
24-10248-56 Rev. B
vii
Table of Contents
Adding VGA Monitor Resources (Single Resource Mode) .................................................. 3-209 Adding VGA Monitor Resources (Sequence Resource Mode) ............................................ 3-210 Removing VGA Monitor Resources ............................................................................................. 3-212 Adding a Camera to a Network Monitor....................................................................................... 3-213 Adding a Camera to a Network Monitor (Procedure) ........................................................... 3-214 Removing a Camera from a Network Monitor.............................................................................. 3-216 Displaying Resources on VGA Monitors...................................................................................... 3-216 Connecting to Network Monitors.................................................................................................. 3-217 Disconnecting a Monitor............................................................................................................... 3-218 Playing Back Video Footage and Audio on Monitors ................................................................... 3-218 Cameras Played Back on SiteManager Monitors ................................................................ 3-218 Synchronized Multiple Camera Playback on VGA Monitors ........................................................ 3-220 Finding a Still Image or Video Clip on Monitors ........................................................................... 3-221 Deleting Network Monitors........................................................................................................... 3-226 Using the DVN 100-NET Quad View Spot Monitor Feature......................................................... 3-227 Other Quad View Configuration Options.............................................................................. 3-231 Monitor Groups ............................................................................................................................ 3-233 Monitor Group Menu Options............................................................................................... 3-233 Creating a Monitor Group..................................................................................................... 3-234 Connecting a Monitor Group ................................................................................................ 3-236 Maintenance ........................................................................................................................................ 3-239 Virtual Video Desktop................................................................................................................... 3-239 Buttons and Features (Virtual Video Desktop)..................................................................... 3-240 Options in the Windows Menu ............................................................................................. 3-241 Configuring the Virtual Video Desktop ................................................................................. 3-242 Recording Users Desktop Activity............................................................................................... 3-244 Limiting Login Attempts................................................................................................................ 3-245 Configuring the System Log......................................................................................................... 3-246 Log Explorer and Working with the Log Panel............................................................................. 3-249 Configuring Regular Server Status Checks ................................................................................. 3-253 Monitoring the Server Status Checks................................................................................... 3-255 Searching the Hierarchies............................................................................................................ 3-256 Configuring Proprietary Keyboard Settings.................................................................................. 3-257 Pelco 9760 Keyboard Integration .............................................................................................. 3-257 Installing the Pelco 9760-KBD Keyboard ............................................................................. 3-258 B&B Electronics RS-232 to RS-485 (Model 485OT9L) Converter Installation..................... 3-259 Configuring the Pelco 9760-KBD Keyboard......................................................................... 3-261 Operating the Pelco 9760-KBD Keyboard ........................................................................... 3-263 Managing the SiteManager Configuration.................................................................................... 3-264 VisionWeb ActiveX Manager........................................................................................................ 3-266
Index
viii
24-10248-56 Rev. B
Chapter
INTRODUCTION
This manual describes how to use the following client software applications for Digital Vision Network (DVN) systems:

VisionPocket SiteManager
NOTE
RemoteView is no longer supported. However, RemoteControl is still supported.
This manual does not cover the RemoteControl and VisionWeb client software applications. For information on RemoteControl and VisionWeb, refer to the following manuals:

DVN 5000 Series Software User Manual DVN 3000 Series Software User Manual
See also Related Documentation on page 1-4.
NOTE
The screen captures shown in this manual may differ slightly, depending on the software version you are using.
ABOUT VISIONPOCKET
VisionPocket is a fully functional client application running on Microsoft Windows CE or PocketPC for all Digital Vision Network Systems. This application enables you to remotely access the DVN system via TCP/IP, using compatible Personal Digital Assistant (PDA) devices. VisionPocket offers full remote live viewing, playback, full Pan/Tilt/Zoom (PTZ) camera control, and bi-directional audio transmission for cameras connected to any single DVN server in a DVN Digital CCTV Network.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
1-1
Introduction
NOTE
Internet access may require installation of additional components, such as VPN (Virtual Private Network) Client or RAS (Remote Access Service) Client. Contact your system administrator for setup instructions.
ABOUT SITEMANAGER
The SiteManager software is a multi-server client software used to access many network-connected DVN systems simultaneously. SiteManager extends the RemoteControl functionality to multi-server environments. SiteManager includes support for multiple server, multiple camera live view, playback, export, find, PTZ control, and other basic functions, as well as 2D maps, 3D maps, logical groups of resources, user-defined multiple camera views, sophisticated alarm and event management, and logging, among other features. The RemoteControl client can be opened within SiteManager, allowing full setup and control of any network-connected DVN server. For detailed information on the RemoteControl client application, refer to the documents listed in Related Documentation on page 1-4.
CHAPTER SUMMARIES
Chapter 1: Introduction, provides a general overview of this user manual, its structure and how to use the information within it. Conventions used throughout the manual are also defined. Chapter 2: VisionPocket, provides instructions for using VisionPocket software on a PDA device to view live or recorded images (with audio) and control PTZ cameras. Chapter 3: SiteManager, describes the procedures for using SiteManager software to control live view, playback, export, find, and PTZ control for multiple cameras from multiple DVN servers over multiple network interfaces.
TECHNICAL SUPPORT
Technical assistance is provided to Johnson Controls authorized dealer representatives from 5 a.m. PT to 5 p.m. PT Monday through Friday. System users can get answers to operator questions by calling the local Johnson Controls Inc. sales/service office. The authorized dealer representatives can also provide you with information on the maintenance contracts and the on-site field service.
1-2
24-10248-56 Rev. B
Introduction
MANUAL CONVENTIONS
The following items are used throughout this manual to indicate special circumstances, exceptions, important points regarding the equipment or personal safety, or to emphasize a particular point.
NOTE
Notes indicate additional or special information relevant to the current topic or procedure.
IMPORTANT
Important messages remind you that certain actions, if not performed exactly as stated, may cause damage to equipment or make your system non-operational.
Navigating Through the System

Note the following terms and documentation standards in this manual when following instructions:
Select
This term directs you to select a menu, submenu, or button option. Click again on a selected object to clear the option. Move the mouse cursor over the object indicated and press and release the left mouse button once. Note that click always refers to the left mouse button. Quickly press twice and release the left mouse button. Move the mouse cursor over the object indicated and press and release the right mouse button once. Press and hold down the left mouse button to select an item, drag and point to where you want to place the object; then release the mouse button.
Clear Click
Double-click Right-click
Click and Drag
24-10248-56 Rev. B
1-3
Introduction
RELATED DOCUMENTATION
DVN 5000
Table 1-1: Related Documentation (DVN 5000)
Document Title DVN 5000 Rackmount Series Installation Guide DVN 5000 Desktop Series Quick Installation Guide DVN 5000 Series System Drive Replacement Instructions DVN 5000 Rackmount Series RAID Management Guide DVN 5000 Series Software Installation and Configuration Manual DVN 5000 Series Software User Manual DVN 5000 Series Server Upgrade Wizard DVN 5000 and 100-NET Series Software Release Notes DVN 5000 and DVN 3000 Series Software Development Kit (SDK) Reference Manual DVN 5000 Rackmount Series Quick Startup Guide DVN SiteManager Quick Guide Part Number 24-10129-4 24-10129-55 24-10129-101 24-10177-3 24-10248-5 24-10248-13 24-10520-49 24-10318-37 24-10352-18 24-10520-14 24-10248-137
DVN 3000
Table 1-2: Related Documentation (DVN 3000)
Document Title DVN 3000 Series Software User Manual DVN 3000 Series Software Installation and Configuration Manual DVN 3000 Series Quick Installation Guide for DVN 3016 DVN 3000 Series Quick Installation Guide for DVN 3000-NET DVN 3000 Series Quick Installation Guide for DVN 3008 PD and DVN 3004 PD DVN 3008 D and DVN 3004 Quick Installation Guide DVN 5000 and DVN 3000 Series Software Development Kit (SDK) Reference Manual DVN SiteManager Quick Guide Part Number 09-9268-01 09-9269-01 24-10129-12 24-10129-20 24-10129-39 24-10129-47 24-10352-18 24-10248-137
1-4
24-10248-56 Rev. B
Introduction
DVN 100-NET
Table 1-3: Related Documentation (DVN 100-NET)
Document Title DVN 100-NET Quick Installation Guide DVN 100-NET Installation and Operation Manual DVN 5000 and 100-NET Series Software Release Notes DVN SiteManager Quick Guide Part Number 24-10216-5 24-10216-13 24-10318-37 24-10248-137
24-10248-56 Rev. B
1-5
Introduction
1-6
24-10248-56 Rev. B
Chapter
VISIONPOCKET
This chapter discusses the basic features of VisionPocket and how to use this application.
NOTE
VisionPocket does not support Megapixel, H.264, and MJPEG video images.
USING THE MAIN SCREEN

The Main screen provides access to VisionPocket features and screens. See the following figure. The Main screen can be split into the following: Video window PTZ control Camera button Main button Save button Find button Login button Alarm button Audio button Close button Menu button Status bar
Close Video window
PTZ control Camera selection
Main Alarm
Playback pad Login/Setup Audio
Menu button Save Find
Status bar
24-10248-56 Rev. B
2-1
VisionPocket
NOTE
All remaining screen captures of the VisionPocket user interface in this chapter do not display the menu button and status bar.
Buttons and Features

This section briefly describes each feature on the VisionPocket Main screen.
Video window PTZ control
Displays live or played back video clips and images. If the camera is PTZ enabled, opens the PTZ panel screen where you can use the PTZ controls and move the selected camera to preset positions or according to preset tours. Displays the camera selection panel screen, allowing you to select which camera you wish to view in the video window. Displays the Main screen, allowing you to: select the camera you wish to view control camera domes play back recorded video footage and audio access the Setup screen save a still image search the recorded video footage and audio turn the audio channel(s) on and off
Camera selection
Main
Alarm
Displays the Alarm/Auxiliary panel screen, allowing you to monitor the status of all alarms and auxiliaries of the server to which you are connected, and to turn auxiliaries on and off. Provides standard video controls that allow you to play back recorded video clips. Displays the Setup screen, allowing you to: create, edit, and delete DVN server connections connect to a DVN server disconnect from a DVN server select the compression protocol create and edit login information (username and password)
Playback pad
Login/Setup
Save
Displays the Save panel screen, allowing you to export a still image as a .bmp, .png or .jpeg image. Displays the Find panel screen and allows you to search the recorded footage for the camera whose video footage and audio is currently being played back. Allows you to turn the enabled audio channel(s) on or off.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
Find
Audio
2-2

Close Menu button
VisionPocket
Allows you to close the VisionPocket application. Allows you to perform and configure numerous VisionPocket functions using a selection menu. Press this button when the instructions in this chapter ask you to press Menu or the Menu button. See Menu Button Reference for more information. Provides status information, such as whether the interface is currently in live or playback mode, the current date and time at the server, and the current resolution setting.
Status bar
Menu Button Reference

The Menu button allows you to select a number of VisionPocket functions, most of which can also be configured and controlled from other areas of the Main screen. See Table 2-1 for a brief description of each Menu option. Table 2-1: Menu Button Reference
Menu Option Disconnect Quit Description Disconnects the VisionPocket client from the server to which it is currently connected. Disconnects the VisionPocket client from the server to which it is currently connected and closes the VisionPocket application. Allows you to select one of the cameras connected and configured at the DVN server. Provides the same video controls that are available on the Playback pad. See Playback pad on page 2-2. Allows you to modify the image resolution and quality settings. Allows you to select a defined PTZ camera preset. Allows you to select a defined PTZ camera tour. Saves a camera image in the JPEG format to the PDAs My Devices directory.
Source Play mode Video adaptive Presets Tours Grab a picture
Connection manager Opens the Login/Setup screen where you can configure server connections and connect to a DVN server. Network scanner Not supported in this release.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
2-3
VisionPocket
CONNECTING TO A SERVER
The following procedures describe how to access VisionPocket on a PDA and how to connect to a DVN server. Refer to the DVN 5000 Series or DVN 3000 Series Software Installation and Configuration Manual for information about creating server connections. To log on to VisionPocket and connect to a server: 1. Access the Programs folder on your PDA. The VisionPocket icon will be listed.
2. Press the VisionPocket icon. The VisionPocket application launches.
3. Press the Login/Setup button or press Menu>Connection Manager. The Login/Setup screen appears. Refer to the DVN 5000 Series or DVN 3000 Series Software Installation and Configuration Manual for information about creating server connections.
2-4
24-10248-56 Rev. B
VisionPocket
4. If one or more server connections have already been defined, select the server to which you wish to connect and press Conn. After a few moments the connection with the server will be established and the Main screen will be displayed. If no server connection is defined, continue with step 5. 5. Enter the user login name in the User text box. The PDA keyboard should pop up automatically when you press on any text box. 6. Enter the login password in the Pass text box. 7. Press the Prot drop-down arrow to display the protocol menu, and select the Server you wish to connect to in the server list. The server will be highlighted and the selected servers connection settings will be displayed. 8. Press Conn. to connect to the selected server. After a few moments the connection with the server will be established and the Main screen will be displayed.
Disconnecting from a Server

The following procedures describe how to disconnect from the DVN server to which you are connected. Refer to one of the software installation and configuration manuals listed in Related Documentation on page 1-4 for information about creating server connections. To disconnect from a server: 1. Press Menu>Disconnect or perform steps 2 through 4. 2. Press the Login/Setup button. The Login/Setup screen appears. The server to which you are currently connected appears in the Name box. 3. If the Main screen is not currently displayed, access the Main screen by pressing the Main button on any other screen. 4. Press Disc.. VisionPocket disconnects from the server. 5. To connect to a different server, see Connecting to a Server on page 2-4. 6. To exit VisionPocket, press the Close button.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
2-5
VisionPocket
SELECTING A CAMERA
VisionPocket allows you to access any of the cameras connected to the DVN server to which you are connected. Once you have selected the camera you wish to view, you can:

view the cameras live video footage and audio view the cameras playback video footage and audio use the cameras PTZ controls search through the cameras recorded video footage and audio save a still image
NOTES
Live video is available only if present at time of viewing; audio is available only if it has been configured correctly. Playback is available only if video has been recorded. You may use PTZ controls only if the selected camera is a PTZ camera.
For additional information, see:

Playing Back Video Footage and Audio on page 2-16 Controlling a Pan/Tilt/Zoom (PTZ) Camera on page 2-11 Finding a Particular Image on page 2-19 Saving a Still Image on page 2-23 To select the camera you wish to view: 1. Press the Camera button. The camera selection panel screen appears and the Camera button turns blue.
2-6
24-10248-56 Rev. B
VisionPocket
2. Select the camera you wish to view by pressing the required Camera button. The selected cameras live video footage will be displayed in the video window.
NOTE
You may also select a camera by pressing Menu>Source and then selecting the desired camera.
Selecting Image Resolution and Quality

Selecting the image resolution and quality of all of the connected cameras allows you to adjust the viewed image quality and modify the image file size, and thus the amount of bandwidth required to transmit the image. You can select one of the following image resolutions:

Full resolution CIF resolution QCIF resolution
For each selected resolution, you may select the image quality from 10% to a full 100%. The higher the image quality, the larger the image file size and the more bandwidth is required to transmit the image. So if there is little bandwidth available to the PDA, selecting a lower image quality results in better video footage and audio transmission.
NOTE
The selected image resolution and quality applies to all cameras.
To select the global image resolution and quality: 1. Press the Camera button. The camera selection panel screen appears and the Camera button turns blue.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
2-7
VisionPocket
2. Select the camera you wish to view while adjusting the image resolution and quality. The selected cameras live video footage appears in the video window.
3. To select a different image resolution setting, press Menu>Video adaptive, verify that the Enabled option is selected, and select one of the resolution settings. For detailed information on resolution settings, such as CIF and QCIF, refer to the DVN 5000 Series or DVN 3000 Series Software Installation and Configuration Manual. 4. To select a different image quality setting, press Menu>Video adaptive> Quality and select one of the quality settings.
2-8
24-10248-56 Rev. B
VisionPocket
5. You may also modify the image quality settings on the PTZ panel screen. To do this, press the PTZ button on the Main screen. The PTZ panel screen appears.
or
PTZ panel on a Fixed Camera
PTZ panel on a PTZ camera dome
To increase the image quality, press the Quality Plus button. To decrease the image quality, press the Quality Minus button.
NOTE
The higher the image quality, the larger the image file size and the more bandwidth is required to transmit the image.
6. Continue to increase or decrease the image quality until you achieve the desired image quality. 7. Observe the changes in image resolution and quality in the video window. The selected image resolution and quality level will be displayed in the dynamic status bar at the bottom of the PDA screen where you can also observe the changes in the image file size.
USING THE PTZ PANEL SCREEN

The PTZ panel screen provides you with tools to control PTZ-enabled cameras. You may move the cameras manually using the camera remote control dome or automatically by selecting a preset or tour. Presets and tours do not apply to fixed cameras. For detailed information about presets and tours, see the DVN 5000 Series or DVN 3000 Series Software Installation and Configuration Manual.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
2-9
VisionPocket
See the following figure. The PTZ panel screen can be split into the following: Focus controls Quality controls Tours drop-down list Zoom control Iris controls Presets drop-down list Pan/tilt controls
Iris controls Quality controls
Focus controls Presets drop-down list Tours drop-down list
Pan/tilt controls
Zoom control

This section briefly describes each feature on the PTZ panel screen.
Focus controls
Allows you to control the camera lens in order to achieve the desired focus for PTZ-enabled and fixed cameras. Allows you to control the amount light that enters the camera. Allows you to select the image quality. The higher the image quality, the larger the image file size and the more bandwidth is required to transmit the image. The selected image quality will apply to all cameras. Allows you to move a camera to a predefined position that corresponds to the selected preset. You may also select a preset with the Menu button. Allows you to shift a camera between the predefined camera movement sequences (tour). You may also select a tour with the Menu button.
Iris controls Quality controls
Presets
Tours
2-10
24-10248-56 Rev. B

Pan/tilt controls Zoom control
VisionPocket
Allows you to pan and tilt a PTZ camera. Allows you to zoom in and out.
Controlling a Pan/Tilt/Zoom (PTZ) Camera

If PTZ camera domes are connected to the DVN server to which you are connected via VisionPocket, you can control the camera dome position, zoom level, and adjust the camera domes focus, iris and quality. To use the PTZ function via the PTZ panel: 1. Press the Camera Selection button. The camera selection panel screen appears and the Camera button turns blue.
2. Select the camera dome you wish to control by selecting the required Camera button. The selected camera domes live video footage appears in the video window.
3. Press the PTZ button. The PTZ panel screen appears.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
2-11
VisionPocket
Central point
Arrows
4. Use the pan/tilt controls to pan or tilt the camera. To use the pan/tilt controls, press and drag the Central point as required, or press the Arrows as required to achieve smaller and more precise camera movements. Observe the changes in the camera dome position in the video window. 5. To zoom in or out, press and drag the Zoom point towards the + or the - side of the slide respectively. See Using the Optical and Digital Zooms on page 2-12 for additional information about using the zoom function. 6. If required, change the focus by pressing the Focus + or - buttons until you achieve the desired focus. 7. If required, change the iris by pressing the Iris + or - buttons until you achieve the desired light balance.
NOTE
If you select a camera that has no PTZ functionality, you cannot use the PTZ controls; however, you will be able to adjust the global image quality. See Selecting Image Resolution and Quality on page 2-7 for additional information.
Using the Optical and Digital Zooms

VisionPocket provides users with two types of zoom: the optical zoom and the digital zoom. The optical zoom actually engages the PTZ camera domes lens zoom. The digital zoom does not engage the camera domes lens but increases or decreases the size of each pixel in the picture; therefore, it changes the size of the image with corresponding changes in graininess. To use the Optical and Digital zoom functions: 1. Press the Camera Selection button. The camera selection panel screen appears and the Camera button turns blue.
2-12
24-10248-56 Rev. B
VisionPocket
2. Select the camera dome you wish to control by pressing the associated Camera button. The selected camera domes live video footage appears in the video window.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
2-13
VisionPocket
4. To zoom in using the optical zoom, press and drag the Zoom point towards the + side of the zoom slide until you achieve the desired optical zoom level. 5. To zoom out using the optical zoom, press and drag the Zoom point towards the - side of the zoom slide until you achieve the desired optical zoom level. 6. To zoom in using the digital zoom, you must first reach the upper zoom limit of the optical zoom. Press and drag the Zoom point towards the + side of the zoom slide until you cannot zoom in any further and then release the Zoom point. Now press and drag the Zoom point again towards the + side of the zoom slide to engage the digital zoom. Observe the corresponding changes in the video window. Continue to press and drag the Zoom point until you achieve the desired digital zoom level. 7. To zoom out using the digital zoom, you can only zoom out using the digital zoom if the camera dome is already digitally zoomed in (see the previous step). Press and drag the Zoom point towards the - side of the zoom. Observe the corresponding changes in the video window.
Using Presets and Tours

VisionPocket allows you to move PTZ camera domes to pre-set positions or tours by using the PTZ panel screen or the Menu button.
Selecting a PTZ camera dome preset results in the camera dome moving to a predefined position that corresponds to the selected preset. Selecting a PTZ camera dome tour results in the camera shifting between predefined camera movement sequences, thus providing different scenes in quick succession.
Presets and tours available on VisionPocket correspond to the presets and tours configured on the server to which you are connected. For information on how to create and configure presets and tours, refer to the DVN 5000 Series or DVN 3000 Series Software Installation and Configuration Manual. To select a preset or engage a tour: 1. Press the Camera Selection button. The camera selection panel screen appears and the Camera button turns blue.
2-14
24-10248-56 Rev. B
VisionPocket
2. Select the camera dome you wish to control by pressing the required Camera button. The selected camera domes live video footage appears in the video window.
4. Select a Preset from the drop-down list. The camera dome moves to the selected preset position.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
2-15
VisionPocket
5. Select a Tour from the drop-down list. The selected tour starts. The selected tour will continue to play until you select a preset.
NOTE
You may also use the Menu button to select a preset or tour.
PLAYING BACK VIDEO FOOTAGE AND AUDIO

VisionPocket enables you to play back recorded prime sector video footage and audio without any interruption to the recording process. This then allows you to use the Find function or Save a still image. For detailed information about camera sectors, refer to the DVN 5000 Series or DVN 3000 Series Software Installation and Configuration Manual. Audio playback is only available when a PDA is connected to a DVN server and the Wavelet protocol is selected. Refer to the DVN 5000 Series or DVN 3000 Series Software Installation and Configuration Manual for additional information. If you know the camera and the exact time period you would like to play back, or if there is a vast amount of footage to play back, use the Find function. Refer to Finding a Particular Image on page 2-19. To play back video footage and audio: 1. Press the Camera Selection button. The camera selection panel screen appears and the Camera button turns blue.
2. Select the camera from which you wish to play back video footage and audio. The selected cameras live video footage appears in the video window.
2-16
24-10248-56 Rev. B
VisionPocket
3. Press the Main button. The Main screen appears with the selected cameras live video footage in the video window.
4. Press the Play button, or press Menu>Play mode>Play, to initiate playback of the selected cameras video footage and audio. The playback begins. Audio will be played back only if the audio channel is turned on and audio has been recorded for the selected camera with the video footage currently being played back. Also, the PDAs audio settings should be configured correctly.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
2-17
VisionPocket
The dynamic status bar at the bottom of your PDA screen displays all of the selected playback functions.
Rewind Stop Play Pause Forward
Start
End
Save
Find
5. Select one of the following functions. Refer to the following definitions.

Start End Play
Press the Start button to go to the start of the video footage. Press the End button to go to the end of the video footage. Press the Play button to play back the video footage. The playback will start. Press the Forward button to fast forward the video footage. To increase the speed of the fast forward function, repeatedly press the Forward button until you reach the desired speed. The selected speed will display in the dynamic status bar at the bottom of the PDA screen. Press the Rewind button to fast rewind the video footage. To increase the speed of the rewind function, repeatedly press the Rewind button until you reach the desired speed. The selected speed will display in the dynamic status bar at the bottom of the PDA screen.
Forward
Rewind
2-18
24-10248-56 Rev. B

Pause
VisionPocket
Press the Pause button to pause the video footage. Playback will stop at the chosen point in the video footage to let you view a still image. To resume playback, press the Play button, or to view the video footage frame-by-frame. press the Forward or Rewind button as required. Press the Stop button to stop playback. The playback stops and live footage appears in the video window.
Stop
NOTE
All playback pad options are also available by pressing Menu>Play mode.
6. To play back frame-by-frame, press the Pause button and then repeatedly press Forward or Rewind to move through the video footage frame-by-frame in the desired direction. 7. Repeat all steps to play back video footage and audio from a different camera.
FINDING A PARTICULAR IMAGE

For quick and accurate video footage retrieval, the Find function allows you to simply enter the date and time of the video footage you are interested in and instantly extract the video footage for the currently selected camera. Once you locate the video footage, you may save a still image or images of interest as required. See Saving a Still Image on page 2-23 for detailed information about saving still images. To use the Find function: 1. Press the Camera Selection button. The camera selection panel screen appears and the Camera button turns blue.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
2-19
VisionPocket
2. Select the camera whose video footage you wish to search. The selected cameras live video footage appears in the video window.
4. Press the Play button, or press Menu>Play mode>Play, to initiate playback of the selected cameras video footage and audio. The playback begins. Audio will be played back only if the audio channel is turned on and audio has been recorded for the selected camera with the video footage currently being played back. Also, the PDAs audio settings should be configured correctly.
2-20
24-10248-56 Rev. B
VisionPocket
The dynamic status bar at the bottom of your PDA screen displays all of the selected playback functions. In the previous screen, the selected camera does not have an audio channel associated with it and audio; therefore, it will not be audible during live viewing or video playback. 5. Press the Find button. The Find panel screen appears and the video footage continues to play back.
6. Press the Date drop-down arrow. The calendar window appears.
7. Select the month and day required. The calendar window closes and the selected date appears in the Date drop-down list. You can alternatively enter the required date in the Date drop-down list.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
2-21
VisionPocket
8. Select the required time by using the Time scroll bar or entering the required time in the Time text box. 9. Press the Find button. The video footage will be played back from the selected date and time. 10. Use the playback functions as required. See Playing Back Video Footage and Audio on page 2-16 for detailed information about the playback functions. 11. To save a still image, see Saving a Still Image on page 2-23 for detailed information. 12. To go to a different point in time, repeat steps 6 to 9. 13. Press the Cancel button once you have finished searching the video footage. The Find panel will close and the playback will continue. 14. Press the Stop button. The playback will cease. 15. Repeat the same steps to search through the recorded video footage and audio of a different camera.
EXPORTING STILL IMAGE FORMATS

You have the option to save still images in the following file formats:

Portable Network Graphics Compressed JPEG Interchange Format Uncompressed Windows Bitmap Format.
NOTE
When saving an image with the Menu>Grab a picture option, VisionPocket saves the image only in the JPEG format.
To help you choose the file type that best suits your needs, see Table 2-2. All values are descriptive and relative. Table 2-2: Still Image Format Feature Comparison
Features File Size Image Quality Tamper Proof System Compatibility Compressed JPEG Interchange Small Medium Yes Common; DVN 5000 Series software not required. Portable Network Graphics Medium Medium No Common; DVN 5000 Series software not required. Uncompressed Windows Bitmap Large High Yes Common; DVN 5000 Series software not required.
2-22
24-10248-56 Rev. B
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Table 2-2: Still Image Format Feature Comparison
Features Advantages Compressed JPEG Interchange Common format and good image quality relative to the file size. Portable Network Graphics Common format and good image quality relative to the file size. Not tamper proof.
VisionPocket
Uncompressed Windows Bitmap Common format and identical visual quality to the original recording as it is uncompressed. Large file size.
Disadvantages Slight loss of visual quality due to JPEG compression.
SAVING A STILL IMAGE

Once you locate the still image of interest, you may save it in one of the following three formats:

Portable Network Graphics Compressed JPEG Interchange Format Uncompressed Windows Bitmap Format.
NOTE
When saving an image with the Menu>Grab a picture option, VisionPocket saves the image only in the JPEG format.
See Exporting Still Image Formats on page 2-22 for information about the formats. To save a still image: 1. Press the Camera Selection button. The camera selection panel screen appears and the Camera button turns blue.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
2-23
VisionPocket
2. Select the camera whose still image(s) you wish to save. The selected cameras live video footage appears in the video window.
4. Press the Play button, or press Menu>Play mode>Play, to initiate playback of the selected cameras video footage and audio. The playback will begin. Audio is played back only if the audio channel is turned on and audio has been recorded for the selected camera with the video footage currently being played back. Also, the PDAs audio settings should be configured correctly.
2-24
24-10248-56 Rev. B
VisionPocket
The dynamic status bar at the bottom of your PDA screen displays all of the selected playback functions. 5. To locate the still image you wish to save, use the playback functions as described in Playing Back Video Footage and Audio on page 2-16 or use the Find function as described in Finding a Particular Image on page 2-19. 6. Once you locate the desired still image, press the Pause button or press Menu>Play mode>Pause. The playback is paused and the desired still image is displayed in the video window.
7. Press the Save button. The Save panel screen appears.
NOTE
You may also save the image by pressing Menu>Grab a picture. The image will be saved to the PDAs My Devices directory. However, you can only save the image in the JPEG format when using this method.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
2-25
VisionPocket
8. Each saved image is, by default, given a name which includes the source server, the camera name, and the date. To assign a different name, enter it in the top text box. The PDA keyboard should pop up automatically when you press on any text box. 9. Press the + sign. The browse window appears.
10. Select the preferred directory where you wish to save the still image. 11. Press the - sign. The browse window closes. 12. Press the bottom drop-down arrow to display the format menu.
13. Select the preferred file format. 14. Press the Save button. The still image is saved. 15. Press the Cancel button. The save panel appears and the playback remains paused.
2-26
24-10248-56 Rev. B
VisionPocket
16. Press the Stop button. The playback stops and live video footage is displayed. 17. To save a different still image from the same camera, repeat steps 4 to 16. 18. To save a still image from a different camera, repeat all previous steps.
AUDIO
VisionPocket enables you to listen to live and recorded audio. Audio is available if the PDA is connected to a DVN server using the Wavelet protocol and the PDAs audio settings are configured correctly. When you select to display a camera, live audio is audible if live audio is present at the time of viewing. Audio will be played back with video footage only if audio has been recorded for the selected camera with the video footage currently being played back. For detailed information about configuring audio channels, refer to one of the software installation and configuration manuals listed in Related Documentation on page 1-4. To listen to live audio: 1. Press the Camera Selection button. The camera selection panel screen appears and the Camera button turns blue.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
2-27
VisionPocket
2. Select the camera whose live audio you wish to listen to by pressing the desired Camera button. The selected cameras live video footage appears in the video window.
If the audio channel is turned on and live audio is present at the time of viewing, you will hear the cameras live audio. Also, the PDAs audio settings should be configured correctly. 3. Press the Main button. The Main screen appears with the selected camera still displayed in the video window. 4. If the audio channel is turned on, the Audio button will be blue. To turn off the audio channel, press the Audio button. The audio channel will turn off. 5. To turn on the audio channel, press the Audio button. The audio channel will turn on.
NOTE
If the selected camera does not have an audio channel associated with it, the Audio button will be disabled.
2-28
24-10248-56 Rev. B
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual To listen to recorded audio:
VisionPocket
1. Press the Camera Selection button. The camera selection panel screen appears and the Camera button turns blue.
2. Select the camera whose recorded audio you wish to listen to by pressing the desired Camera button. The selected cameras live video footage appears in the video window.
You will hear the cameras live audio if the audio channel is turned on and live audio is present at the time of viewing. Also, the PDAs audio settings should be configured correctly. 3. Press the Main button. The Main screen appears with the selected camera still displayed in the video window. 4. If the audio channel is turned on, the Audio button will be blue. To turn off the audio channel, press the Audio button. The audio channel turns off. 5. To turn on the audio channel, press the Audio button. The audio channel turns on.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
2-29
VisionPocket
NOTE
If the selected camera does not have an audio channel associated with it, the Audio button will be disabled
6. Press the Play button, or press Menu>Play mode>Play, to initiate playback of the selected cameras video footage and audio. The playback will begin. Audio will be played back only if the audio channel is turned on and audio has been recorded for the selected camera with the video footage currently being played back. Also, the PDAs audio settings should be configured correctly.
The dynamic status bar at the bottom of your PDA screen displays all of the selected playback functions. 7. Use the playback functions as described in step 5 on page 2-18. 8. To stop playback, press the Stop button.
ALARMS AND AUXILIARIES

The Alarm/Auxiliaries panel screen allows you to monitor the states of all alarm inputs and auxiliary outputs in real time. In addition, you can turn the auxiliary outputs on and off. The number of available alarms and auxiliary outputs is determined by the type and model of the DVN server. For detailed information about alarms and auxiliary outputs, refer to one of the software installation and configuration manuals listed in Related Documentation on page 1-4.
2-30
24-10248-56 Rev. B
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual To monitor the status of alarms and auxiliaries:
VisionPocket
1. Press the Alarm button. The alarm/auxiliary panel screen appears.
Displays if an alarm is active/triggered. Displays if an alarm is inactive/dormant. Displays if an auxiliary output port is open. Displays if an auxiliary output port is closed.
EXITING VISIONPOCKET
When you no longer wish to use VisionPocket, you should close the application. To exit VisionPocket: 1. Press the Close button (the X in the upper-right corner of the screen) or press Menu>Quit. You will exit VisionPocket and the application will be closed.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
2-31
VisionPocket
2-32
24-10248-56 Rev. B
Chapter
SITEMANAGER
SiteManager software is a multi-server client software used to access many network-connected Johnson Controls DVN systems simultaneously, regardless of the DVN model. SiteManager extends RemoteControl functionality to multi-server environments. SiteManager includes support for multiple server, multiple camera live view, playback, export, find, PTZ control, and other basic functions, as well as 2D maps, 3D maps, logical groups of resources, user-defined multiple camera views, spot monitor outputs, sophisticated alarm and event management, and logging, among other features. The RemoteControl client can be opened within SiteManager, allowing full setup and control of any network-connected Johnson Controls DVN server. This chapter describes all of the features of SiteManager and provides information on how to gain the full benefit from this application.
NOTE
Synchronized multiple camera playback only applies to DVN 5000 Series servers.
SOFTWARE UPGRADE INSTRUCTIONS

The section provides step-by-step instructions for upgrading SiteManager client software to Release 4.1. The software upgrade file is included on the installation media provided in the kit, or you can download the file for free from the following site:
ftp://cardkey:cardkey2000@ftp2.johnsoncontrols.com/cardkey-out/dvn_software/5000.v2.10
We recommend downloading the file before attempting the upgrade. We do not recommend running the file directly from the FTP site.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-1
SiteManager
To upgrade the SiteManager software: 1. Uninstall the current DVN SiteManager software using the Microsoft Add/Remove Programs application. Refer to the Microsoft documentation or online help for assistance. 2. Locate the JCI SiteManager 4.1.x.exe file and double-click it. The SiteManager Setup Wizard appears.
3. Click Next. The License Agreement screen appears.
4. Read the Software License Agreement, select the check box I accept the terms in the License Agreement and click Next. 5. Select the type of installation (Full or Custom) and click Next. If you select Custom, (shown in the screen capture below), you may choose to install specific software components.
3-2
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
6. To accept the default destination folder, click Install.
7. Wait a few moments while the SiteManager Setup Wizard automatically performs all the necessary tasks. 8. Once the software has been successfully installed, select whether you wish to reboot now or later, and click Finish. 9. Repeat this entire procedure for each client machine.
SITEMANAGER ORIENTATION
Logging on to SiteManager
The system administrator controls access to SiteManager resources (servers, groups, maps, and/or views). In addition, he/she creates and configures user accounts for individual users, specifying the level of access and the rights to SiteManager resources. Once the administrator configures the user accounts, you may log on to SiteManager.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-3
SiteManager
NOTE
The following instructions were documented using the default Windows Start menu. If you prefer to use the Classic Start menu, the instruction steps may vary slightly.
To log on to SiteManager: 1. From the Microsoft Windows desktop, select Start>All Programs>JCI>SiteManager. The SiteManager Main screen appears, displaying the User login dialog box.
2. Enter your SiteManager Login name and Password. Click OK.
NOTE
Failed login attempts due to an incorrect username or password may lock you out from the SiteManager software for a predetermined amount of time. For more information, see Limiting Login Attempts on page 245.
If one or more servers are configured to autoconnect, you will be logged on to SiteManager and connected to the server(s), as long as the server user name and password have been saved and the Password check box has been selected on the Server window (see page 3-21). The server will be automatically connected and the user logging on will have the same rights to the Johnson Controls DVN server resources as the user whose user name and password have been saved.
NOTE
For additional information about server autoconnection, see Servers on page 3-18 and Connecting to the Servers on page 3-38.
3. If no server is configured to autoconnect, right-click on the server name and select Connect. 4. If the server(s) user name and password have not been saved (the Password check box in the Server window is not selected), the Connecting to server dialog box appears.
3-4
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
5. Enter your DVN server (RemoteControl) Login name and Password. Click OK. 6. You will be connected to the server and will have rights to the DVN server resources that have been assigned to you in your DVN server (RemoteControl) user account. If more than one server has been configured to autoconnect, a Connecting to server window appears for each of the servers that have been configured to autoconnect. Repeat the same steps for each server.
NOTE
For additional information about editing the server and saving the server user name and password, see Creating or Importing a New Server on page 3-20.
Using the Main Screen

The SiteManager Main screen allows you to access all the resources (including servers, cameras, auxiliaries, alarms, audio and talk channels, groups, maps, and views) and their functions, as well as all windows and toolbars discussed in this chapter. See the following figure for an overview of the SiteManager Main screen. The Main screen can be split into the following:

Menu bar Toolbar Tabs Search box Hierarchy window Monitors drop-down list Monitor panel Monitor panel playback commands Log window tabs Virtual video desktop Camera video screen
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-5
SiteManager System log Status bar
Toolbar
Menu bar
Tabs
Virtual video desktop
Search box
Hierarchy window Camera video screen
Monitors drop-down list Monitor panel Monitor panel playback commands Log window tabs Status bar
System log

The following features are available on the SiteManager Main screen.
Virtual video desktop Hierarchy window
When selected, camera, map, and/or monitor screens are displayed on this desktop. All servers, groups, maps or views, and their available resources are displayed in this window when the corresponding tab is selected. Individual video footage is displayed on the screen along with all the playback commands. See Camera Video Screens on page 3-102 for detailed information. Allows you to search for a particular resource. Displays all system events, tasks performed, performed setup changes, system connections, logins, logouts, disconnections, and system errors. In addition, displays alarm notifications and video export tasks.
Camera video screen
Search box System log
3-6
24-10248-56 Rev. B

Status bar
SiteManager
Displays the details of the most recent task performed. To show the status bar, from the menu bar, select Window>Show statusbar.
Menu Bar
User
Provides access to user functions such as login, log out, change password, save, and synchronize the system configuration, as well as various administrative functions relating to user accounts. Provides access to server functions such as new server, delete and edit server, connect, disconnect, disconnect all, setup, full interface, quality, autoconnect, autodisplay, and import and export server. Provides access to group functions such as new group, delete group, edit group, show, hide, connect, disconnect, add resource, autoconnect, and autodisplay. Provides access to map functions such as new map, new 3D map, delete map, edit map, show/hide, connect, disconnect, add resources, autoconnect, autodisplay, and send to monitor (for 2D maps only). Provides access to view functions such as new view, delete view, edit view, show/hide, connect, disconnect, edit layouts, layout, full screen, quality, add resource, autoconnect, autodisplay, and send to monitor. Provides access to monitor functions such as: VGA monitor Edit monitor, blank, show resource, and autodisplay DVN 100-NET monitors New monitor, edit monitor, delete monitor, setup monitor, show camera, and autoconnect Monitor Groups New monitor group Provides access to resource functions such as turn on, turn off, show, hide, edit resource, delete resource, set priority, move top left, rotate, connect, disconnect, and send to monitor. Provides access to the Events Configuration window, the Options window, the Log Explorer window, and the VisionWeb ActiveX Manager. See VisionWeb ActiveX Manager on page 3-266 for detailed information. Also allows you to start desktop recording. Provides access to video window functions present in the toolbar as well as Show log window, Show monitors panel, Remember window positions, and Show status bar.
Server
Group
Map
View
Monitor
Resource
Tools
Window
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-7
SiteManager
Help
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Provides online user documentation and SiteManager version information.
Toolbar
New server/group/ view/map/3D map/ monitor
Allows you to add a server, group, view, map, 3D map, or monitor to the existing configuration. Once you have selected which resource you wish to add, the corresponding hierarchy appears in the hierarchy window. Allows you to add a new camera. Allows you to add a new auxiliary. Allows you to add a new alarm. Arranges currently displayed camera video screens in rows and columns. The number of camera video windows in each row is determined by the 1x, 2x and 4x selection. Arranges currently displayed camera video screens on top of one another (that is, in a cascade arrangement). Displays one camera video screen on each row. Displays two camera video screens on each row. Displays four camera video screens on each row. Displays camera(s) as the top layer on the virtual video desktop for clear viewing when maps, views, monitors and/or server interfaces are also present. Displays map(s) as the top layer in the virtual video desktop for clear viewing when cameras, views, monitors and/or server interfaces are also present. Displays view(s) as the top layer in the virtual video desktop for clear viewing when cameras, maps, monitors and/or server interfaces are also present. Displays server interface(s) at the top layer in the virtual video desktop for clear viewing when cameras, maps, views and/or monitors are also present.
Add camera Add aux Add alarm Tile
Cascade
1x 2x 4x Bring cameras to front
Bring maps to front
Bring views to front
Bring server interfaces to front
Tabs
Servers Groups Maps Views
Displays servers configured in SiteManager and their resources. Displays groups configured in SiteManager and their resources. Displays maps configured in SiteManager and their resources. Displays views configured in SiteManager.
3-8
24-10248-56 Rev. B

Monitors
SiteManager
Displays monitors physically connected to and/or configured on the SiteManager client. Allows you to search for a particular resource. All servers, groups, maps, views, or monitors and their available resources are displayed in this window when you select the corresponding tab. Allows you to select which monitors you wish to work with individual or monitor groups. Displays the Monitor panel drop-down selection. Allows you to work with monitors and monitor groups. Allows you to use standard playback commands for individual monitors and monitor groups.
Search box Hierarchy window
Monitors drop-down list Monitor panel
Monitor panel playback commands
Log Window Tabs

Log actions
Allows you to view the system log, which lists the following: System events Tasks performed Performed setup changes System connections Logins and logouts Disconnections System errors The system log is deleted only when you close the SiteManager application.
Alarms
Allows you to display the Alarms Management panel. The Alarms Management panel information is deleted when you log out and close the SiteManager application. See Managing Alarm Events on page 3-80 for detailed information.
Video Export
Allows you to display the Video Export panel. The Video Export panel information is deleted when you log out and close the SiteManager application. For detailed information, see Saving a Video Clip on page 3-122 and Saving Video Clips on page 3-190.
Server alert
Allows you display the Server Alert panel which logs information about all servers that have been configured to perform server status checks. See Configuring Regular Server Status Checks on page 3-253 for detailed information.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-9
SiteManager
System log
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual When you select the Alarms tab (or an alarm is triggered), the system log displays the Alarms Management panel. When you select the Video Export tab (or a video clip is being exported), the system log displays the Video Export panel. When you select the Log actions tab, the Log window displays the system log. When you select the Server alert tab (or an error is detected during a server status check), the Log window displays the Server Alert panel.
NOTE
To use any of the options under Resource in the menu bar, you must always first select the required resource in the hierarchy window by selecting the Plus sign (+) in front of the server to display available resources, and then select the appropriate option under Resource in the menu bar.
Saving the SiteManager Configuration

The SiteManager configuration is saved by default every time you close the application. However, if you wish to save the configuration changes without closing SiteManager, perform the following procedure.
NOTE
See Creating User Accounts on page 3-13 for detailed information about the user options and types.
To save the SiteManager configuration: 1. Once you have performed any configuration changes, select User>Save configuration now. 2. The configuration is saved.
Logging Out of SiteManager

You may exit SiteManager or log on as a different user. To log out of SiteManager: 1. To log out of SiteManager and log on a different user, from the menu bar, select User>Logout. The Logging out window appears and you are logged out of SiteManager. 2. The new user needs to select User>Login from the menu bar, and enter their user name and password.
3-10
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
3. To exit SiteManager, click the X button in the top right-hand corner of the monitor screen. The Configuration window appears and you are exited from SiteManager.
USER MANAGEMENT
To access SiteManager and use its resources, the administrator must create user accounts in SiteManager. In addition, to connect to a DVN server and DVN 100-NET encoder included in the SiteManager configuration and to use their resources, you must have an account created on the DVN 5000 and DVN 3000 servers, and DVN 100-NET encoder. For detailed information about creating user accounts on the server, refer to the DVN 5000 Series or DVN 3000 Series Software Installation and Configuration Manual, and/or the DVN 100-NET Installation and Operation Manual. See Related Documentation on page 1-4.
Editing the Admin Account

The admin user name and password defined in SiteManager can only be used to log into SiteManager and access the SiteManager resources. Connection to the servers and encoders, which are part of the SiteManager configuration, is still controlled by the server connection user name and password specified at the servers and encoders respectively. For detailed information about creating user accounts on the server, refer to the following manuals:

DVN 5000 Series Software Installation and Configuration Manual DVN 3000 Series Software Installation and Configuration Manual DVN 100-NET Installation and Operation Manual
NOTE
The administrator's user name (admin) cannot be changed.
Unlike for DVN servers and DVN 100-NET encoders, there may be more than one administrator in SiteManager. However, the admin account remains the only account with access to all SiteManager features. See Creating User Accounts on page 3-13 for details about user options and types. To edit the admin account: 1. From the menu bar, select User>Administrator.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-11
SiteManager
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Only the administrator(s) and any user granted the right to edit accounts can edit the admin account. If you do not see the Administrator option listed under the User menu, you do not have the proper rights to edit the admin account.
2. Select Edit User. If the Edit User option is disabled (grayed out), you do not have the proper rights to edit the admin account. The Edit user account dialog appears.
3. From the Select User drop-down list, select admin and click OK. The admin User account dialog appears.
4. Enter the preferred password.
NOTE
The admin account has rights to perform all functions. In addition, you may use the same password as the one used for RemoteControl.
5. (Optional) Enter the administrators full name in the Full name text box. 6. Click OK. You are now ready to configure SiteManager and create other user accounts. See Creating User Accounts on page 3-13.
Changing the Administrator Password

To change the administrator password: 1. From the menu bar, select User>Change Password.
3-12
24-10248-56 Rev. B
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual The Change user password dialog appears.
SiteManager
2. Enter the Old password. 3. Enter the New password. 4. Enter the new password again in the Confirm password field. 5. Click OK.
Creating User Accounts

To create SiteManager user accounts, you need to define the user name and password, type, and permission options. Note the following:
The administrator(s) and any user that has been granted the right to create and/or edit accounts will have access to user accounts. The user name and password defined in SiteManager can only be used to log into SiteManager and access its resources. Connection to the servers and encoders which are part of the SiteManager configuration is still controlled by the server connection user name and password specified at the DVN server and DVN 100-NET encoder respectively. For detailed information about creating user accounts on the server, refer to the following manuals: DVN 5000 Software Installation and Configuration Manual DVN 3000 Software Installation and Configuration Manual DVN 100-NET Installation and Operation Manual
You may create multiple administrative accounts. However, there is only one true administrator in SiteManager (that is, the administrator with the default admin account). Selecting the Administrator user type for any other account provides the user with access to all permission options, but the user will not be able to access any of the features or functions under the Tools menu (that is, the user will not have access to the Events Configuration window, ActiveX Manager, Log Explorer window and Options window. In addition, the user will not be able to enable the desktop screen recorder).
To create a user account: 1. From the menu bar, select User>Administrator>New user. The User account dialog appears.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-13
SiteManager 2. Select the General tab.
3. Assign the new user a user name and enter it into the Login field. 4. Assign a password and enter it into the Password field. 5. (Optional) Enter the users full name in the Full name text box.
NOTE
The Enabled check box, if selected, allows the user to log on to SiteManager. If you deselect the check box, the user account can be created, but the user will be unable to log on to SiteManager.
6. Define the user type by using the Type drop-down list.
SiteManager allows you to custom configure the user account (Custom) or allocate a predefined level of access (User, Power user or Administrator). See Table 3-1 for a description of user permission options. If you select User, then options 1 and 5 will be enabled. If you select Power user, then options 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 will be enabled. If you select Administrator, then options 1-9 will be enabled. If you select Custom, then options 1-9 can be enabled or disabled, as required.
7. Select the Profile tab.
3-14
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
The account permissions enabled are determined by the user type selected on the General tab. Table 3-1 contains a description of each user permission option. Table 3-1: User Permission Options
Option Number Option Resource Options 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Use resources Create resources Delete resources Edit resources Use window recorder The user has the right to utilize any server, group, map, view, and monitor. The user has the right to create servers, groups, maps, views, and monitors. The user has the right to delete any server, group, map, view, and monitor. The user has the right to edit any server, group, map, view, and monitor. The user has the right to export video footage from camera video screens on the fly. Account Options 6. 7. 8. Edit own account Create accounts Delete accounts Edit accounts The user has the right to access the Password window and edit his/her password. The user has the right to access the administrator user menu and can only create a new account. The user has the right to access the administrator user menu and can only delete an account. The user has the right to access the administrator user menu and can only edit an account. Function
9.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-15
SiteManager
NOTE
If you selected the Custom user type, you may modify the permissions on the Profile tab. If you selected User, Power user, or Administrator, you cannot modify the permissions on the Profile tab.
NOTE
If you select Custom after you have selected any of the other three user types, the custom permissions will be the same as those associated with the user type that was selected last. Verify that you select the correct options for the user.
8. Click OK.
Editing or Deleting User Accounts

You may edit user accounts to alter the user name, password and type, or to grant and deny certain user permission options. You may also delete a user account if he/she no longer uses SiteManager.
NOTE
Any user that has been granted the right to edit and/or delete SiteManager accounts can edit and/or delete any user account, regardless of his/her user type. See Creating User Accounts on page 3-13 for details about user options and types.
To edit a user account: 1. From the menu bar, select User>Administrator>Edit user. The Edit user account dialog appears. 2. From the Select user drop-down list, select the user you wish to edit and click OK.
3-16
24-10248-56 Rev. B
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual The User account dialog appears.
SiteManager
3. Edit the fields on the General and Profile tabs, as necessary. If the user type for the selected user is set to Custom, you may edit the check boxes on the Profile tab. If the user type for the selected user is set to User, Power user, or Administrator, you cannot edit the check boxes on the Profile tab. 4. Click OK. To delete a user account: 1. From the menu bar, select User>Administrator>Delete user. The Delete user account dialog appears. 2. From the Select user drop-down list, select the user you wish to delete and click OK.
3. Click Yes on the Confirm dialog.
Changing the User Password

Administrators may change any user password. Users that have the Edit own account option enabled may change their own user password. To change the user password: 1. From the menu bar, select User>Change Password. The Change user password dialog appears.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-17
SiteManager
2. Enter the Old password. 3. Enter the New password. 4. Enter the new password again in the Confirm password field. 5. Click OK.
NOTE
A password may also be changed by editing an account and simply typing over the old password in the Password field. See Editing or Deleting User Accounts on page 3-16.
SERVERS
One of many advantages of SiteManager is the ability to simultaneously access full remote control and viewing of facilities for numerous network-connected Johnson Controls DVN 5000 and DVN 3000 Series servers, and DVN 100-NET encoders. You must be granted the right to create, use, edit, and delete resources based upon your user account configuration to have access to all of the functions listed in this section.
Server Setup
To set up servers, click the Servers tab and perform one of the following actions:

Right-click on the server in the hierarchy window Click a server in the hierarchy window and select Server from the menu bar
NOTE
To activate Server menu options, select the Servers tab and then select a server within the hierarchy window.
3-18
24-10248-56 Rev. B
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual The following functions are available:

New server Delete server Edit server Connect / Disconnect Disconnect all Setup server
SiteManager
Allows you to create a new server. Allows you to delete a selected server. Allows you to edit server properties. A toggle button that allows you to open/close a client connection to the server. Allows you to disconnect all the currently connected servers. Displays the RemoteControl Setup screen, which allows you to change the server setup, if required, without logging on to RemoteControl. Displays the RemoteControl Main screen, which grants you direct access and full functionality of RemoteControl. Allows you to select the connection quality when connecting to a DVN 5000 or DVN 3000 Series server. Automatically connects the server. The same occurs upon all subsequent logins. Automatically displays all the servers camera resources. The same occurs upon all subsequent logins.
Full interface
Quality
Autoconnect
Autodisplay
NOTE
Enabling the Autoconnect and Autodisplay functions on multiple SiteManager clients attempting to connect to a large number of cameras (all on the same network) may delay the application during start-up if any connection issues arise during the process.
Export server
Allows you to save a servers configuration and then import it on a different client or when configuring each users resources. Allows you to import an exported server on a different client or when configuring each users resources.
Import server
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-19
SiteManager
Connection Quality
See Table 3-2 for an overview of the quality options available when connecting to a DVN 5000 or DVN 3000 Series server via SiteManager.
NOTE
Image quality is directly related to the available bandwidth. For example, a high connection quality setting requires more bandwidth to transmit the images but produces a better quality image than images transmitted with a low connection quality setting.
Table 3-2: Connection Quality Options

Quality Option Highest High Medium Low 1. 2. Description Local Area Network (LAN) T1 / T3 2 x ISDN1 / x DSL2 Modem / ISDN
Integrated Services Digital Network Digital Subscriber Line
Creating or Importing a New Server

SiteManager allows you to simultaneously access numerous Johnson Controls DVN 5000 and DVN 3000 Series servers, and DVN 100-NET encoders. In order to access full remote control and viewing functionalities, you must add the servers and encoders to SiteManager. Usually the administrator creates all the available network servers and encoders, unless you were granted the right to create resources based upon your user account configuration. You can manually create a new server or you can import one that was previously exported. Before you import a server, you must first export the server(s). See Exporting Servers on page 3-25 for information about exporting servers. See also Creating User Accounts on page 3-13 for information on user account configuration.
NOTE
SiteManager does not support connecting to a DVN 100-NET running firmware version 2.7 or earlier. If you wish to connect to a DVN 100-NET running an older firmware version using SiteManager, upgrade the devices firmware to the latest version available. Refer to the DVN 5000 and 100-NET Series Software Release Notes for Release 2.10 for upgrade instructions.
3-20
24-10248-56 Rev. B
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual To manually create a new server:
SiteManager
1. Click the Servers tab. To select the New server option, perform one of the following actions: Right-click the hierarchy window and click New server Click the New server icon in the toolbar Select Server>New server from the menu bar
The Server window appears.
2. Enter the following: Server name Quality (connection) Type of server
See Servers on page 3-18 for detailed information on connection quality. 3. Enter the Username and Password. These details are used to establish a connection between the SiteManager client and the DVN server, so you must have an account on the server, and the user name and password you specify must be configured as such on the server. 4. To save the user name and password, verify the Password check box is selected. All users connecting to the server have identical rights to the server resources, as does the user whose user name and password have been saved.
NOTE
If you have saved the user name and password of a user with more permissions (for example, the administrator) and a user with less permissions is connecting to the server, the user with less permissions will have the same rights to the server resources as does the administrator. Rights to SiteManager resources (servers, groups, maps, and views), however, are determined by the users account configuration in SiteManager.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-21
SiteManager
5. If you do not wish to save the user name and password, deselect the Password check box. When users attempt to connect to the server, they will be asked for their own user name and password. Once they enter their (server) user name and password, they will be connected to the server and only have rights to those server resources as specified in their server (RemoteControl) user account. Rights to SiteManager resources (servers, groups, maps, and views), however, are determined by the users account configuration in SiteManager. 6. If you want each user to connect to the server/encoder without the need to enter his/her SiteManager user name and password, select the Login to server using current login credentials check box. When the user attempts to connect to the server, he will be connected to the server and only have rights to those server resources as specified in his server (RemoteControl) user account and only have rights to SiteManager resources (servers, groups, maps, views, clients and monitors) according to the users SiteManager account.
NOTE
The users SiteManager login name and password must be identical to the server login name and password.
7. If the SiteManager client will connect to the server via a LAN connection, click Network and enter the servers IP address in the Address field. Go to step 13. 8. If the SiteManager client will connect to the server via a modem connection, ISDN connection, VPN connection, or a serial, parallel or infrared port, click Remote Access. The remote access toolbar appears on the Server window.
3-22
24-10248-56 Rev. B
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual 9. Click New. The Network Connection Wizard window appears.
SiteManager
10. To create a dial-up connection, select Dial-up to private network and follow the on screen prompts to configure the connection settings. To create a VPN connection, select Connect to a private network through the Internet and follow the on screen prompts to configure the connection settings. To create a direct port connection, select Connect directly to another computer and follow the on screen prompts to configure the connection settings. To create a broadband connection, select Connect to the network via broadband and follow the on screen prompts to configure the connection settings. 11. Click Finish. The Server window appears and the created connection is included in the Connection drop-down list. 12. From the Connection drop-down list, select the connection you wish to use for the selected server. 13. To view the server resources at the time of connection, select the Expand tree when connected check box. 14. Click OK. The new server appears in the hierarchy window. 15. Repeat the previous steps to create additional servers/encoders. To import a server: 1. Select the Servers tab. 2. Right click on the hierarchy window and select Import server, or select Server>Import server from the menu bar.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-23
SiteManager The Open dialog box appears.
3. Navigate to the correct drive and folder where the server configuration file is located. 4. Select the required server configuration file and click Open. The selected server appears on the Servers hierarchy tab.
NOTE
The user name and password are not imported.
5. Edit the servers configuration settings, as needed. See the server edit sections of this manual for assistance.
3-24
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
Exporting Servers
SiteManager allows you to export any server configuration file. You can then import these files when creating resources for different users or when configuring multiple SiteManager clients. See Creating or Importing a New Server on page 3-20 for information about exporting a server. See also Creating User Accounts on page 3-13 for information on configuring user accounts. To export a server: 1. Select the Servers tab. 2. In the hierarchy window, select the server you wish to export. 3. Right-click over the server you wish to export and select Export server or select Server>Export server from the menu bar. The Save As dialog box appears.
4. Navigate to the drive and folder where you wish to save the server configuration file. 5. Click Save. 6. SiteManager saves the configuration file and the system log states that the file has been saved.
NOTE
The user name and password are not imported.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-25
SiteManager
Editing Server Network Connections

You may edit each server included in a SiteManager configuration as necessary to change the IP address of a servers network connection. Usually, the administrator edits all the available network servers, unless you were granted the right to edit resources based upon your user account configuration. See Creating User Accounts on page 3-13 for information on user account configuration. Editing a servers IP address only applies to the SiteManager application. It does not affect the server itself in any way.
IMPORTANT
Verify that the server is not connected before performing the following procedure.
To edit a server network connection: 1. Click the Servers tab. All available servers are displayed in the hierarchy window.
2. Right-click the desired Server icon or select the server in the hierarchy window and select Server from the menu bar. The Server menu appears.
3-26
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
If you selected a DVN 100-NET encoder, the menu options are different than those shown in the previous screen capture. 3. Click Edit server. The Server window appears.
4. Enter/change the servers IP address in the Address field. 5. Click OK. The Server window closes and the new IP address is applied.
Editing Server Dial-Up Connections

You may edit each server included in a SiteManager configuration. If the client uses a dial-up connection to connect to the server, editing the servers dial-up connection settings allows you to configure the connection to meet your exact requirements. Usually, the administrator edits all the available network servers, unless you were granted the right to edit resources based upon your user account configuration. Refer to one of the software installation and configuration manuals listed in Related Documentation on page 1-4 for information on user account configuration. Editing a servers dial-up connection only applies to the SiteManager application. It does not affect the server itself in any way.
IMPORTANT
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-27
SiteManager
To edit a server dial-up connection: 1. Click the Servers tab. All available servers appears in the hierarchy window.
2. Right-click the desired Server icon or click the server in the hierarchy window and select Server from the menu bar. The server menu appears.
3-28
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
4. Click Edit in the remote access toolbar. The Dial-up Connection window (General tab) appears. 5. Configure the connection settings, as needed. 6. Once you have completed editing the selected dial-up connection, click OK on the Dial-up Connection window. The Server window appears. 7. Click OK. The Server window closes and the connection settings are applied.
Editing Server VPN Connections

You may edit each server included in a SiteManager configuration. If the client uses a VPN connection to connect to the server, editing the servers VPN connection settings allows you to configure the connection to meet your exact requirements. Usually, the administrator edits all the available network servers, unless you were granted the right to edit resources based upon your user account configuration. See Creating User Accounts on page 3-13 for information on configuring user accounts. Editing a servers VPN connection only applies to the SiteManager application. It does not affect the server itself in any way.
IMPORTANT
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-29
SiteManager
To edit a server VPN connection: 1. Click the Servers tab. All available servers appear in the hierarchy window.
3-30
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
4. Click Edit in the remote access toolbar. The Virtual Private Connection window (General tab) appears.
5. Configure the connection settings, as needed. 6. Once you have completed editing the selected VPN connection, click OK on the Virtual Private Connection window. The Server window appears. 7. Click OK. The Server window closes and the connection settings are applied.
Editing Server Direct Connections

You may edit each server included in a SiteManager configuration. If the client uses a direct connection to connect to the server, editing the servers direct connection settings allows you to configure the connection to meet your exact requirements. Usually, the administrator edits all available network servers, unless you were granted the right to edit resources based upon your user account configuration. See Creating User Accounts on page 3-13 for information on user account configuration.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-31
SiteManager
Editing a servers direct connection only applies to the SiteManager application. It does not affect the server itself in any way.
IMPORTANT
To edit a server direct connection: 1. Click the Servers tab. All available servers appear in the hierarchy window.
3-32
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
4. Click Edit in the remote access toolbar. The Direct Connection window (General tab) appears.
5. Configure the connection settings, as necessary. 6. Once you have completed editing the selected direct connection, click OK on the Direct Connection window. The Server window appears. 7. Click OK. The Server window closes and the connection settings are applied.
Editing a Server Broadband Connection

You may edit each server included in a SiteManager configuration. If a client uses a broadband connection to connect to the server, editing the servers broadband connection settings allows you to configure the connection so that it meets your exact requirements. Usually, the administrator edits all the available network servers, unless you were granted the right to edit resources based upon your user account configuration. See Creating User Accounts on page 3-13 for information on configuring user accounts. Editing a servers broadband connection only applies to the SiteManager application. It does not affect the server itself in any way.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-33
SiteManager
IMPORTANT
To edit a server broadband connection: 1. Click the Servers tab. All available servers appear in the hierarchy window.
3-34
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
4. Click Edit in the remote access toolbar. The Broadband Connection window (General tab) appears.
5. Configure the connection settings, as necessary. 6. Once you have completed editing the selected direct connection, click OK on the Broadband Connection window. The Server window appears. 7. Click OK. The Server window closes and the connection settings are applied.
Renaming or Deleting Server Connections

Sometimes you may want to rename or completely remove a servers remote access connection. Usually, the administrator renames or deletes available network servers, unless you were granted the right to edit and delete resources based upon your user account configuration. See Creating User Accounts on page 3-13 for information on configuring user accounts.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-35
SiteManager
Renaming or deleting a servers connection only applies to the SiteManager application. It does not affect the server itself in any way.
IMPORTANT
To rename or delete a server connection: 1. Click the Servers tab. All available servers appear in the hierarchy window.
If you selected a DVN 100-NET encoder, the menu options are different than those shown in the previous screen capture.
3-36
24-10248-56 Rev. B
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual 3. Click Edit server. The Server window appears.
SiteManager
4. To change the name of a remote access connection, click Rename in the remote access toolbar. The Rename window appears.
5. Enter the preferred connection name. Click OK. The selected connection is renamed and the Server window appears. 6. To remove a remote access connection, click Delete in the remote access toolbar. The Confirm window appears.
7. Click Yes. The selected connection is deleted and the Server window appears. 8. Click OK. The Server window closes and all changes are applied.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-37
SiteManager
Connecting to the Servers

Once you add the servers to the configuration, you must connect to the servers in order to access the servers resources and thus gain full functionality of SiteManager. To connect to the server: 1. Click the Servers tab. All the available servers appear in the hierarchy window.
If you selected a DVN 100-NET encoder, the menu options are different than those shown in the previous screen capture. 3. Click Connect. You may also simply double-click the server in the hierarchy window to connect. 4. If the user name and password have been saved (the password check box in the Server window is selected), the SiteManager client will be connected to the server with the rights of the user whose name and password have been saved. A Plus (+) sign will be displayed in front of the server name in the hierarchy window.
3-38
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
You may need to use the scroll bar at the bottom of the hierarchy window to display the Plus sign (+). 5. If the servers user name and password have not been saved (the password check box in the Server window is not selected), the Connecting to server window appears.
6. If the connection with the server is created using the credentials of the user currently logged into SiteManager, then the SiteManager client will be connected to the server with the rights of the user currently logged into SiteManager. A Plus (+) sign will be displayed in front of the server name in the hierarchy window. 7. Enter your DVN server (RemoteControl) Login name and Password. Click OK. You will be connected to the server and a Plus (+) sign will be displayed in front of the server name in the hierarchy window.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-39
SiteManager
8. To display the servers resources, click the Plus (+) sign or double-click the server in the hierarchy window. The Plus (+) sign is now a Minus (-) sign and all the servers resources are displayed in the hierarchy window.
9. Repeat the previous steps for each server. To disconnect from a server: 1. Right-click the desired Server icon or click the server in the hierarchy window and select Server from the menu bar. The server menu appears.
2. Click Disconnect. You will be disconnected from the server. 3. To disconnect from all currently connected servers, select Disconnect all.
NOTE
By selecting the Autoconnect option instead, the server will be automatically connected. This will also occur upon all subsequent logins to SiteManager. To disable this feature, click Autoconnect again.
3-40
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
Editing Server Properties

You may edit server properties, such as name, username, password, connection quality, and type, at any point by following a few simple steps. In order to edit a server, you must be granted the right to edit resources based upon your user account configuration. To edit a servers network or remote access connection, see the following:

Editing Server Network Connections on page 3-26 Editing Server Dial-Up Connections on page 3-27 Editing Server VPN Connections on page 3-29 Editing Server Direct Connections on page 3-31 Editing a Server Broadband Connection on page 3-33
To edit server properties: 1. Click the Servers tab. To select the Edit server option, perform one of the following actions: Right-click the server in the hierarchy window and click Edit server Click the server in the hierarchy window and from the menu bar select Server>Edit server
2. Change the servers properties as required. Click OK. The new servers properties are applied. 3. To edit the connection quality, click Quality in the Server menu and select one of the four options. 4. See Servers on page 3-18 for detailed information on connection quality. See also Server Setup and Full Interface on page 3-42 for information about the server alarm functions and Working with Server Resources on page 3-46 for information about the Reset names function. To delete a server: 1. Click the Servers tab. All available servers appear in the hierarchy window.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-41
SiteManager
2. Right-click the desired Server icon or click the server in the hierarchy window and select Server from the menu bar. The server menu appears. 3. Click Delete server. 4. When the Confirmation box appears, click Yes to delete the server from the configuration.
Server Setup and Full Interface

SiteManager allows you to directly access RemoteControl for DVN 5000 and DVN 3000 Series servers without the need to log off SiteManager and log on to the servers interface separately. It allows you direct control of the selected servers configuration, as well as full RemoteControl functionality for DVN 5000 and DVN 3000 Series servers. You can also view DVN 5000, DVN 3000, and DVN 100-NET video from a single SiteManager at the same time. Note the following:
To access a DVN 5000 or DVN 3000 servers setup screen and/or full interface, DVN 5000 or DVN 3000 RemoteControl applications must be installed on the SiteManager client. For detailed information about installing RemoteControl, please refer to the DVN 5000 Series Installation and Configuration Manual or the DVN 3000 Series Installation and Configuration Manual. DVN 100-NET encoders can be configured using the SiteManager Server Setup feature; however, the Full Interface feature is not supported. The number and type of server configuration changes you may perform in the Setup screen are determined by the rights you have been granted based upon your RemoteControl user account configuration.
To use the Server Setup feature: 1. Click the Servers tab. To select the Setup server option: Right-click the server in the hierarchy window and click Setup server or Click the server in the hierarchy window, and from the menu bar select Server>Setup server.
If connecting to a DVN 5000 or DVN 3000 Series server, the RemoteControl Setup screen appears.
3-42
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
You may need to wait a few moments while SiteManager loads the selected servers interface. If connecting to a DVN 100-NET encoder, the Login screen appears. To configure the DVN 100-NET, enter your User name and Password and click OK. The DVN 100-NET Current Setup page appears.
2. Change the server configuration, as required. For information on configuring the server, refer to one of the following manuals:
24-10248-56 Rev. B
DVN 5000 Series Software Installation and Configuration Manual DVN 3000 Series Software Installation and Configuration Manual
3-43
SiteManager
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual DVN 100-NET Series Installation and Operation Manual
To use the Full Interface feature: 1. Click the Servers tab. To select the Full interface option: Right-click the server in the hierarchy window and click Full interface or Click the server in the hierarchy window, and from the menu bar select Server>Full interface.
If connecting to a DVN 5000 or DVN 3000 Series server, the RemoteControl Main screen appears.
You may need to wait a few moments while SiteManager loads the remote server control. 2. Log on to the servers software. Refer to one of the software user manuals listed in Related Documentation on page 1-4 for information on RemoteControl. 3. Use the DVN 5000 or DVN 3000 RemoteControl application, as required.
Server Resources
Server resources may include up to:

32 cameras 16 auxiliaries 128 alarms 32 mono audio channels or 16 stereo audio channels (listen)
3-44
24-10248-56 Rev. B
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual 1 talk channel (talk back)
SiteManager
Individual server hierarchies are automatically configured by SiteManager based on the resources available at the server and are displayed in the hierarchy window. The server resources can only be used or edited. They cannot be created or deleted. You must be granted the right to edit resources based upon your user account configuration to access all the functions. See Alarm Manager on page 3-56 for detailed information about configuring alarms and auxiliaries.
Server Resource Menu Options

The functions available for managing server resources are:
Show/Hide
A toggle button that allows you to display/remove camera video screens on/from the virtual video desktop. A toggle button that allows you to activate/deactivate auxiliaries and alarms. Displays the Resource Properties window, which allows you to assign names to cameras, auxiliaries, and alarms and select their unique IDs. Allows you to activate the priority boost mode and increase a cameras FPS (Frames per second) rate on demand. This feature only applies to cameras that are connected to a DVN 5000 multiplexed server. Please refer to DVN 5000 Series Installation and Configuration Manual for additional information about the priority boost mode. Allows you to display the selected camera on a VGA or network (DVN 100-NET) monitor. You can only send a camera to a VGA monitor when the VGA monitor is not in the sequence resource mode. A DVN 3000 camera can only be sent to a VGA monitor.
Turn on/Turn off
Edit resource
Set priority
Send to monitor
Disconnect
Allows you to disconnect the resource. Disconnecting one resource automatically disconnects the entire server to which the resource is connected. Allows you to mute an audio channel. Allows you to adjust the volume of the audio and talk channels.
Mute 0% - 100%
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-45
SiteManager
Resource Status
The hierarchy window resource icons display changes according to whether the resource is connected (active) or disconnected (inactive). See Table 3-3.
NOTE
If a server resource (camera, dome, aux, alarm, or audio channel) is disabled at the server (e.g. Camera 5 is not enabled on a DVN 5000 server), the resource hierarchy will not display the resource (e.g. the DVN 5000 will not display Camera 5). If a camera or dome is disconnected at the server (e.g. Camera 5 input does not have a camera connected on DVN 5000 server), the resource hierarchy will display the camera with a block (e.g. the DVN 5000 will display Camera 5 with a block).
Table 3-3: Resource Icons

Resource Camera Fixed Camera Dome Aux Alarm Audio Talk N/A N/A N/A N/A Connected or Active Disconnected or Inactive Disconnected at the Server
Working with Server Resources

To work with resource menu options, you must first select a resource. You must be granted the right to use and/or edit resources based upon your user account configuration to work with server resources. To activate and work with a resource: 1. Display the available resources by clicking the Plus sign (+) in front of the resource type or by double-clicking on the resource in the hierarchy window. The available resources appear in the hierarchy window.
3-46
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
2. To access the Resource menu, right-click a Resource icon, or click the resource in the hierarchy window and select Resource from the menu bar. 3. Select the desired resource type. The corresponding resource menu appears. 4. Select and click the required option. See the following definitions:
Show
The selected camera is displayed in its individual camera video screen.
Hide Connect (Camera) Disconnect (Camera)
The selected cameras video screen is no longer displayed. SiteManager establishes a connection with the cameras server. SiteManager disconnects from the cameras server.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-47
SiteManager
Edit resource (Camera)
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual The Resource Properties window appears.
Enter the preferred camera name in the Name text box and click OK. The name and I.D. appear in the server hierarchy window. The Unique ID field is not used.
Set priority
This feature allows you to increase a cameras FPS rate on demand. When Set priority is selected, the priority boost will be activated for the selected camera. The priority boost will remain active until you stop the priority boost mode by clicking Set priority again. Refer to DVN 5000 Series Installation and Configuration Manual for additional information about the priority boost.
Send to monitor
The Monitor menu appears. Select the monitor on which you wish to display the selected camera. If you select to display the camera on a VGA monitor, the selected camera will not be displayed on the VGA monitor until you close/blank the monitor. You can only send a camera to a VGA monitor when the VGA monitor is not in the sequence resource mode.
Turn on Turn off Connect (Alarm or Aux) Disconnect (Alarm or Aux) Edit resource (Alarm)
The selected aux or alarm will be activated. The selected aux or alarm will be deactivated. SiteManager will establish a connection with the alarms or auxs server. SiteManager will disconnect from the alarms or auxs server.
The Resource Properties window appears.
3-48
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
Enter the preferred alarm name in the Name text box and click OK. The name and I.D. appear in the server hierarchy window. The Unique ID field is not used.
Edit resource (Aux)
The Resource Properties window appears.
Enter the preferred aux name in the Name text box and click OK. The name and I.D. appear in the server hierarchy window. The Unique ID field is not used.
Mute (Audio Channel) 0% 100% (Audio or Talk Channel)
The audio channel will be muted.
The audio channel or talk channel volume will be adjusted to match the selection.
5. You may also assign a resource name by double-clicking on the resource name in the hierarchy window and typing in the preferred name.
NOTE
When double-clicking on the resource name, the second click needs to be slightly delayed.
Camera Name Reset

If you wish to have identical camera names as specified on the corresponding server, you may use the name reset function. This is a camera only function. To reset camera names, you must be granted the right to create and/or edit resources based upon your user account configuration.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-49
SiteManager To assign server camera names:
1. Click the Servers tab. To select the Edit server option: Right-click the server in the hierarchy window and click Edit server or Click the server in the hierarchy window and select Server>Edit server from the menu bar.
The Server window appears.
2. Click Reset names. The Confirm dialog box appears.
3. Click Yes. The camera names are changed to match the camera names defined on the selected server. 4. Click OK. The Server window closes.
Other Information (Cameras)

You may also display a camera by simply:

Double-clicking on the camera in the hierarchy window, or Clicking and dragging the desired camera to the virtual video desktop, or Selecting the Autodisplay option in the Server menu
For additional information, see Camera Video Screens on page 3-102 and Configuring the Virtual Video Desktop on page 3-242.
Other Information (Audio)

To enable an audio channel and be able to listen to live audio, the corresponding camera must first be displayed in its camera video screen and/or view. You may also
3-50
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
talk back to the server by enabling the Talk channel in the hierarchy window and speaking into the microphone connected to the client.
Working with Camera Dome Internal Auxiliaries

Certain camera domes may have internal auxiliary switches which can be used to perform camera dome tasks such as wash and wipe. Once these auxiliaries are physically configured at the camera dome, you can turn them on or off to perform the configured camera dome functions. Note the following:

Internal auxiliaries are only available for certain camera domes. Ensure that the internal auxiliary switches are configured correctly prior to commencing the instructions in this section. You may need to consult the camera domes installation guide to successfully utilize internal dome auxiliaries. The total number of available internal auxiliaries are determined by the camera dome type, and the available functions are determined by the physical camera dome configuration. You must be granted the right to use resources upon your user account configuration to work with server resources.
To utilize camera dome auxiliary outputs: 1. Click the Servers tab. 2. To display the available server resources, click the Plus (+) sign in front of the required Server icon or double-click on the required Server icon in the hierarchy window. 3. To display the available cameras, click the Plus (+) sign in front of the Camera icon or double-click on the required Server icon in the hierarchy window. Camera domes with available internal auxiliary switches have a Plus (+) sign in front of the Camera dome icon. 4. To display the available camera dome internal auxiliaries, click the Plus (+) sign in front of the required Camera dome icon or double-click on the required Camera dome icon in the hierarchy window.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-51
SiteManager
5. You may perform the following actions: To turn on an auxiliary, double-click an Auxiliary icon, or right-click on the icon and select Turn on from the Auxiliary Resource menu. To turn off an auxiliary, double-click an activated Auxiliary icon, or right-click on an activated Auxiliary icon and select Turn off from the Auxiliary Resource menu. To edit the auxiliary name, right-click on an Auxiliary icon and click Edit resource. On the Resource Properties dialog box, enter the preferred aux name in the Name field. Click OK.
NOTE
The Unique ID field is not used. Also, disconnecting an auxiliary results in SiteManager disconnecting the auxiliary from the server to which it is connected.
Configuring Dome Control Settings

If camera domes are used over limited bandwidth, the refresh rate is often poor when high quality images are streamed in real time. To improve the refresh rate over limited bandwidth, enable the dome control feature, which dynamically switches to a more suitable encoder for real-time transmission during PTZ control. When a camera dome is idle, high quality images will be transmitted, and as soon as the dome is moved, lower quality images will be transmitted for the duration of PTZ control.
NOTE
This feature is only functional for camera domes connected to DVN 5000 servers.
To configure dome control settings for DVN 5000 servers: 1. Click the Servers tab.
3-52
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
2. Right-click on the server in the hierarchy window and click Edit server, or select the server in the hierarchy window and select Server>Edit server from the menu bar. The Server dialog box appears. 3. Click the Domes controls tab. 4. Select the Use custom image quality check box.
5. From the Resolution drop-down list, select the resolution that will be used when a dome is controlled on the selected server. 6. From the Quality drop-down list, and select the quality that will be used when a dome is controlled on the selected server. 7. Click OK.
AUDIO CHANNELS
SiteManager provides you with access to all the enabled audio channels on any Johnson Controls DVN 5000 and DVN 3000 Series server, and DVN 100-NET encoder included in a SiteManager configuration. A single bidirectional audio channel (Talk) is also provided, allowing you to speak back to the server. Audio channels are represented as server resources and can be accessed in the hierarchy window when server resources are displayed. A mute function is also available in individual camera video screens and the audio resource menus for cameras that have an enabled audio channel. The mute button does not apply to the bidirectional Talk channel. See Server Resources on page 3-44 and Working with Server Resources on page 3-46 for additional information.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-53
SiteManager
Table 3-4: Audio Specification

Audio Server Type No. of Audio Channels Mono DVN 3000 DVN 5000 DVN 100-NET 0 Up to 32 2 Stereo 1 (or up to 4 for DVN 3000-NET) Up to 16 1 Live Yes Yes Yes Playback Yes Yes No Talk Back Yes Yes No
To listen to live or recorded audio: 1. Click the Servers tab and connect to the required server. 2. To display the servers resources, click the Plus sign (+) or double-click the server in the hierarchy window. 3. To talk back to the server, click the Plus sign next to Talk channels or double-click the Talk channels icon in the hierarchy window. The available Talk channel appears in the hierarchy window. 4. To enable the Talk channel, double-click the desired Talk Channel icon. The Talk channel becomes enabled and you can talk back to the server by speaking into the microphone connected to your PC. 5. To adjust the volume of the talk channel, right-click on it and select the required volume from the audio resource menu.
NOTE
You can use the Talk channel regardless of what it displayed on your virtual video desktop.
6. To listen to live and/or recorded audio, click the Plus sign next to Audio channels or double-click the Audio channels icon in the hierarchy window. The available audio channels appear in the hierarchy window.
NOTE
Only audio channels configured on the server are shown in the hierarchy. Also, if no cameras associated with the audio channels (or views with these cameras selected as masters) are currently displayed on the virtual video desktop, all the audio channels will be off.
7. Display the camera video screen whose audio you wish to listen to and/or the view which contains the camera you wish to listen to. If you displayed a camera, the audio channel(s) associated with the displayed camera(s) will be enabled and audio will be automatically
3-54
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
audible if you are displaying a camera which currently contains live audio and your speakers are connected correctly. If you displayed a view whose current master camera has audio channels associated with it, the audio channel(s) associated with the master camera will be enabled and audio will be automatically audible if the master camera currently contains live audio and your speakers are connected correctly. If you displayed a view whose current master camera does not have any audio channels associated with it, none of the audio channels will be enabled. Select a different master camera. See Synchronized Multiple Camera Playback on page 3-184 for additional information.
8. Once you are either displaying a camera video screen or view with the required camera as the master, to adjust the audio channels volume, right-click the required audio channel in the hierarchy window and select the required volume from the audio resource menu or adjust the volume of your speakers manually. 9. To mute the audio channel on the camera video screen, click the Speaker icon on the camera video screen or in the hierarchy window. The audio will not be audible. To listen to audio again, click the Speaker icon again. 10. To mute the audio channel by using the audio channel menu, right-click on the Audio channel in the hierarchy window. The audio channel menu appears.
Click Mute. The audio will not be audible. 11. To listen to recorded audio, start either playback on the camera video screen or synchronized multiple camera playback in a view with the camera you wish to listen to selected as the master. If the audio channel is not muted or switched off, the audio will be automatically audible during playback. For details about playing back, see Playing Back Video Footage and Audio on page 3-114 and Synchronized Multiple Camera Playback on page 3-184. You can also listen to live and recorded audio on monitors connected to the SiteManager client. For monitors, all the audio functions are performed manually on the monitor or monitor speakers.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-55
SiteManager
See Playing Back Video Footage and Audio on Monitors on page 3-218 for information about monitors.
ALARM MANAGER
This section provides detailed information about:

Alarms Management of alarms Configuring and managing alarm events Configuring the screen recorder and the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) server
NOTE
In this section, the term server refers to DVN 5000 Series and DVN 3000 Series servers, and DVN 100-NET encoders, unless otherwise stated.
Server Alarm Call Priority

SiteManager can be used as the alarm control center for multiple DVN server installations. When an alarm is triggered and the server has been configured to notify a SiteManager client, the specified SiteManager client will attempt to establish a connection with the server based on the server alarm call priority list. SiteManager will attempt to connect to the server using the network interface with the highest priority. If the client fails to successfully connect to the server via this connection, it will attempt to establish a connection through the next network interface provided in the server profile, and so on. In addition, you can assign a unique alarm sound to each server included in a SiteManager configuration that can alert the user when any of the servers alarms are triggered. Since a SiteManager configuration may consist of numerous servers, assigning an individual alarm sound to each server allows you to immediately and audibly identify the server source of the triggered alarm. Alarm resources available within SiteManager are DVN server-defined alarms. Refer to the appropriate DVN manual, such as the DVN 5000 Series Software Installation and Configuration Manual, in Related Documentation on page 1-4 for detailed information about configuring alarms. In order to configure alarm priority and assign alarm sounds, you must be granted the right to create and/or edit resources based upon your user account configuration. The Remote Access is equal to Client Remote Access Connection (modem). SiteManager uses standard wave sound files (.wav) for alarm notification. Alarm call priority will be disabled during alarm silence times for the server. See Silencing Server Alarms on page 3-100 for detailed information.
3-56
24-10248-56 Rev. B
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual To configure alarm call priority:
SiteManager
1. Click the Servers tab. To select the Edit server option, perform one of the following actions: Right-click the server in the hierarchy window and click Edit server Click the server in the hierarchy window, and from the menu bar select Server>Edit server
2. In the Server window, click the Alarm call priority tab. The Alarm call priority panel appears.
3. Click the browse (...) button next to the Alarm sound field. The Select an audio file for alarm notification window appears.
You may need to select the drive and folder in order to access the .wav files available on the SiteManager client. 4. Select the required directory, folder, and .wav file. Click Open. The selected file will be added to the Alarm sound box. SiteManager can upload .wav files only.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-57
SiteManager
5. To establish a connection with the server when an Alarm Manager notification is received, select the Connect on alarm check box. 6. Click the first drop-down arrow. The Network Interface Card (NIC) list appears.
Each time you select a network interface card, the next drop-down box in the sequence is enabled. The top drop-down box has the highest priority (the client will attempt to establish a connection via the specified NIC/modem first) and the bottom drop-down box has the lowest priority (the client will attempt to establish a connection via the specified NIC/modem last). 7. Select the server NIC/modem you wish the client to use first when attempting to establish a connection when an alarm is triggered. 8. Click the next drop-down arrow and select another NIC/modem in order of priority. Repeat the same steps for each NIC and modem as required. 9. Click OK. The specified alarm priority will be applied and the Server window will close. When an alarm is triggered, SiteManager analyzes the alarm call priority list. It then attempts to establish a connection with the server via the NICs/modem as specified in the priority list, and the selected alarm sound notifies the user of the triggered alarm. See Managing Alarm Events on page 3-80 for detailed information about what will occur when an alarm is triggered.
NOTE
If you select not to establish a connection with the server when an Alarm Manager notification is received, none of the configured events will occur. There will only be a message in the Status bar (and the status log if a user is currently logged on to SiteManager) providing the details of the triggered alarm. See Configuring Alarm Events on page 3-64 for additional information about alarm events and alarm notification.
3-58
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
Configuring the SMTP Server Settings

SiteManager events can be configured to automatically send an email when an alarm is triggered and an Alarm Manager notification is received. For SiteManager to send this automatic E-mail, you must configure the SMTP server settings. To configure the SMTP settings: 1. From the menu bar, select Tools>Options. The Options dialog box appears. 2. Select the SMTP settings tab.
3. In the Server name field, enter the SMTP server name for outgoing messages. 4. If required, enter the necessary port number in the Port field. 5. To use the servers name and password, enter the necessary user name and password in the User Name and Password fields respectively. 6. To use a default sender name, enter it in the Default sender field. 7. Click Apply or OK. The SMTP settings now allow the SiteManager client to automatically generate and send E-mail messages when alarms are received. For detailed information on configuring SiteManager with automatic E-mail generation when alarms are triggered, see Configuring Alarm Events on page 3-64.
Configuring the Screen Recorder

SiteManager allows the administrator to monitor any users activity on a SiteManager client by recording the SiteManager desktop upon manual activation or in response to a triggered alarm for the duration of the alarm. The administrator can manually activate desktop recording or an alarm event can be configured to automatically turn on the screen camera upon triggering of the events alarm. If desktop recording is activated manually, user activity will be continuously recorded until the administrator manually deactivates desktop recording. If the screen camera has been configured as an action for an alarm event and an Alarm Manager
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-59
SiteManager
notification is received, the screen camera will be automatically turned on and will record all user activity for the duration of the alarm. The screen camera footage is recorded in the .avi format and will be stored in the location as specified by the administrator. The screen camera footage can be reviewed at any time. Note the following:
The administrator is the only user who can access the Options window and configure the screen recorder. If using multiple monitors, they should have the same resolution settings for the best screen recording video quality. We recommend using the Microsoft MPEG-4 video codec when using the screen recorder.
To configure the screen recorder: 1. From the menu bar, select Tools>Options. The Options window (General tab) appears.
2. Click the Screen recorder tab. The Options window (Screen recorder tab) appears.
3-60
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
3. Select the Screen recorder is enabled check box. The window becomes enabled.
4. In the Path field, click the Browse (...) button. The Browse window appears.
5. Locate the directory and folder in which you wish to store screen camera footage. Click OK. The Browse window closes and the selected path is displayed.
6. From the Video codec drop-down list, select the preferred video compression technique you wish to be applied to the screen camera footage. We recommend one of the MPEG4 video codecs.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-61
SiteManager
7. Use the Frame rate slide and select the required frame rate (Frames Per Second [FPS]) for the screen camera footage. 8. Use the Bitrate scroll bar arrows to select the preferred footage quality. We recommend the 128 bit rate for MPEG4 video codecs. 9. Click Apply. The screen recorder settings are applied. 10. Click OK. The Options window closes. The screen recorder is now enabled, but will not be functional unless the administrator manually activates desktop recording or one or more of the alarm events have been configured to turn on the screen camera when an Alarm Manager notification is received. See Recording Users Desktop Activity on page 3-244 for detailed information about manual activation of desktop recording. See also Configuring Alarm Events on page 3-64 and ensure that the events are configured accordingly.
Alarm Manager Overview

One of the important functions of SiteManager is to act as the alarm control center for multiple DVN server installations. Alarm Manager is an application that runs in the background listening for alarm messages sent by the DVN servers. When a server sends an alarm message and Alarm Manager receives it, SiteManager is notified of the alarm so that it can notify users and respond (for example, sound an alarm, display alarm cameras, prompt the user to perform certain tasks, etc., depending on the events configuration). When Alarm Manager receives an alarm notification, SiteManager attempts to establish a network connection to the alarmed server and perform an action in response to the alarm. All incoming alarms are logged and the user is prompted for an acknowledgement of the incoming alarms. Alarm Manager is automatically installed as part of the SiteManager installation procedure at a client. Once installed, the Alarm Manager icon appears on the clients taskbar. In order for SiteManager to be notified of an alarm, the DVN servers must have alarms configured for remote client notification. In some cases, the source of the alarm is not reset. Locking of Prime sector or UPS going offline may be used as alarm sources, but their state does not change when a user acknowledges the alarm. You must manually perform the necessary tasks to change server lock or server UPS state/status. Refer to the appropriate DVN manual, such as the DVN 5000 Series Software Installation and Configuration Manual, in Related Documentation on page 1-4 for detailed information about alarm configuration. Also, see Configuring Alarm Events on page 3-64 for detailed information about configuring alarm events.
3-62
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
Alarm Manager Notification

All received Alarm Manager notifications are displayed in the alarms management panel in the system log at the bottom of the Main screen. When an alarm notification is received:
The Alarms Management panel and the status bar display the name of the triggered alarm, the server to which the triggered alarm is connected, the time of alarm activation, and the cameras which have been configured to record in response to the alarm (that is, alarmed cameras). The system log documents all of the alarm events and tasks performed by the user. The triggered alarm icon is illuminated in the hierarchy window. The Alarm Manager icon on the clients desktop start toolbar illuminates. The configured alarm event actions (such as displaying of alarmed cameras and recording of user activity, though there are literally hundreds of unique alarm event combinations that can be configured) occur.
The following screen shows an example of an Alarm Manager notification. Remember that the Alarm Manager notification may be accompanied by a number of alarm events and an alarm sound.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-63
SiteManager
Configuring Alarm Events

When an alarm is triggered at a DVN server, if configured, a notification of the triggered alarm will be sent to a SiteManager client (or clients). If Alarm Manager is present on the SiteManager client, it will receive the notification and alert SiteManager by passing on the alarm notification. At this point, the following events occur by default:
The Alarms Management panel and the status bar display the name of the triggered alarm, the server where the alarm was triggered, the time of alarm occurred, and the cameras which have been configured to record in response to the alarm (alarmed cameras). The system log documents all of the alarm events and tasks performed by the user. The triggered alarm icon is illuminated in the hierarchy window. The Alarm Manager icon on the clients taskbar illuminates.
In addition, SiteManager can be configured to automatically perform one, a combination, or all of the following on a per alarm basis:

Connect to a server Disconnect from a server Disconnect all servers Show all alarmed cameras Show a camera Turn an alarm on Turn an alarm off Turn an aux on Turn an aux off Show a group Show a view Show a view on a monitor Show a map Show a 3D map Show a camera on a monitor Cycle alarmed cameras on a monitor Record user activity (screen cam enable the screen camera which will record the SiteManager interface and all the tasks performed by the user from the beginning to the end of the alarm notification)
3-64
24-10248-56 Rev. B
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Send an e-mail Turn a camera aux on Turn a camera aux off
SiteManager
Depending on the alarm event configuration:

The selected alarm sound may become audible for the duration of the alarm. The SiteManager client may automatically prompt the user to perform particular tasks. The SiteManager client may automatically prompt the user to type in details about their response to the triggered alarm. The events actions may occur only locally or on all SiteManager clients that are sharing the SiteManager configuration.
The ability to uniquely configure automatic alarm events for each alarm provides enormous advantages, such as the system not relying on the user to remember which tasks must be performed at times of alert and potentially high stress, but instead automatically performs a number of tasks and guides the user through the sequence of events which must occur in order to correctly respond to each alarm. The time it would take for the user to access all the required screens and surveillance resources is significantly reduced. In addition, all of the users activity during the alarm alert can be recorded by the screen camera. As the footage is stored according to the administrators configuration, the screen camera footage can be reviewed at any time. In order for SiteManager to be notified of an alarm, DVN servers must have alarms configured for remote client notification. Refer to the appropriate DVN manual, such as the DVN 5000 Series Software Installation and Configuration Manual, in Related Documentation on page 1-4 for detailed information about configuring alarms and remote client alarm notification. If you wish the alarm alert sound to be audible at the time of alarm notification, you must configure each servers alarm notification. See Server Alarm Call Priority on page 3-56 for detailed information about setting the alarm notification sound. To observe the alarm details in the Alarms Management panel and/or the status log, verify that the system log and/or status bar are displayed respectively. See Configuring the Virtual Video Desktop on page 3-242 for details about displaying the system log and the status bar. A single event can have multiple actions and may occur only locally or on all SiteManager clients that are sharing the SiteManager configuration.
Important Notes (Configuring Alarm Events)
If you select not to establish a connection with the server when an Alarm Manager notification is received, none of the configured events will occur. There will only be a message in the Status bar (and the status log if a user is currently logged on to SiteManager) providing the details of the
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-65
SiteManager
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual triggered alarm. See Server Alarm Call Priority on page 3-56 for detailed information about connections.
Only the administrator can access the Events configuration window and configure the alarm events. An alarm should only be used as a source once (do not use the same alarm as a source in two or more events). If a monitor is configured for quad view mode (see Using the DVN 100-NET Quad View Spot Monitor Feature on page 227), you cannot specify a particular region, or quadrant, when assigning the Show camera on monitor action. When this action occurs, SiteManager will display the selected camera from Region 1 as a full view screen by default. For video call-up purposes, use either the Show Camera on Monitor alarm action, where the camera video will occupy the entire screen of an operators monitor, or the Show Camera action, where the SiteManager application window is unminimized and the monitor does not show a fullscreen view with multiple cameras. If SiteManager is minimized or hidden under a fullscreen view, the operator will not notice the camera call-up if Show Camera is used. To use all of the options outlined in the procedures, perform the following procedures: Server Alarm Call Priority on page 3-56 Configuring the SMTP Server Settings on page 3-59 Configuring Alarm Notification Settings on page 3-79 Configuring the Virtual Video Desktop on page 3-242 Configuring the Screen Recorder on page 3-59
How to Configure Alarm Events (Procedure)

To configure alarm events: 1. From the menu bar, select Tools>Events configuration. The Events configuration window appears.
3-66
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
2. Click Add. An event is added to the Events configuration window.
3. In the Event column, enter the event name. 4. In the Source column, from the Server drop-down list, select the server name of the alarm you wish to configure. All servers currently included in the SiteManager configuration will be listed. If a server exists but has not been configured in SiteManager, it will not be displayed in the Server drop-down list. 5. From the Alarm drop-down list, select the alarm you wish to configure. 6. If you wish the event you are configuring to occur in response to any of the selected servers alarms being triggered, select Any alarm from the Alarm drop-down list. 7. If you wish the event you are configuring to occur in response to only one of the selected servers alarms being triggered, select the alarm from the Alarm drop-down list. The Alarm drop-down list will be empty if you did not select a server in the Server drop-down list first, and only the selected servers alarms will be displayed in the Alarm drop-down list. 8. If you wish the event to only occur at the local client, even if other SiteManager clients are sharing the SiteManager configuration, select the Local check box. If the Local check box is not enabled (i.e. the event will occur on all SiteManager clients sharing the SiteManager configuration), the local clients VGA monitors will not be listed in the Monitor drop-down list when the events actions are configured, since the VGA monitors are only available on the local client. See Managing the SiteManager Configuration on page 3-264 for detailed information about the SiteManager configuration.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-67
SiteManager
9. In the Actions column, click the Add action button. The Actions dialog box appears.
10. From the Action field, select the action you wish to occur in response to the selected servers alarm(s) being triggered and the Alarm Manager notification being received. You can select one of the following actions. Table 3-5: Action
Action Connect to server Disconnect from server Disconnect all servers Show all alarmed cameras Show camera Turn alarm on Turn alarm off Turn aux on Turn aux off Show group Show view Show view on monitor Show map Show 3D map Show camera on monitor Cycle alarmed cameras on monitor Record user activity (screen cam) Send email Turn camera aux on Turn camera aux off See Connect to server on page 69 Disconnect from server on page 69 Disconnect all servers on page 69 Show all alarmed cameras on page 69 Show camera on page 69 Turn alarm on on page 70 Turn alarm off on page 70 Turn aux on on page 70 Turn aux off on page 70 Show group on page 71 Show view on page 71 Show view on monitor on page 71 Show map on page 71 Show 3D map on page 72 Show camera on monitor on page 72 Cycle alarmed cameras on monitor on page 72 Record user activity (screen cam) on page 72 Send email on page 73 Turn camera aux on on page 73 Turn camera aux off on page 73
3-68
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
11. The options listed on the second Action dialog box depend on the action selected in the Action drop-down list. If in the first Action drop-down list you selected ...
Connect to server
The Server drop-down list with a list of all the servers available in the SiteManager configuration appears in the Action dialog box. When an Alarm Manager notification is received from the selected server and alarm, SiteManager automatically connects to the selected server.
NOTE
SiteManager will automatically connect to the server of the triggered alarm (unless otherwise configured). The Connect to server action is therefore provided so that the SiteManager client can connect to a server other than the server of the triggered alarm. See Server Alarm Call Priority on page 3-56 for information about automatic connection to the server of the triggered alarm.
If you selected Connect to server, select the required server.

Disconnect from server
The Server drop-down list with a list of all the servers available in the SiteManager configuration appears in the Action dialog box. When an Alarm Manager notification is received from the selected server and alarm, SiteManager automatically disconnects from the selected server. If you selected Disconnect from server, select the required server.
Disconnect all servers
When am Alarm Manager notification is received from the selected server and alarm, SiteManager automatically disconnects from all the servers to which the SiteManager client is currently connected. When an Alarm Manager notification is received from the selected server and alarm, SiteManager automatically displays all the cameras that have been configured to record in response to the triggered alarm (i.e. alarmed cameras). Each alarmed camera is displayed in its individual camera video screen. You can check which cameras are alarmed by observing the alarms management panels Cameras column.
Show all alarmed cameras
Show camera
A Search field and button, the complete server resource hierarchy, and the Fullscreen check box appear in the Action dialog box. When an Alarm Manager notification is received from the selected server and alarm, SiteManager automatically displays the selected camera.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-69
SiteManager
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual If you selected Show camera, select the required camera. If you want the selected camera to be displayed in the full screen mode, select the Fullscreen check box. When in full screen mode, to close the screen and return to SiteManager, double-click over the video image.
Turn alarm on
A Search field and button and the complete server resource hierarchy appear in the Action dialog box.
NOTE
You can use the Search tools to locate the required server resource. Enter the resource name in the text box and click the Search button. SiteManager searches the hierarchy for a match and displays the results. The search is not case sensitive, but will not be successful if there is a spelling mistake in the text box.
When an Alarm Manager notification is received from the selected server and alarm, SiteManager automatically turns on the selected alarm. If you selected Turn alarm on, then select the required alarm in the resource hierarchy.
Turn alarm off
A Search field and button and the complete server resource hierarchy appear in the Action dialog box. When an Alarm Manager notification is received from the selected server and alarm, SiteManager automatically turns off the selected alarm. If you selected Turn alarm off, then select the required alarm in the resource hierarchy.
Turn aux on
A Search field and button and the complete server resource hierarchy appear in the Action dialog box. When an Alarm Manager notification is received from the selected server and alarm, SiteManager automatically turns on the selected aux. If you selected Turn aux on, then select the required aux in the resource hierarchy.
Turn aux off
A Search field and button and the complete server resource hierarchy appear in the Action dialog box. When an Alarm Manager notification is received from the selected server and alarm, SiteManager automatically turns off the selected aux. If you selected Turn aux off, then select the required aux in the resource hierarchy.
3-70
24-10248-56 Rev. B

Show group
SiteManager
The Group drop-down list with a list of all the groups available in the SiteManager configuration appear in the Action dialog box. When an Alarm Manager notification is received from the selected server and alarm, SiteManager automatically displays all the resources (cameras, maps and/or views) included in the selected group. If you selected Show group, select the required group. All of the selected groups resources appear on the right-hand side of the Actions dialog box.
Show view
The View drop-down list with a list of all the views available in the SiteManager configuration and the Fullscreen check box appear in the Action dialog box. When an Alarm Manager notification is received from the selected server and alarm, SiteManager automatically displays the selected view. If the selected view includes cameras from multiple servers, the SiteManager client automatically connects to all the corresponding servers to successfully display the selected view. If you selected Show view, using the View drop-down list, select the required view. A preview of the selected views layout appears on the right-hand side of the Actions dialog box. If you wish for the selected view to be displayed in the full screen mode, select the Fullscreen check box.
Show view on monitor
The View drop-down list with a list of all the views available in the SiteManager configuration and the Monitor drop-down list with a list of all the VGA monitors available in the SiteManager configuration appear in the Action dialog box. When an Alarm Manager notification is received from the selected server and alarm, SiteManager automatically displays the selected view on the selected VGA monitor. If the Local check box is disabled, no VGA monitors are listed. If you selected Show view on monitor, use the View drop-down list to select the required view. A preview of the selected views layout appears on the right-hand side of the Actions dialog box. Use the Monitor drop-down list to select the VGA monitor you wish the selected view to be displayed on.
Show map
The Map drop-down list with a list of all the 2D maps available in the SiteManager configuration appears in the Action dialog box. When an Alarm Manager notification is received from the selected server and alarm, SiteManager automatically displays the selected 2D map.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-71
SiteManager
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual If you selected Show map, select the required 2D map. A preview of the selected 2D map appears on the right-hand side of the Actions dialog box.
Show 3D map
The 3D Map drop-down list with a list of all the 3D maps available in the SiteManager configuration appears in the Action dialog box. When an Alarm Manager notification is received from the selected server and alarm, SiteManager automatically displays the selected 3D map. If you selected Show 3D map, select the required 3D map. A preview of the selected 3D map appears on the right-hand side of the Actions dialog box.
Show camera on monitor
A Search field and button, the complete server resource hierarchy, and the Monitor drop-down list with a list of all the monitors available in the SiteManager configuration appear in the Action dialog box. When an Alarm Manager notification is received from the selected server and alarm, SiteManager automatically displays the selected camera on the selected monitor. If the Local check box is disabled, only the available network monitors are listed. If you selected Show camera on monitor, select the required camera. Use the Monitor drop-down list to select the monitor you wish the selected camera to be displayed on.
Cycle alarmed cameras on monitor
The Monitor drop-down list with a list of all VGA monitors available in the SiteManager configuration and the Duration drop-down list appear in the Action dialog box. When an Alarm Manager notification is received from the selected server and alarm, SiteManager automatically displays all the cameras that have been configured to record in response to the triggered alarm (i.e. alarmed cameras) on the selected monitor. Each alarmed camera is displayed for the length of time specified in the Duration field. If the Local check box is disabled, no VGA monitors are listed. If you selected Cycle alarmed cameras on monitor, use the Monitor drop-down list to select the required monitor.
Record user activity (screen cam)
When an Alarm Manager notification is received from the selected server and alarm, SiteManager automatically records the SiteManager screen and all user activity for the duration of the alarm alert.
3-72
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
The screen camera footage is stored as configured by the administrator and will be available for reviewing at any time.
Send email
If you selected Send email and you have not configured the SMTP server settings on the SiteManager client, as necessary, you will receive a warning message. Click OK and see Configuring the SMTP Server Settings on page 3-59 for assistance. If you have configured the SMTP server settings and you select Send email, when an Alarm Manager notification is received from the selected server and alarm, SiteManager automatically sends an email to the specified recipient(s) according to the configuration. See Send Email Alarm Action Configuration on page 3-77 for instructions on configuring the Send email alarm action.
Turn camera aux on
A Search field and button, the complete server resource hierarchy, and a Camera aux drop-down list with a list of all the auxes available for the camera selected in the server resource hierarchy appear in the Action dialog box. When an Alarm Manager notification is received from the selected server and alarm, SiteManager automatically turns on the selected cameras aux. If you selected Turn camera aux on, select the required camera. The Camera aux drop-down list lists all the available auxes for the selected camera. Use the Camera aux drop-down list to select the aux you wish to be turned on or off.
Turn camera aux off
A Search field and button, the complete server resource hierarchy, and a Camera aux drop-down list with a list of all the auxes available for the camera selected in the server resource hierarchy appear in the Action dialog box. When an Alarm Manager notification is received from the selected server and alarm, SiteManager automatically turns off the selected cameras aux. If you selected Turn camera aux off, select the required camera. The Camera aux drop-down list lists all the available auxes for the selected camera. Use the Camera aux drop-down list to select the aux you wish to be turned on or off.
12. Click OK.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-73
SiteManager
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual The Events Configuration window appears with the selected action added.
13. To create additional actions for the selected event, click Add action and repeat the steps in this section. 14. To remove an existing action from the selected event, select the action and click Remove action. The selected action will be removed.
NOTE
When an alarm notification is received for the configured alarm event, the actions will occur in the order in which they were configured.
15. If you wish the sound configured for the selected servers alarms to be audible when the selected alarm is triggered and an Alarm Manager notification is received, select the Play sound check box. See Server Alarm Call Priority on page 3-56 for additional information. 16. To turn off the triggered alarm when a user acknowledges the Alarm Manager notification, select the Turn off alarm on ack check box. If the Turn off alarm on ack check box is deselected, when the user acknowledges the alarm, the triggered alarm will not change state. The user will have to manually turn off the alarm. 17. If you wish the user to acknowledge the Alarm Manager notification for the selected event by simply double-clicking on the triggered alarm in the alarms management panel, skip to step 35. 18. Continue with step 19 if you wish the user to acknowledge the Alarm Manager notification for the selected event by performing one of the following actions: Clicking Acknowledge on the Alarm Acknowledge window Requesting the user to enter details about the actions taken in response to the alarm or any other pertinent information regarding the triggered alarm
3-74
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
Prompting the user to perform certain tasks in response to the triggered alarm
19. Select the Require acknowledge check box in the Event column. The Detail button will become enabled. 20. Click Detail. The Alarm acknowledge configuration window appears.
21. If you wish the alarm acknowledge window to be displayed as soon as the alarm is received (i.e. the user does not have to double-click on the flashing alarm icon to display the window), then select the Automatically show acknowledge request when alarm is received check box. 22. If you wish the alarm acknowledge window to be displayed when the selected alarm is triggered with complete alarm information and a note request, so that the user should enter details about the actions taken in response to the alarm (or any other pertinent information regarding the triggered alarm prior to being able to acknowledge the triggered alarm), then select the Show alarm information and Request operator notes check boxes. 23. If you wish the alarm acknowledge window to be displayed when the selected alarm is triggered with complete alarm information only, so that the user only needs to click the Acknowledge button to acknowledge the triggered alarm, then deselect the Request operator notes check box and select the Show alarm information check box. 24. If you wish the alarm acknowledge window to be displayed when the selected alarm is triggered with a note request only, so that the user should enter details about the actions taken in response to the alarm (or any other pertinent information regarding the triggered alarm prior to being able to acknowledge the triggered alarm), then deselect the Show alarm information check box. 25. If you wish the alarm acknowledge window to be displayed when the selected alarm is triggered without any alarm information or note requests, so that the user only needs to click the Acknowledge button to acknowledge the triggered alarm, deselect the Show alarm information and Request operator notes check boxes.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-75
SiteManager
26. If you wish the user to receive a list of tasks which must be performed prior to acknowledging the triggered alarm, continue with step 27. If you do not wish the user to receive a list of tasks that must be performed prior to acknowledging the triggered alarm, skip to step 31. 27. Click Add operation. An operation will be added to the Alarm acknowledge configuration window.
28. In the white section of the operation, type in the first task which the user must perform when the selected alarm is triggered (i.e. when the Alarm Manager notification is received when the selected alarm is triggered). For example, Notify the security manager - call 123 4567. 29. Edit the text, as needed, by utilizing the formatting buttons above the operation. 30. If you wish the user to be able to acknowledge the triggered alarm only after the specified task has been successfully performed, continue with step 31. If you wish the user to be able to acknowledge the triggered alarm only after the specified task has been performed and indicate whether the task execution was successful (ok) or unsuccessful (failed), select the Accept failure check box. 31. To create additional operations which the user must perform prior to acknowledging the triggered alarm for the selected event, click Add operation. The next operation will be added to the Alarm acknowledgement configuration window. Repeat steps 27-30 to add the required operation. 32. To remove an existing operation from the selected event, select the operation you wish to remove by clicking on any part of the required operation and click Remove operation. Click Yes at the Confirmation dialog box. The selected operation will be removed. 33. To remove all existing operations from the selected event, click Remove all. Click Yes at the Confirmation dialog box. All operations will be removed. 34. Click OK on the Alarm acknowledge configuration window. The Alarm acknowledge configuration window will close and the Event configuration window will open.
3-76 24-10248-56 Rev. B
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual 35. Click Apply.
SiteManager
You must click Apply after completing each event and before adding a new event. 36. To add another event to the event configuration, repeat the previous steps as many times as is necessary to create all the events you wish to be included in the SiteManager configuration.
NOTE
Do not use the same alarm as a source in two or more events.
37. To remove an event, select the event by clicking on the required event row. The selected event will be fully displayed.
Click Delete. Click Yes at the Confirmation dialog box. The selected event will be deleted. 38. Click OK on the Event configuration window to save the event configuration settings.
Send Email Alarm Action Configuration

The Send Email alarm feature allows you to configure SiteManager to automatically send an email to specified recipients when an Alarm Manager notification is received from the selected server and alarm. Before configuring alarm actions, you must configure the SMTP server settings according to Configuring the SMTP Server Settings on page 3-59. To configure the Send email alarm settings: 1. From the menu bar, select Tools>Events Configuration. 2. Click Add on the Events Configuration dialog box. 3. Click Add action.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-77
SiteManager
4. Select Send eMail from the Action drop-down list. The fields associated with the Send eMail action appear below the Action drop-down list.
5. Fill in the From and Subject text boxes as required. 6. Click on the text box next to To. The To drop-down list will be enabled and another drop-down list will be added. 7. From the first drop-down list, select the appropriate category To, Cc or Bcc. 8. Next to the first drop-down list, enter the recipients email address. 9. If you wish for the email to be sent to multiple recipients, repeat steps 7 and 8 for consecutive drop-down lists, as needed. 10. In the bottom half of the screen, type in any text which you wish to be included in the e-mail. 11. To attach an item to the e-mail, click the paper clip symbol. Locate the file and click Open. The selected file will be attached to the e-mail. You may repeat this step to attach multiple files to the email, as needed.
12. Click OK.
3-78
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
Configuring Alarm Notification Settings

If none of the users are logged on to SiteManager at the time of an Alarm Manager notification, the administrator may select a user who will be automatically logged on to SiteManager and receive the notification. This will ensure that all alarm notifications will be received by the SiteManager client, even when none of the users are logged on. In addition, you can define the maximum number of alarms which can be processed simultaneously (the maximum number of Alarm Manager notifications which can be received at the same time). If the number of alarm notifications exceeds the specified maximum, the notifications will queue up. As the alarm notifications which have been received are acknowledged, the queued notifications will be received. Only the administrator can access the Options window and configure the alarm notification settings.
IMPORTANT
SiteManager must be installed and alarm manager must be running at the client in order for the specified user to be logged on automatically. If SiteManager is closed, the selected user will not be logged on and the alarm notification will not be received.
When an alarm notification is sent and a user is logged on, the user already logged on will receive the alarm notification. To configure additional alarm notification settings: 1. From the menu bar, select Tools>Options. The Options - General tab window appears. 2. Click the Alarm notification tab. The Options - Alarm notification tab window appears.
3. From the Alarm user drop-down list, select the user who you wish to be logged on automatically and receive the Alarm Manager notification when none of the users are logged on to SiteManager at the time of the Alarm Manager notification.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-79
SiteManager
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual When an Alarm Manager notification is sent to the SiteManager client and none of the users are logged on at the time, the selected user will be automatically logged on and will receive the notification. The administrator is by default assigned to receive Alarm Manager notifications when none of the users are logged on to SiteManager.
NOTE
All the users created in SiteManager will be listed in the Alarm user drop-down list. See Creating User Accounts on page 3-13 for detailed information about creating and editing user accounts.
IMPORTANT
If the Alarm user drop-down list is left empty (a user is not selected), when an alarm is triggered, the Alarm Manager notification will not be received if none of the users are logged on to SiteManager at the time of notification.
4. Enter the maximum number of alarms that can be processed simultaneously by using the scroll bar arrows or by typing in the preferred number. The specified number will be the maximum number of alarm notifications which can be received at the same time. If the alarm notifications exceed the specified number, the notifications will queue up. As the alarm notifications which have been received are acknowledged (triggered alarms are turned off), the queued notifications will be received. 5. Click Apply. The configured settings will be applied. 6. Click OK. The Options window will close and the settings will be saved. If you do not wish to save any settings, click Cancel. The Options window will close and the settings will not be saved.
Managing Alarm Events

SiteManager allows the administrator to uniquely configure each alarm event so that when an Alarm Manager notification is received for each alarm, a unique sequence of events will occur. A users response to an alarm (management of alarm events) will be influenced by the configuration of each alarm event. The following procedures provide details about managing alarm events based on the server alarm call priority and the alarm event configuration. See Server Alarm Call Priority on page 3-56 and Configuring Alarm Events on page 3-64 for detailed information about configuring alarm events.
3-80
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
IMPORTANT
In all of the following procedures it is assumed that the server has been configured to notify the remote client of the triggered alarm. If the server is not configured to notify the remote client, the alarm notification will not be sent, the client will not be alerted, and none of the sequences will occur. Refer to the DVN 5000 Series or DVN 3000 Series Software Installation and Configuration Manual for detailed information about remote client alarm notification.
The following alarm event actions will cause the SiteManager client to automatically connect to the server which has sent the alarm notification, even if Connect on alarm is disabled:

Show all alarmed cameras Show camera Turn alarm on Turn alarm off Turn aux on Turn aux off Show group Show view Turn a camera aux on Turn a camera aux off
The remaining 8 alarm event actions will not result in an automatic connection to the server if Connect on alarm is disabled.
Managing Incoming Alarm Manager Notifications Determined by the Server Alarm Call Priority
For example: Alarm 1 (connected to a DVN 5000 Series server) is configured to be triggered when the Prime sector is locked. Cameras 1, 2, and 6 are set to record in response to Alarm 1 and your SiteManager client will be notified when the alarm is triggered. An alarm sound has been allocated for the DVN 5000 server alarms and the event has been configured to play the alarm sound. The alarm event action for Alarm 1 has been configured to show Cameras 3 on Monitor 1. When Alarm 1 is triggered, one of the following scenarios will occur:
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-81
SiteManager
A. When a user is logged on to SiteManager and connected to the DVN 5000 Series server of Alarm 1, if Connect on alarm is enabled, the current connection to the server will be used and the following will occur: The selected alarm sound will become audible for the duration of the alarm. The Alarms management panel and the status bar will display the name of the triggered alarm, the server the triggered alarm is connected to, the time of alarm activation, and the cameras which have been configured to record in response to the alarm (alarmed cameras). The system log will document all of the alarm events and tasks performed by the user. The Alarm Manager icon on the clients taskbar will illuminate. All alarm event actions which have been configured for the triggered alarm (event).
If Connect on alarm is disabled, since you are already connected to the Server, the current connection will be used and all of the events outlined above will occur. If the Automatically show acknowledge request when alarm is received option has been selected for the triggered alarm, the Alarm acknowledge window will also appear. See Configuring Alarm Events on page 3-64 for detailed information about configuring automatic alarm event actions. If the alarm notification originated at a DVN 5000 server, an e-mail may also be sent to the client according to the servers configuration. Follow the procedures to respond and acknowledge the alarm notification on page 3-86, page 3-87, and page 3-91. B. When a user is logged on to SiteManager and not connected to the DVN 5000 Series server of Alarm 1, if Connect on alarm is enabled and if the server configuration requires the user to enter his/her user name and password to establish a connection, then the Connecting to server window will appear. You must enter your DVN server user name and password. A connection will be established with the server and the following will occur: The selected alarm sound will become audible for the duration of the alarm. The Alarms management panel and the status bar will display the name of the triggered alarm, the server the triggered alarm is connected to, the time of alarm activation, and the cameras which have been configured to record in response to the alarm (alarmed cameras). The system log will document all of the alarm events and tasks performed by the user. The Alarm Manager icon on the clients taskbar will illuminate. All alarm event actions which have been configured for the triggered alarm (event).
3-82
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
If Connect on alarm is enabled, and if the server configuration does not require the user to enter his/her user name and password to establish a connection, a connection will be established automatically with the server and all of the events outlined above will occur. If the Automatically show acknowledge request when alarm is received option has been selected for the triggered alarm, the Alarm acknowledge window will also appear. If the alarm notification originated at a DVN 5000 server, an e-mail may also be sent to the client according to the servers configuration. When a user is logged on to SiteManager and not connected to the DVN 5000 Series server of Alarm 1, if Connect on alarm is disabled, and if the server configuration requires or not the user to enter his/her user name and password to establish a connection, a connection will not be established with the server, but the following will occur: The selected alarm sound will become audible for the duration of the alarm. The Alarms management panel and the status bar will display the name of the triggered alarm, the server the triggered alarm is connected to, the time of alarm activation, and the cameras which have been configured to record in response to the alarm (alarmed cameras). The system log will document all of the alarm events and tasks performed by the user. The Alarm Manager icon on the clients taskbar will illuminate. All alarm event actions which have been configured for the triggered alarm (event).
As the SiteManager client will not connect to the server, acknowledging the alarm (turning off the alarm) at SiteManager will not turn off the alarm at the server. If any of the following alarm event actions are configured for Alarm 1, SiteManager will establish a connection with the server (DVN 5000), even though the Connect on alarm is disabled: Show all alarmed cameras Show camera Turn alarm on Turn alarm off Turn aux on Turn aux off Show group Show view Turn a camera aux on Turn a camera aux off
The sequence of events will be the same as when Connect on alarm is enabled, and acknowledging the alarm will turn off the alarm at the server.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-83
SiteManager
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual If the Automatically show acknowledge request when alarm is received option has been selected for the triggered alarm, the Alarm acknowledge window will also appear. If the alarm notification originated at a DVN 5000 server, an e-mail may also be sent to the client according to the servers configuration. Follow the procedures to respond and acknowledge the alarm notification on page 3-86, page 3-87, and page 3-91.
C. When a user is not logged on to SiteManager, but the SiteManager application is open, if Connect on alarm is enabled and if the server configuration requires the user to enter his/her user name and password to establish a connection, then the user selected to receive alarm notifications will be automatically logged on and the Connecting to server window will appear. You must enter your DVN server user name and password. A connection will be established with the server and the following will occur: The selected alarm sound will become audible for the duration of the alarm. The Alarms management panel and the status bar will display the name of the triggered alarm, the server the triggered alarm is connected to, the time of alarm activation, and the cameras which have been configured to record in response to the alarm (alarmed cameras). The system log will document all of the alarm events and tasks performed by the user. The Alarm Manager icon on the clients taskbar will illuminate. All alarm event actions which have been configured for the triggered alarm (event).
If Connect on alarm is enabled and if the server configuration does not require the user to enter his/her user name and password to establish a connection, then the user selected to receive alarm notifications will be automatically logged on, a connection will be established automatically with the server, and all of the events outlined above will occur. See Configuring Alarm Notification Settings on page 3-79 for details about assigning a user who is to be logged on automatically and receive the Alarm Manager notification when none of the users are logged on to SiteManager. If the Automatically show acknowledge request when alarm is received option has been selected for the triggered alarm, the Alarm acknowledge window will also appear. If the alarm notification originated at a DVN 5000 server, an e-mail may also be sent to the client according to the servers configuration. When a user is not logged on to SiteManager, but the SiteManager application is open, if Connect on alarm is disabled, and if the server configuration requires or not the user to enter his/her user name and password to establish a connection, then the user selected to receive alarm notifications will be automatically logged on, a connection will not be established with the server, but the following will occur:
3-84
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
The selected alarm sound will become audible for the duration of the alarm. The Alarms management panel and the status bar will display the name of the triggered alarm, the server the triggered alarm is connected to, the time of alarm activation, and the cameras which have been configured to record in response to the alarm (alarmed cameras). The system log will document all of the alarm events and tasks performed by the user. The Alarm Manager icon on the clients taskbar will illuminate. All alarm event actions which have been configured for the triggered alarm (event).
As the SiteManager client will not connect to the server, acknowledging the alarm (turning off the alarm) at SiteManager will not turn off the alarm at the server. If any of the following alarm event actions are configured for Alarm 1, SiteManager will establish a connection with the server (DVN 5000), even though the Connect on alarm is disabled: Show all alarmed cameras Show camera Turn alarm on Turn alarm off Turn aux on Turn aux off Show group Show view Turn a camera aux on Turn a camera aux off
The sequence of events will be the same as when Connect on alarm is enabled, and acknowledging the alarm will turn off the alarm at the server. If the Automatically show acknowledge request when alarm is received option has been selected for the triggered alarm, the Alarm acknowledge window will also appear. If the alarm notification originated at a DVN 5000 server, an e-mail may also be sent to the client according to the servers configuration. Follow the procedures to respond and acknowledge the alarm notification on page 3-86, page 3-87, and page 3-91. D. When the SiteManager application is closed, then when an alarm notification is sent to the client from the server, only the Alarm Manager icon on the clients taskbar will illuminate.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-85
SiteManager
Managing Incoming Alarm Manager Notifications when no Alarm Events have been Configured at the SiteManager Client
For example: Alarm 1 (connected to a DVN 5000 Series server) is configured to be triggered when the Prime sector is locked. Cameras 1, 2, and 6 are set to record in response to Alarm 1 and your SiteManager client will be notified when the alarm is triggered. An alarm sound has been allocated for the DVN 5000 Series server alarms. When Alarm 1 is triggered and the Alarm Manager notification is received (in one of the ways described in the previous procedures), the user must respond to and acknowledge the alarm. Assuming that the Alarms management panel and the status bar are displayed, and that the SiteManager client will connect to the server when the alarm is triggered, then the following will occur:

A connection will be established with the server. The selected alarm sound will become audible for the duration of the alarm. The Alarms management panel and the status bar will display the name of the triggered alarm, the server the triggered alarm is connected to, the time of alarm activation, and the cameras which have been configured to record in response to the alarm (alarmed cameras). The system log will document all of the alarm events and tasks performed by the user. The Alarm Manager icon on the clients taskbar will illuminate.
To acknowledge the alarm (turn it off): 1. Double-click the alarm icon in the Alarms management panel. The following will occur: The alarm sound will cease. The alarm will be removed from the Alarms management panel. The alarm will be turned off. The Alarm Manager icon on the clients taskbar will not be illuminated.
2. If the connection is not established with the server (the Connect on alarm in the servers configuration is disabled), then turning off the triggered alarm at the SiteManager client will not turn off the alarm at the server. You will need to manually connect to the server (or access the server via the server interface, RemoteControl, or locally) and turn off the alarm.
3-86
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
Managing Incoming Alarm Manager Notifications when one or more Alarm Events but no Operations have been Configured at the SiteManager Client
For example: Alarm 1 (connected to a DVN 5000 Series server) is configured to be triggered when the Prime sector is locked. Cameras 1, 2, and 6 are set to record in response to Alarm 1 and your SiteManager client will be notified when the alarm is triggered. An alarm sound has been allocated for the DVN 5000 Series server alarms and the event has been configured to play the alarm sound. The alarm event for Alarm 1 has been configured with the action show Cameras 3 on Monitor 1. When Alarm 1 is triggered and the Alarm Manager notification is received (in one of the ways described in the first procedure in this section), the user must respond to and acknowledge the alarm. Assuming that the Alarms management panel and the status bar are displayed and that the SiteManager client will connect to the server when the alarm is triggered, then the following will occur:

A connection will be established with the server. The selected alarm sound will become audible for the duration of the alarm. The Alarms management panel and the status bar will display the name of the triggered alarm, the server the triggered alarm is connected to, the time of alarm activation, and the cameras which have been configured to record in response to the alarm (alarmed cameras). The system log will document all of the alarm events and tasks performed by the user. The Alarm Manager icon on the clients taskbar will illuminate. Camera 3 will be displayed on Monitor 1.
If the alarm notification originated at a DVN 5000 server, an e-mail may also be sent to the client according to the servers configuration. To acknowledge the alarm (turn it off):
NOTE
If the Automatically show acknowledge request when alarm is received option has been selected for the triggered alarm, the Alarm acknowledge window will already be displayed.
1. Double-click the alarm icon in the Alarms management panel. 2. If all of the alarm events for the triggered alarm have been configured not to request user acknowledgement (the Require acknowledge box is not selected in the Events configuration window), then the following will occur: The alarm sound will cease. The alarm will be removed from the Alarms management panel.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-87
SiteManager The alarm will be turned off.
The Alarm Manager icon on the clients taskbar will not be illuminated.
3. If one or more of the alarm events for the triggered alarm have been configured to request user acknowledgement only (the Require acknowledge box is selected in the Event configuration window, but the Show alarm information and the Request operator notes boxes are not selected in the Alarm acknowledge configuration window, then the following Alarm acknowledge window appears.
Click Acknowledge. The following will occur: The alarm sound will cease The Alarm acknowledge window will close. The alarm will be removed from the Alarms management panel. The alarm will be turned off. The Alarm Manager icon on the clients taskbar will not be illuminated.
4. If one or more of the alarm events for the triggered alarm have been configured to request user acknowledgement and display alarm information (the Require acknowledge box is selected in the Event configuration window and the Show alarm information box is selected in the Alarm acknowledge configuration window), then the following Alarm acknowledge window appears.
Click Acknowledge. The following will occur: The alarm sound will cease. The Alarm acknowledge window will close. The alarm will be removed from the Alarms management panel. The alarm will be turned off. The Alarm Manager icon on the clients taskbar will not be illuminated.
3-88
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
5. If one or more of the alarm events for the triggered alarm have been configured to request user acknowledgement and operators notes (the Require acknowledge box is selected in the Event configuration window and the Request operator notes box is selected in the Alarm acknowledge configuration window), then the following Alarm acknowledge window appears.
Type in the necessary information (for example, Contacted supervisor and sent one guard to the alarmed site). Click Acknowledge. The following will occur: The alarm sound will cease. The Alarm acknowledge window will close. The alarm will be removed from the Alarms management panel. The system log will document the operators notes. The alarm will be turned off. The Alarm Manager icon on the clients taskbar will not be illuminated.
NOTE
If the connection is established with the server (i.e. the Connect on alarm in the server's configuration is enabled), then turning off the triggered alarm at SiteManager will turn off the alarm at the server only if the Turn alarm off on ack check box is selected on the Event configuration window.
6. If one or more of the alarm events for the triggered alarm have been configured to display alarm information and request user acknowledgement and operators notes (the Require acknowledge, Show alarm information, and the Request operator notes boxes are selected, then the following Alarm acknowledge window will appear.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-89
SiteManager
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Type in the necessary information (for example, Contacted supervisor and sent one guard to the alarmed site). Click Acknowledge. The following will occur: The alarm sound will cease. The Alarm acknowledge window will close. The alarm will be removed from the Alarms management panel. The system log will document the operators notes. The alarm will be turned off. The Alarm Manager icon on the clients taskbar will not be illuminated.
NOTE
If the connection is not established with the server (the Connect on alarm in the servers configuration is disabled), then turning off the triggered alarm at the SiteManager client will not turn off the alarm at the server. You will need to manually connect to the server (or access the server via the server interface, RemoteControl or locally) and turn off the alarm.
7. If operators notes were requested and typed in, the notes can be viewed in the system log by clicking the Log actions tab. The system log appears. Use the system log scroll bar to locate the required information. All performed operations and operator notes will be red. Alarm Manager notifications are also logged using red text.
NOTE
If the SiteManager application is closed, the next time SiteManager is opened, the system log will no longer contain the operators notes, as the system log is deleted when the application is closed. The system log is not deleted when users log on or out.
Managing Incoming Alarm Manager Notifications when one or more Alarm Events with a Single Operation have been Configured at the SiteManager Client
For example: Alarm 1 (connected to a DVN 5000 Series server) is configured to be triggered when the Prime sector is locked. Cameras 1, 2, and 6 are set to record in response to Alarm 1 and your SiteManager client will be notified when the alarm is triggered. An alarm sound has been allocated for the DVN 5000 Series server alarms and the event has been configured to play the alarm sound. The alarm event for Alarm 1 has been configured with the action show Cameras 3 on Monitor 1 and the following operation: Contact the Senior Security Manager on 123-4567.
3-90
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
When Alarm 1 is triggered and the Alarm Manager notification is received (in one of the ways described in the previous procedures), the user must respond to and acknowledge the alarm. Assuming that the Alarms management panel and the status bar are displayed and that the SiteManager client will connect to the server when the alarm is triggered, then the following will occur:

A connection will be established with the server. The selected alarm sound will become audible for the duration of the alarm. The Alarms management panel and the status bar will display the name of the triggered alarm, the server the triggered alarm is connected to, the time of alarm activation, and the cameras which have been configured to record in response to the alarm (alarmed cameras). The system log will document all of the alarm events and tasks performed by the user. The Alarm Manager icon on the clients taskbar will illuminate. Camera 3 will be displayed on Monitor 1.
If the alarm notification originated at a DVN 5000 server, an e-mail may also be sent to the client according to the servers configuration. To acknowledge the alarm (turn it off): 1. Double-click the alarm icon in the Alarms management panel. If the Automatically show acknowledge request when alarm is received option has been selected for the triggered alarm, the Alarm acknowledge window will already be displayed. 2. If the operation has been configured so that the user may turn off the triggered alarm only after the specified task has been performed and indicate whether the task execution was successful (OK) or unsuccessful (failed) (the Accept failure box is selected in the Alarm acknowledge configuration window) then continue with step 8. 3. If the operation has been configured so that the user may turn off the triggered alarm only after the specified task has been successfully performed, if one or more of the alarm events for the triggered alarm have been configured not to display alarm information or request operators notes (the Show alarm information and the Request operator notes boxes are not selected in the Alarm acknowledge configuration window), then the following Alarm acknowledge window will appear.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-91
SiteManager
Read the text. Perform the operation. Click OK. The Acknowledge button appears.
Click Acknowledge. The following will occur: The alarm sound will cease. The Alarm acknowledge window will close. The alarm will be removed from the Alarms management panel, The alarm will be turned off. The Alarm Manager icon on the clients taskbar will not be illuminated.
NOTE
If the connection is established with the server (i.e. the Connect on alarm in the server's configuration is enabled) then turning off the triggered alarm at SiteManager will turn off the alarm at the server only if the Turn alarm off on ack check box is selected on the Event configuration window.
4. If one or more of the alarm events for the triggered alarm have been configured to display alarm information only (the Show alarm information box is selected and the Request operator notes box is not selected in the Alarm acknowledge configuration window, then the following Alarm acknowledge window will appear.
3-92
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
Read the text. Perform the operation. Click OK. The Acknowledge button appears.
Click Acknowledge. The following will occur: The alarm sound will cease. The Alarm acknowledge window will close. The alarm will be removed from the Alarms management panel. The alarm will be turned off. The Alarm Manager icon on the clients taskbar will not be illuminated.
NOTE
5. If one or more of the alarm events for the triggered alarm have been configured to request operators notes only (the Request operator notes box is selected and the Show alarm information box is not selected in the Alarm acknowledge configuration window), then the following Alarm acknowledge window will appear.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-93
SiteManager
Read the text. Perform the operation. Click OK. The text window and the Acknowledge button appear.
Type in the necessary information (for example, Contacted the Senior Security Manager and sent one guard to the alarmed site). Click Acknowledge. The following will occur: The alarm sound will cease. The Alarm acknowledge window will close. The alarm will be removed from the Alarms management panel. The system log will document the operators notes. The alarm will be turned off. The Alarm Manager icon on the clients taskbar will not be illuminated.
NOTE
6. If one or more of the alarm events for the triggered alarm have been configured to display alarm information and request operators notes (both the Show alarm information and the Request operator notes boxes are selected in the Alarm acknowledge configuration window), then the following Alarm acknowledge window will appear.
3-94
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
Read the text. Perform the operation. Click OK. The text window and the Acknowledge button appear.
Type in the necessary information (for example, Contacted the Senior Security manager and sent one guard to the alarmed site). Click Acknowledge. The following will occur: The alarm sound will cease. The Alarm acknowledge window will close. The alarm will be removed from the Alarms management panel. The system log will document the operators notes. The alarm will be turned off. The Alarm Manager icon on the clients taskbar will not be illuminated.
NOTE
7. Continue with step 12. 8. If one or more of the alarm events for the triggered alarm have been configured not to display alarm information or request operators notes (the Show alarm information and the Request operator notes boxes are not
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-95
SiteManager
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual selected in the Alarm acknowledge configuration window), then the following Alarm acknowledge window will appear.
Read the text. Perform the operation. If the operation was successfully performed, click OK. If the operation was not successfully performed, click Failed. The alarm sound will cease. The Alarm acknowledge window will close. The alarm will be removed from the Alarms management panel. The system log will document whether the operation was performed successful or unsuccessful. The alarm will be turned off. The Alarm Manager icon on the clients taskbar will not be illuminated.
Click Acknowledge. The following will occur:
NOTE
If the connection is established with the server (i.e. the Connect on alarm in the servers configuration is enabled), then turning off the triggered alarm at SiteManager will turn off the alarm at the server only if the Turn alarm off on ack check box is selected on the Event configuration window.
9. If one or more of the alarm events for the triggered alarm have been configured to display alarm information only (the Show alarm information box is selected and the Request operator notes box is not selected in the Alarm acknowledge configuration window), then the following Alarm acknowledge window will appear.
3-96
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
Read the text. Perform the operation. If the operation was successfully performed, click OK. If the operation was not successfully performed, click Failed. The alarm sound will cease. The Alarm acknowledge window will close. The alarm will be removed from the Alarms management panel. The system log will document whether the operation was performed successful or unsuccessful. The alarm will be turned off. The Alarm Manager icon on the clients taskbar will not be illuminated.
Click Acknowledge. The following will occur:
NOTE
10. If one or more of the alarm events for the triggered alarm have been configured to request operators notes only (the Request operator notes box is selected and the Show alarm information box is not selected in the Alarm acknowledge configuration window), then the following Alarm acknowledge window will appear.
Read the text. Perform the operation. If the operation was successfully performed, click OK.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-97
SiteManager
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual If the operation was not successfully performed, click Failed.
Type in the necessary information (for example, Contacted the Senior Security Manager and sent one guard to the alarmed site). Click Acknowledge. The following will occur: The alarm sound will cease. The Alarm acknowledge window will close. The alarm will be removed from the Alarms management panel. The system log will document the operators notes. The system log will document whether the operation was performed successful or unsuccessful. The alarm will be turned off. The Alarm Manager icon on the clients taskbar will not be illuminated.
NOTE
11. If one or more of the alarm events for the triggered alarm have been configured to display alarm information and request operators notes (both the Show alarm information and the Request operator notes boxes are selected in the Alarm acknowledge configuration window), then the following Alarm acknowledge window will appear.
Read the text. Perform the operation. If the operation was successfully performed, click OK. If the operation was not successfully performed, click Failed.
Type in the necessary information (for example, Contacted the Senior Security Manager and sent one guard to the alarmed site). Click Acknowledge. The following will occur: The alarm sound will cease.
3-98
24-10248-56 Rev. B
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual The Alarm acknowledge window will close.
SiteManager
The alarm will be removed from the Alarms management panel. The system log will document the operators notes. The system log will document whether the operation was performed successful or unsuccessful. The alarm will be turned off. The Alarm Manager icon on the clients taskbar will not be illuminated.
NOTE
12. If the connection is not established with the server (the Connect on alarm in the servers configuration is disabled), then turning off the triggered alarm at the SiteManager client will not turn off the alarm at the server. You will need to manually connect to the server (or access the server via the server interface, RemoteControl or locally) and turn off the alarm. 13. All performed operations and all operator notes can be viewed in the system log by clicking the Log actions tab. The system log will appear. Use the system log scroll bar to locate the required information. All performed operations and operator notes will be red. 14. If the operation was performed successfully, DONE will be written next to the operation. If it was unsuccessfully, FAILED will be written next to the operation. Alarm Manager notifications are also logged using red text.
NOTE
If the SiteManager application is closed, the next time SiteManager is opened, the system log will no longer contain the operators notes, as the system log is deleted when the application is closed. The system log is not deleted when users log in or out.
Managing Alarm Events With Multiple Operations

The administrator may configure alarm events with multiple operations, which must be performed by the user prior to acknowledging a triggered alarm. To manage alarm events with two or more operations, follow the steps in Managing Incoming Alarm Manager Notifications when one or more Alarm Events with a Single Operation have been Configured at the SiteManager Client on page 3-90, and note that each time the user clicks OK or Failed, the next operation in the sequence will be displayed.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-99
SiteManager
The user must perform and respond to each of the operations. Once the last operation has been performed and responded to, the Acknowledge button will appear (with or without the operators notes text window, depending on the configuration).
Type in the notes (if required) and click Acknowledge.
Silencing Server Alarms

SiteManager allows you to choose a particular time interval when all the alarms from a selected server will be silent. If all the server alarms need to be silent for a particular reason, such as during system maintenance, it eliminates the need for silencing each alarm manually and then later individually reactivating potentially hundreds of alarms. By selecting this option, all of the selected servers alarms will be silent during the specified time interval. Alarm call priority will not be functional if an alarm is triggered during a silence time interval. To silence server alarms, you must be
3-100
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
granted the right to create and/or edit resources based upon your user account configuration. To silence server alarms: 1. Click the Servers tab. To select the Edit server option: Right-click the server in the hierarchy window and click Edit server, or Click the server in the hierarchy window, and select Server>Edit server from the menu bar
2. In the Server window, click the Alarm silence tab. The Alarm silence panel appears.
3. Click the Silence alarms in this time interval check box. The From and To drop-down lists and scroll bars will be enabled. 4. Select the start date and time and stop date and time. Click OK. The alarms will be silent during the specified time interval. You may also use the keyboard and type in the start/stop dates and times. 5. The alarms will cease to be silent after the specified period. If you wish to reactivate the alarms before the end of the time interval, deselect the Silence alarms in this time interval check box and click OK. The alarms will be enabled.
CAMERA VIDEO SCREEN FUNCTIONS

This section provides detailed information on the functions available on the camera video screen. They include:

Playback commands Sector selection Window recorder Print Save
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-101
SiteManager Find Visual search Audio
In addition, detailed information is provided about:

Camera sectors Playing back video footage and audio Exporting image and file formats Finding still images or video clips Saving still images or video clips (manually or on the fly)
NOTE
In this section, the term server refers to DVN 5000 Series and DVN 3000 Series servers, and DVN 100-NET encoders, unless otherwise stated.
Camera Video Screens

One of the advantages of SiteManager is the ability to view numerous cameras simultaneously. When a camera is enabled, it is displayed in its individual video screen. These screens are totally independent of one another, thus allowing custom viewing of each camera. Since connection quality is server dependent, changing the quality of one camera will change the quality of all the cameras connected to that particular server. See the following figure. The camera video screen can be categorized into the Viewing area and the Toolbar:
Viewing area
Toolbar
3-102
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
For detailed button and feature descriptions of the video screen toolbar, see Working with the Camera Video Screen Toolbar on page 3-109.
Working with the Camera Video Screen Options

Every camera video screen has its own set of menu options, allowing you to work with each camera independently. This gives you the ability to custom view numerous cameras simultaneously. You may choose to view a tour on camera 1 while at the same time following Time Lapse playback on camera 2. To access the camera video screen menu and work with the options: 1. Display a camera video screen by performing one of the following actions: Double-click on the camera in the hierarchy window. Click and drag the specific camera from the hierarchy window to the virtual video desktop. Right-click on the camera in the hierarchy window and select Show in the camera resource menu. Click the specific camera in the hierarchy window and select Resource>Show from the menu bar.
You may also display all cameras connected to a single server by selecting Autodisplay in the Server menu. See Editing Server Network Connections on page 3-26 for information about accessing the Server menu. The camera video screen appears. You must be connected to the server to display the cameras. 2. Right-click the viewing area. The screen menu appears.
3. Select one of the following options:

Show Toolbar
This toggle button allows you to display or hide the toolbar.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-103
SiteManager
Window size
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Determines the number of pixels and the size of a camera video screen.
Video Resolution
Allows you to dynamically change MPEG4 encoding at the server remotely from the SiteManager client. This feature is only functional if there are encoders configured at the server and/or MPEG4 Adaptive is enabled.
Quality
Allows you to change image quality in relation to the available bandwidth. For information abut the available qualities, see Servers on page 3-18.
Enhance video quality
Allows you to improve video quality of cameras using the MPEG4 compression codec by increasing CPU utilization. If enabled, the video quality will be maximized but the CPU utilization will also be high.
Enhance high resolution MPEG
An MPEG4 filter which allows you to minimize the visual artefacts that result from MPEG4 compression. Enabling the video quality enhancer will significantly increase utilization of the CPU.
3-104
24-10248-56 Rev. B

Send to monitor
SiteManager
Allows you to the display the selected camera on a VGA or network (DVN 100-NET) monitor. You can only send a camera to a VGA monitor when the VGA monitor is not in the sequence resource mode. Allows you to move the camera if it is PTZ enabled.
Move
Zoom
Allows you to zoom the camera if it is PTZ enabled.
Focus
Allows you to focus the camera if it is PTZ enabled.
Iris
Allows you to change the diameter of the lens iris if the camera is PTZ enabled.
Preset
Allows you to select one of the 16 preset camera positions.
Tour
Allows you select one of the 8 camera tours.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-105
SiteManager
NOTE
Presets and tours are predefined on the corresponding server. Refer to the appropriate server manual, such as the DVN 5000 Series Installation and Configuration Manual, for further information. Also, see Configuring the Virtual Video Desktop on page 3-242 for additional information about the camera video screen.
4. Select the options, as required.
Controlling a Pan/Tilt/Zoom (PTZ) Camera Dome

If a DVN 5000 or DVN 3000 Series server to which the SiteManager client is connected has one or more camera domes connected and configured, you can move the camera dome(s) and adjust the zoom, focus and iris levels. The PTZ function may be accessed via the screen menu options, by opening a camera video screen and using the mouse cursor, or by using keyboard shortcuts (see Keyboard Shortcuts for PTZ Camera Control on page 108). The PTZ function for camera domes is only functional when a camera dome is displayed in its individual camera video screen. To pan, tilt, or zoom a camera dome using the screen menu, see Working with the Camera Video Screen Options on page 3-103. You can only adjust a camera domes focus and iris level via the screen menu. You must be granted the right to use resources upon your account configuration to use the PTZ function. To move a camera dome: 1. Display a camera video screen by performing one of the following actions: Double-click on the camera in the hierarchy window. Click and drag the specific camera from the hierarchy window to the virtual video desktop. Right-click on the camera in the hierarchy window and select Show in the camera resource menu. Select the specific camera in the hierarchy window and select Resource>Show from the menu bar.
3-106
24-10248-56 Rev. B
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual The camera video screen appears. You must be connected to the server to display the camera.
SiteManager
2. Place the mouse cursor in the middle of the camera video screen. If the camera dome is configured correctly, the Dome cursor appears.
Dome cursor
3. To move the camera dome, click and drag the dome cursor on the video window until the desired position is reached.
NOTE
If the PTZ camera is currently being controlled by a scheduled targets tour, you must stop the tour before you can manually control the camera. To stop a scheduled targets tour, right-click over the camera video and select the tour currently playing from the Tour menu.
4. To zoom in using the optical zoom, roll the mouse wheel forward until the desired optical zoom level is achieved. 5. To zoom in using the digital zoom, you must first reach the upper zoom limit of the optical zoom. Roll the mouse wheel forward until you cannot zoom in any further. Click on the video window and roll the mouse wheel forward. Observe the corresponding changes in the video window. Continue to roll the mouse wheel forward until the desired digital zoom level is achieved. 6. To zoom out using the optical zoom, roll the mouse wheel backward until the desired optical zoom level is achieved. 7. To zoom out using the digital zoom, you can only zoom out using the digital zoom if the camera dome is already digitally zoomed in. Roll the mouse wheel backward. Observe the corresponding changes in the video window.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-107
SiteManager
8. To adjust the camera dome's focus and/or iris levels, follow the procedure described in Working with the Camera Video Screen Options on page 3-103.
Keyboard Shortcuts for PTZ Camera Control

SiteManager supports keyboard shortcuts, which can be used to control a PTZ camera as an alternative to using the right-mouse menu options or the mouse cursor. To control a PTZ camera using keyboard shortcuts: 1. Select the Servers tab. 2. Expand the server whose PTZ camera(s) you wish to control. 3. Expand the Cameras item. 4. From the list of cameras, double-click the PTZ camera you wish to control. The video window for the selected camera opens.
NOTE
To control a PTZ camera from SiteManager, the video window of the camera you wish to control must be selected.
5. Control the PTZ camera using the keyboard shortcuts in Table 3-6. Table 3-6: Keyboard Shortcuts for PTZ Camera Control via SiteManager
PTZ Command Zoom In Keyboard Shortcut and
3-108
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
Table 3-6: Keyboard Shortcuts for PTZ Camera Control via SiteManager
PTZ Command Zoom Out Focus Near Focus Far Iris Open Iris Close Go to Preset Initiate Target Tour Move Camera Left Move Camera Right Move Camera Up Move Camera Down Keyboard Shortcut and and and and and and and and and and and ....... .......
Working with the Camera Video Screen Toolbar

The Camera video screen toolbar consists of the following:

Playback commands Sector button Record button Save button Print button Visual search button Find button Mute button
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-109
SiteManager
Playback commands Sector
Record Save
Print Visual search
Find Mute
Buttons and Features (Camera Video Screen Toolbar)

Table 3-7 provides a brief description of the function of each button on the camera video screen toolbar. Table 3-7: Video Screen Toolbar Buttons and Features
Function Description Allows you to go to the beginning of the cameras video footage and audio archive. Allows you to fast rewind video footage and audio and rewind the video footage and audio frame by frame when used with the Pause button. Allows you to stop video footage and audio playback. Allows you to commence video footage and audio playback. Allows you to pause the video footage and audio playback and forward or rewind the video footage and audio frame by frame when used with the FFW and REW buttons. Allows you to fast forward video footage and audio and forward the video footage and audio frame by frame when used with the Pause button. Allows you to go to the end of the camera's video footage and audio archive. Allows you to play back video footage from one of the three sectors Prime, Time lapse and Alarm. Allows you to save video footage on the fly while watching the camera live. Click once to start recording and click again to stop recording. All the video footage and audio will be stored in the location according to the administrator's window recorder settings configuration. Allows you to save still images as either JPEG or BMP files. Allows you to print a still image.
3-110
24-10248-56 Rev. B
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Table 3-7: Video Screen Toolbar Buttons and Features
Function Description
SiteManager
Opens the visual search panel, which allows you to find a particular video clip by clicking on the index and export video clips by using the index export tools. For detailed information, see Finding a Still Image or Video Clip on page 3-116, Saving a Video Clip on page 3-122, and Saving Video Clips on page 3-190. Opens the Find window, which allows you to find a particular video clip by selecting the date and time. Allows you to turn the audio channel on or off. To help conserve bandwidth, this button is set to Mute (no audio) by default each time you open a camera video screen.
To access and use the camera video screen toolbar: 1. Display a camera video screen by performing one of the following actions: Double-click on the camera in the hierarchy window. Click and drag the specific camera from the hierarchy window to the virtual video desktop. Right-click on the camera in the hierarchy window and select Show in the camera resource menu. Click the specific camera in the hierarchy window and select Resource>Show from the menu bar.
You may also display all cameras connected to a single server by selecting Autodisplay in the Server menu. See Editing Server Network Connections on page 3-26 for information about accessing the Server menu. The camera video screen appears. 2. To increase the screen resolution, move the mouse to the outer screen margin and then click and drag the screen to the desired size, or select the desired resolution in the resolution menu. The screen resolution will be increased as specified.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-111
SiteManager
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual If the toolbar is not showing, select Show Toolbar in the Screen menu.
3. To play back a video clip, use the playback commands. See Playing Back Video Footage and Audio on page 3-114. 4. From the Sector drop-down list, select the camera sector you wish to play back.
See Playing Back Video Footage and Audio on page 3-114 for further information. 5. To record video footage as you are watching it live, click the Record icon. The video footage which you are currently viewing live will be saved in the location according to the administrators window recorder settings configuration. Note that the playback commands are disabled. To stop recording, click the Record icon again. 6. To save a still image, click the Save icon. The Save As window appears.
You can only save still images either as JPEG or bmp files. See Saving a Still Image on page 3-121. See Saving a Video Clip on page 3-122 for information about the file formats. 7. To print a still image, click the Print icon. The Print window appears. 8. To find a particular still image or beginning of a specific video clip, click the Visual search icon or click the Find icon. See Finding a Still Image or Video Clip on page 3-116 for further information. 9. To mute live or played back audio, click the Speaker icon. The audio channel is muted and audio will not be transmitted through your speakers. To listen to audio, click the Audio icon again. 10. Perform the above functions, as required. See Buttons and Features (Camera Video Screen Toolbar) on page 3-110 for option details.
3-112
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
Selecting a Camera Sector for Playback

A servers storage space can be configured with up to 3 unique storage sectors Prime, Time Lapse and Alarm. Cameras may be configured to record and store video footage in any or all of the three sectors. Sectors allow you to store information in ways that trade off recording length against quality (image compression), image resolution, and image recording rates (FPS), thus allowing flexibility in storage space utilization. The administrator has full control and flexibility of the quality, resolution, and size of the images stored in each of the three sectors. SiteManager allows you to select the camera sector whose video footage you wish to play back. By using this option you may choose to view footage and audio that was recorded in any of the three camera sectors. The conditions under which each sector operates are preset by the system administrator. Refer to the DVN 5000 Series or DVN 3000 Series Installation and Configuration Manual. If enabled, motion detection recording will only occur when motion is detected and satisfies the motion detection parameters specified by the user. If enabled, activity detection recording will occur when any motion is detected, regardless of whether it satisfies the motion detection specifications or not. For detailed information about configuring alarms, refer to the DVN 5000 Series or DVN 3000 Series Installation and Configuration Manual. See Playing Back Video Footage and Audio on page 3-114 for detailed information about using the playback commands. DVN 100-NET encoders only transmit live video footage and audio and therefore do not have any storage or sectors. To play back video footage and audio from a DVN 100-NET encoder, the encoder must be configured as a video input on a DVN 5000 server and you must access the camera from the DVN 5000 server. To play back video footage from a servers alarm sector, you can use the system log database to locate the alarm and therefore any video footage and audio recorded at the time of the alarm. See Log Explorer and Working with the Log Panel on page 3-249 for additional information. To select the camera sector: 1. Display the required camera video screen (see page 3-103). 2. Increase the screen resolution (see Working with the Camera Video Screen Options on page 3-103). 3. If supported by the DVN server, select one of the following options from the Sector drop-down list:
Prime Time lapse
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-113
SiteManager 4. Click Alarm in the toolbar.
The video footage from the selected camera sector will be played back. Use the playback pad, as needed. See Playing Back Video Footage and Audio on page 3-114 for detailed information about using the playback commands. 5. To return to live viewing, click screen returns to live viewing. 6. To save or print a still image, click on the playback pad. The camera video
followed by either
or
Either the save or the print window appears. 7. To choose another camera sector to play back, click The camera video screen returns to live viewing. on the playback pad.
8. You may also dynamically change the camera sector during playback. As video footage is being played back, select the camera sector you wish to view from the sectors menu. The playback will continue with video footage from the newly selected camera sector.
NOTE
If there is no video footage available in a camera sector, or the camera sector is disabled, the corresponding sector will be disabled in the sectors menu.
Playing Back Video Footage and Audio

SiteManager allows you to play back recorded video footage and audio from any server to which the SiteManager client is connected. Recorded video footage and audio is played back by using standard video playback controls. If you wish to play back video footage and audio of multiple cameras at the same time, you may use the powerful synchronized multiple camera or multiple monitor playback. Searched still images can be printed, or you can save them along with any video footage and audio. See the following sections:

Working with the Camera Video Screen Toolbar on page 3-109 Saving a Still Image on page 3-121 Saving a Video Clip on page 3-122 Saving Video Clips on page 3-190
For detailed information about playing back multiple cameras simultaneously, see Synchronized Multiple Camera Playback on page 3-184.
3-114
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
If you know the camera and the exact time period you would like to play back, or if there is a vast amount of footage to play back, use the Find function. See Finding a Still Image or Video Clip on page 3-116. To play back video footage and audio: 1. Display the required camera video screen (see page 3-103). 2. Increase the screen resolution (see Working with the Camera Video Screen Options on page 3-103). 3. If supported by the DVN server, select one of the following options from the Sector drop-down list:
4. Click
Prime Time lapse Alarm in the toolbar.
The video footage from the selected camera sector will be played back. 5. To go to the start of recorded video footage, click 6. To go to the end of recorded video footage, click 7. To fast forward the video clip, right-click . . .
To increase the speed of the fast forward function, repeatedly right-click until you reach the required speed (2 xs to 512 xs). To slow down again, right-click . . until
8. To fast rewind the video clip, right-click
To increase the speed of the rewind function, repeatedly right-click you reach the required speed (2 xs to 512 xs). To slow down again, right-click 9. To pause the video clip, click . .
Playback will stop at the chosen point in the video clip to let you view a still image. To resume, right-click or , as required, or .
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-115
SiteManager
10. To play back frame by frame, click and then repeatedly click to move through the video clip frame by frame, as required. 11. To temporarily fast forward or rewind, hold down of the mouse. 12. To return to live viewing, click screen returns to live viewing. or
or
using a left click
on the playback pad. The camera video
To play back a different camera sector, repeat the steps in this section. 13. To save or print a still image, click followed by either the save or the print window appears. or . Either
Finding a Still Image or Video Clip

Use the Date time search and Visual search buttons to locate required images or video footage. These buttons are available in both the camera video and view screens. If you know the date and time of the image or video clip you require, these functions allow you quick access to the recorded footage. If you do not know the date and time, use the playback commands to view all the footage. See Playing Back Video Footage and Audio on page 3-114 for detailed information about playback commands. To search through recorded video footage of cameras connected to a DVN 3000 Series server, you must use the camera video screen. The Date time search and Visual search buttons are disabled for cameras connected to a DVN 100-NET encoder, since these encoders only transmit live video footage and audio. To search the video footage from a DVN 100-NET encoder, the encoder must be configured as a video input on a DVN 5000 server and you must access the camera from the DVN 5000 server. As synchronized multiple camera playback is only functional in view screens, using the find function(s) in views gives you the advantage of searching footage of multiple cameras simultaneously. For further information, see Camera Video Screens on page 3-102, Working with the Camera Video Screen Toolbar on page 3-109, and The View Screen on page 3-168. To find a still image or video clip using date and time: 1. Access the camera video screen required by performing one of the following actions: Double-click on the appropriate camera or view icon in the hierarchy window. Click and drag the appropriate camera or view icon from the hierarchy window to the virtual video desktop.
3-116
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
Right-click on the appropriate camera or view icon in the hierarchy window and select Show.
You may also double-click the appropriate camera or view icon on a 2D or a 3D map. 2. If you accessed a camera video screen, skip to step 4. 3. If you accessed a view screen, click the camera you wish to be the master of the search. The selected camera will display a red outline. 4. If supported by the DVN server, select the desired Sector from the drop-down list. The camera sector will be changed as selected, allowing you to find the required still image and/or video footage.
5. Click the Date time search button. The Find window appears.
6. Specify the date by clicking the Date drop-down arrow. The calendar window appears.
You may also simply type in the date. 7. Select the month and date required. The Find window appears with the specified date. 8. Specify the time by using the Time scroll bar or by typing it in the Time text box. 9. Click OK. If you are working on a camera video screen, then video footage recorded at the specified date and time will be displayed on the camera video screen, paused and ready for playback. 10. If you are working on a view screen, then video footage recorded at the specified date and time will be displayed for all the cameras included in the view screen, paused and ready for playback. 11. You may choose to use the playback commands to view the video footage and/or save a specific still image or video clip. For further information, see Working with the Camera Video Screen Toolbar on page 3-109 and Synchronized Multiple Camera Playback on page 3-184. 12. To save a still image, see Saving a Still Image on page 3-121.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-117
SiteManager
13. To save a video clip, see Saving a Video Clip on page 3-122. 14. To save multiple video clips simultaneously, see Saving Video Clips on page 3-190. To find a still image or video clip using visual search: 1. Access the camera video screen required by performing one of the following actions: Double-click on the appropriate camera or view icon in the hierarchy window. Click and drag the appropriate camera or view icon from the hierarchy window to the virtual video desktop. Right-click on the appropriate camera or view icon in the hierarchy window and select Show.
You may also double-click the appropriate camera or view icon on a 2D or a 3D map. 2. If you accessed a camera video screen, skip to step 4. 3. If you accessed a view screen, click the camera you wish to be the master of the search. The selected camera will display a red outline. 4. If supported by the DVN server, select the desired Sector from the drop-down list. The camera sector will be changed as selected, allowing you to find the required still image and/or video footage in the desired camera sector.
5. Click the Visual search button. 6. If you are using a camera video screen and the Prime sector, the camera visual search panel appears.
7. If you are using a camera video screen and the Time lapse sector, the camera visual search panel appears.
8. If you are using a camera video screen and the Alarm sector, the camera visual search panel appears.
3-118
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
9. If you are using a view screen and the Prime sector, the view visual search panel appears.
10. If you are using a view screen and the Time lapse sector, the view visual search panel appears.
11. If you are using a view screen and the Alarm sector, the view visual search panel appears.
Camera video screens and view screens The blue index represents the recorded video footage. The date and time in the upper left-hand corner indicate the beginning of the available recorded video footage. The date and time in the upper right-hand corner indicate the end of the available recorded video footage. The date and time in the middle indicate the date and time of the video footage as currently selected by the pointer. The number of rows depends on the number of cameras included in the view screen. The names on the left-hand side of the index indicate to which camera each index row belongs.
View screens only
12. Use the Plus and Minus buttons to adjust the increments on the Time scale. 13. Use the horizontal scroll bar to locate the correct date and/or time, or click and drag the pointer to the required time on the index. The pointer determines the start of the video clip that will be played back. 14. Click the Play button .
15. If you are using a camera video screen, video footage will be played back starting from the time indicated by the pointer.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-119
SiteManager
16. If you are using a view screen, video footage will be played back for the master camera as well as all other cameras included in the view screen, starting from the time indicated by the pointer. 17. Use the playback commands, as needed. See Synchronized Multiple Camera Playback on page 3-184 for details about playback commands. 18. During the playback you may choose to use the scroll bar or the pointer to move through the recorded footage with greater speed and ease. 19. For detailed information about view screen playback commands, see Synchronized Multiple Camera Playback on page 3-184. 20. To export a video clip, see Exporting Image and Video Clip Formats on page 3-120. To save a video clip, see Saving a Video Clip on page 3-122.
Exporting Image and Video Clip Formats

You have the option to save DVN 5000 Series still images and video clips in the following file formats: Still images:

Compressed JPEG Interchange Format Uncompressed Windows Bitmap Format
Video clips:

AVI Format MP4 Format MS Mpeg4 V3 Format
Still Image File Type Features

To help you choose the still image file type that best suits your needs, see Table 3-8. All values are descriptive and relative. Table 3-8: Still Image Features
Features File size Image quality Tamper proof System compatibility Advantages JPEG Interchange (compressed) Medium Medium Yes Windows Bitmap (uncompressed) Large High Yes
Common; DVN Series software Common; DVN Series software not required. not required. Common format and good Common format and identical image quality relative to the file visual quality to the original size. recording, as it is uncompressed.
3-120
24-10248-56 Rev. B
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Table 3-8: Still Image Features

Features Disadvantages JPEG Interchange (compressed) Slight loss of visual quality due to JPEG compression. Windows Bitmap (uncompressed) Large file size.
SiteManager
Video Clip File Formats

The DVN 5000 supports the following video clip file formats when saving and exporting video footage.
AVI Format
DVN native MPEG4 file format. Exporting video footage into this format requires less time than exporting into the other formats; however, this format requires the JCI DVN codecs when playing back video footage on a PC.
NOTE
When using the AVI format to export a video clip, the video will be exported using the recorded videos resolution and quality. The video cannot be upsampled or downsampled. For example, if the video was recorded at 2CIF, you cannot export the video at 4CIF.
MP4 Format
Apple MPEG4 format. Exporting video footage into this format requires more time than exporting into the AVI format. Requires Apples QuickTime media viewer when playing back video footage on a PC. Microsoft MPEG4 format. Exporting video footage into this format requires more time than exporting into the AVI format. This format does not require separate codecs for playback video exported to CD or DVD can be played back on any PC.
MS Mpeg4 V3 AVI Format
Saving a Still Image

Once you have located the still image of interest, you may save it in one of the following two formats: Compressed JPEG Interchange Format and Uncompressed Windows Bitmap Format. You can save an image by using the Save button on the camera video screen or by accessing the server full interface window and performing the save procedure in RemoteControl. For detailed information, see Server Setup and Full Interface on page 3-42. See also Camera Video Screens on page 3-102 and Working with the Camera Video Screen Toolbar on page 3-109. See Exporting Image and Video Clip Formats on page 3-120 for information about the file formats.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-121
SiteManager To save a still image:
1. Access the camera video screen (see page 3-103). You may also double-click the required camera icon on a 2D or a 3D map. 2. If supported by the DVN server, select the desired camera sector from the Sector drop-down list. 3. Locate the still image by using the Find function, Visual search function, and the Playback commands. See Working with the Camera Video Screen Toolbar on page 3-109. 4. Click Pause when you locate the still image you wish to save. 5. Click Save. The Save as dialog box appears.
6. Enter a file name and select the file type you wish to use. Save the file to the desired location. You can save still images either as JPEG or BMP files.
Saving a Video Clip

Once you have located the desired video clip, you may save it in one of the following formats described on page 3-121. You can save a video clip by using the Export tools in the camera video screen, accessing the server full interface window and performing the saving procedure in RemoteControl, or using the Export tools in the view screen, which also allows you to export multiple video clips from different cameras simultaneously.
NOTE
You cannot export video clips from cameras connected to a DVN 3000 Series server.
For more information, see:

Server Setup and Full Interface on page 3-42 Saving Video Clips on page 3-190
3-122
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
Working with the Camera Video Screen Toolbar on page 3-109 Camera Video Screens on page 3-102 The View Screen on page 3-168
To save a video clip: 1. Access the camera video screen (see page 3-103). You may also double-click the required camera icon on a 2D or a 3D map. 2. If supported by the DVN server, select the desired camera sector from the Sector drop-down list. 3. Click the Visual search button
.
The sector selected determines the type of panel that appears. See page 3-118. 4. Use the Plus and Minus buttons to adjust the increments on the Time scale of the camera visual search panel. 5. Locate the beginning of the video clip you wish to export by using the Find function or the Playback commands.
NOTE
You may also save a video clip by using only the Visual search function. Performing this procedure requires you to know the exact date and time of both the start and end points of the video clip you wish to save, since the camera video screen remains in live mode throughout the procedure.
If you are using only the Visual search function, click and drag the Index pointer to the start of the video clip you wish to save.
Index pointer The date and time of the image the Index pointer is on appears in the middle of the camera graphic find panel. For additional information about the Find function and the playback commands, see Finding a Still Image or Video Clip on page 3-116. 6. If you used the Find function, then when you click OK on the Find window, the image appears in the camera video screen, paused and ready for playback. If you used the playback commands, when you locate the beginning of the video clip you wish to save, click Pause. The desired image appears in the camera video screen.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-123
SiteManager
7. Right-click on the Index pointer and select Set start for exported video.
A green marker appears on the index, indicating the starting point of the video clip. 8. If you are using the Find function or the playback commands, click Play. The playback resumes, allowing you to find the end point of the video clip you wish to export. If you are using only the Visual search function, click and drag the Index pointer to the end of the video clip you wish to save. 9. If you are using the Find function or the playback commands, once you have arrived at the desired end point, click Pause.
3-124
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
The playback will be paused with the desired image displayed in the camera video screen.
10. Right-click on the Index pointer and select Set end for exported video. A red marker line appears on the index, indicating the video clip which has been selected for exporting. 11. To shorten or extend the video clip, simply position the pointer on the desired end point and repeat step 10. 12. Right-click on the Index pointer and select Export video. The Export selection window appears.
13. Modify the fields on this window according to the following information:
Title
Enter the preferred title of the video clip you will export.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-125
SiteManager
Start/End
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Start day and time and end day and time of the video clip. You may modify the day and time, as needed. User-definable destination where the video file will be saved. The SiteManager folder is always the default destination for any exported video clips. The exact location of the SiteManager folder will be determined by the selections made at the time of SiteManagers installation. To change the destination, click the Browse button (...) and select the new location on the Save as dialog box.
Include text insertion Input video format Compression Resolution
File
If the camera video includes text insertion information, you may include it with the exported video clip by selecting this check box. All input formats are enabled by default. Deselect any format you do not wish to use. Select the preferred compression. See Video Clip File Formats on page 3-121. From the drop-down list, select the video format (NTSC or PAL) you wish to use to export the video. NTSC is the standard typically used in North America. PAL is used in Europe, Asia, and many other parts of the world. Then use the slide bar to select the preferred image resolution. For better video performance and quality, we recommend selecting the Current Video Resolution check box to use the same format used to record the video. If the Multicodec AVI compression method is selected, the current video resolution will be used. For detailed information about image resolution, refer to the DVN 5000 Series or DVN 3000 Series Software User Manual.
Quality
If you selected the Microsoft MPEG-4 Video Codec V3 AVI option in the Compression drop-down list, and the Current Video Resolution check box is deselected, the Quality slide bar will be enabled. Move the slide bar to define the video quality as high, medium, or low. Splits the exported video clip into smaller files. When enabled, an authentication signature will be created for the exported video clip. For detailed information about authentication, refer to the DVN 5000 Series or DVN 3000 Series Software User Manual.
Fixed split size (MB) Authenticate exported video
14. Click OK.
3-126
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
The exporting process will begin. The log window will display the video export panel, allowing you to monitor the exporting process. During the exporting process, you may perform the following actions by right-clicking over the export information on the Video export panel:
Abort export Aborts the export process. Pause export Pauses the export process. Open container folder Opens the folder where the exported video will be saved.
NOTE
It may take a few moments before the Abort or Pause command is applied, since the system must complete exporting the current video clip segment before stopping.
Once the video clip has been exported, the following will be displayed in the video export panel.
NOTE
The period of time it takes to export a video clip varies, depending on the FPS rate, the selected length, compression, resolution, and quality of the video clip.
15. You can remove the completed export from the video export panel or view the exported video clip by right-clicking on the export information in the video export panel. To remove the export from the video panel, select Remove from list. To view the exported video clip, select Open exported file. To open the folder where the video footage has been saved, select Open container folder.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-127
SiteManager
Configuring the Window Recorder

SiteManager allows you to save video footage on a remote client on the fly from any camera being viewed live. The camera footage is recorded in the .avi format and is stored in a location specified by the administrator.
NOTE
The administrator is the only user who can access the Options window and configure the window recorder. Also, to use the window recorder, you must be granted the right to use the window recorder in your account configuration.
NOTE
We recommend using the Microsoft MPEG-4 video codec when using the window recorder.
See Working with the Camera Video Screen Toolbar on page 3-109 for additional information. To configure the window recorder: 1. From the menu bar, select Tools>Options. The Options window (General tab) appears. 2. Select the Window recorder tab. 3. Select the Window recorder is enabled check box.
4. Click the Path fields Browse button (...). 5. On the Browse for Folder dialog box, locate the directory in which you wish to store the video footage from the active camera video screens.
3-128
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
6. Click OK. The selected path appears on the Options window. 7. From the Video codec drop-down list, select the preferred video compression codec you wish to be applied to the window camera footage. Johnson Controls recommends one of the MPEG 4 video codecs. 8. Use the Frame rate slide bar to select the desired frame rate (FPS) for the window camera footage.
NOTE
To return the Window recorder fields to their default settings at any time, click the Clear button.
9. Click OK or Apply. The window recorder is now enabled, and users who have been granted the right to use the window recorder at the time of their user account configuration can save video footage from a camera video screen on the fly.
Saving Video Footage on the Fly

SiteManager allows you to save video footage and audio at a press of a button while viewing live video footage. When you select the Record button on the camera video screen, video footage and audio are saved until you stop recording. This provides you with the advantage of being able to save video footage while still monitoring the live event.
NOTE
To use the Record button and save video footage and audio while still viewing live footage, you must be granted the right to use the window recorder in your user account configuration.
Before starting the following procedure, verify that you have configured the window recorder. See Configuring the Window Recorder on page 3-128 for detailed information.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-129
SiteManager
To save video footage and audio on the fly: 1. Access the camera video screen whose video footage you wish to save (see page 3-103). You may also double-click the required camera icon on a 2D or a 3D map. 2. While viewing in live mode, you can click the Record button at any time.
The video footage you are currently viewing live will be saved in the location defined by the administrator in the recorder settings configuration. Also, the playback commands are disabled while the Record button is active. 3. To stop recording, click the Record button again.
GROUPS
With SiteManager, you can group cameras, auxiliaries, and alarms connected to DVN 5000 and DVN 3000 Series servers, and DVN 100-NET encoders, as well as any maps and views included in the SiteManager configuration, in order to manage the numerous resources with greater ease and efficiency.
NOTE
3D maps cannot be part of a group.
To gain the full benefit from SiteManager, you can create camera, auxiliary, alarm, map and view groups to fit your particular monitoring requirements. This is particularly useful in a multi-server environment where there may be hundreds of cameras and sensors linked to the network. SiteManager allows you to quickly select particular devices through the creation of appropriate camera, auxiliary, alarm, map and view hierarchies. This saves considerable navigation and searching time.
Group Menu Options

To manage groups, the functions described in this section are available by performing one of the following actions:

Right-click on the group in the hierarchy window. Click a group in the hierarchy window and select Group from the menu bar.
NOTE
You will have to click the Groups tab and then click within the hierarchy window to activate the Group functions in the menu bar.
3-130
24-10248-56 Rev. B

New group Delete group Edit group Show
SiteManager
Allows you to create a new group. Allows you to delete a group. Allows you to change group names. Allows you to display all cameras, maps, and views in the selected group on the virtual video desktop. Allows you to remove all cameras, maps and views in the selected group from the virtual video desktop. Connects each resource within the selected group to the appropriate server. Disconnects each resource within the selected group from its corresponding server. Allows you to add a new camera, auxiliary, alarm, map, or view to the group. Automatically connects each resource within the selected group to the appropriate server. The same occurs upon all subsequent logins. Automatically displays all the connected camera resources within the selected group in their individual camera video screens. The same occurs upon all subsequent logins.
Hide
Connect
Disconnect
Add resource
Autoconnect
Autodisplay
Creating a New Group

You may custom build your groups to suit your unique monitoring role. You can create individual camera, auxiliary, alarm, map, and view groups or combine all five in one group. This function allows you to monitor all devices involved in monitoring a particular sector, regardless of the server to which they are connected. For example, you may create a Building Entrance group that includes all cameras, auxiliaries, alarms, maps, and views involved in monitoring a particular building entrance. Now, instead of searching through all the server resources trying to locate the cameras, auxiliaries, alarms, maps, and views for that particular building entrance, you can access them all at a click of a mouse. To create or delete a group, you must be granted the right to create and delete resources based upon your user account configuration. To create a new group: 1. Click the Groups tab. To select the New group option, perform one of the following actions: Right-click the hierarchy window and click New group. Click the New group icon in the toolbar. Select Group>New group from the menu bar.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-131
SiteManager The Group window appears.
The same Group window is also displayed when Edit group is selected instead of New group. The only editing tool is changing group names. 2. Type in the group name. Click OK. The new group appears in the hierarchy window. 3. Repeat the previous steps for each new group. To delete a group: 1. Click the Groups tab. All the groups that have been created appear in the hierarchy window. 2. Right-click on a group in the hierarchy window and click Delete group, or click the group in the hierarchy window and select Group>Delete group from the menu bar. 3. When the confirmation box is displayed click Yes and the group will be deleted from the configuration.
Adding Group Resources

To create a group hierarchy, you must add all the resources you wish to have accessible in a particular group. You may include any one or all of the following group resources:

Cameras Auxiliaries Alarms Maps Views
Audio channels are not available as group resources. You may listen to live audio transmission in the camera video screen or view screen. You may also talk back to the server by enabling the Talk channel in the hierarchy window and speaking into the microphone connected to the client. See Working with Server Resources on page 3-46 and Working with the Camera Video Screen Toolbar on page 3-109. To add group resources, you must be granted the right to create resources based upon your user account configuration.
3-132
24-10248-56 Rev. B
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual To add group resources:
SiteManager
1. Click the Groups tab. All the groups that have been created appear in the hierarchy window.
2. Right-click on a group in the hierarchy window, or click the group in the hierarchy window and select Group from the menu bar. The group menu appears.
3. Click Add resource. The Resource window appears.
You may also access the Resource window by clicking one of the following toolbar buttons: Add camera, Add aux or Add alarm. 4. Select the resource (type), server, and name of the resource to be added to the group. 5. Click OK. The resource is added to the group and appears in the hierarchy window. 6. Repeat the same steps until you have completed creating your group.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-133
SiteManager
Working with Group Resources

Working with group resources is very similar to working with server resources. However, one group may contain resources from many different servers, allowing you easy and efficient management of the surveillance resources. SiteManager allows you to edit your resource names, which is practical and beneficial. Instead of trying to recall what area Camera 1 from a particular server is monitoring, you may name it North Gate, thus allowing the camera name to be self-explanatory. You must be granted the right to use, edit, and delete resources based upon your user account configuration to access all the functions.
Group Resource Menu Options

The functions available for managing group resources are:
Show/Hide
Allows you to display (or remove) cameras, maps and views included in the groups hierarchy on (or from) the virtual video desktop. Allows you to activate or deactivate auxiliaries and alarms. A toggle button that allows you to connect a resource to its server or disconnect a resource from its server. Connecting one resource automatically connects all the resources attached to the same server. Similarly, disconnecting one resource automatically disconnects all the resources attached to the same server. Displays the Resource properties window, allowing you to change the name and unique I.D.s of cameras, auxiliaries, alarms, maps, and views. Allows you to activate the priority boost mode and increase a cameras FPS rate on demand. Only applies for cameras which are connected to a DVN 5000 multiplexed server. Refer to DVN 5000 Series Installation and Configuration Manual for additional information about the priority boost mode.
Turn on/Turn off Connect / Disconnect
Edit resource
Set priority
Send to monitor
Allows you to display the selected camera on the VGA monitor or a network (DVN 100-NET) monitor. Also allows you to display the selected map or view on the VGA monitor. You can only send a camera, map, or view to a VGA monitor when the VGA monitor is not in the sequence resource mode.
Delete resource
Allows you to delete a resource from a group.
3-134
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
Resource Status
The hierarchy window resource icons display changes according to whether the resource is connected (active) or disconnected (inactive). See Table 3-9 for details. Table 3-9: Resource Icons
Resource Camera Fixed Camera Dome Aux Alarm Map View N/A N/A N/A N/A Connected or Active Disconnected or Inactive Disconnected at the Server
To activate and work with a resource: 1. Display the available resources by clicking the Plus sign (+) in front of the group or by double-clicking on the group in the hierarchy window. The available resources are displayed in the hierarchy window.
2. Repeat until you have displayed all the group resources required. You may display all the resources simultaneously in the hierarchy window. 3. Click the Plus sign (+) in front of a resource type or double-click the resource type you would like to work with. All the resources of the selected type within the group appear in the hierarchy window.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-135
SiteManager
As one group may consist of resources from multiple servers, some resources may be connected while the others may be disconnected simultaneously. 4. Repeat until you have displayed all the resource types required. You may display all the resource types simultaneously in the hierarchy window. 5. To work with a resource, right-click the resource icon, or click the resource in the hierarchy window and select Resource from the menu bar. The corresponding resource menu appears. 6. Select and click the required option. Once you select Show and Turn on, the next time you access the menu, it will display Hide and Turn off respectively. Once you select Connect for cameras, auxiliaries or alarms, the next time you access the menu, it will display Disconnect. See the following definitions:
Show (Camera)
The selected camera appears in its individual camera video screen.
Use the available camera video screen functions, as required. See Working with the Camera Video Screen Toolbar on page 3-109 for detailed information.
3-136
24-10248-56 Rev. B

Show (Map)
SiteManager
The selected map appears in its 2D map screen.
Use the available 2D map screen functions, as required. See Working with 2D Maps on page 3-150 for detailed information.
Show (View)
The selected view appears in its view screen.
Use the available view screen functions, as required. See Working with the View Screen Options on page 3-172 for detailed information.
Hide (Camera) Hide (Map)
The selected cameras video screen will no longer be displayed. The selected 2D map screen will no longer be displayed.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-137
SiteManager
Hide (View) Connect (Camera) Connect (Map) Connect (View) Disconnect (Camera) Disconnect (Map) Disconnect (View) Edit resource (Camera)
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual The selected view screen will no longer be displayed. A connection will be established with the cameras server. A connection will be established with all servers whose resources are part of the map. A connection will be established with all servers whose cameras are part of the view. SiteManager will disconnect from the cameras server.
SiteManager will disconnect from all servers whose resources are part of the map. SiteManager will disconnect from all servers whose cameras are part of the view. The Resource properties dialog box appears.
Enter the preferred camera name in the Name field and click OK.
Edit map
The Map dialog box appears.
Edit the map settings, as required. See Creating a New Map on page 3-146 for detailed information. Once you have edited the map, click OK.
3-138
24-10248-56 Rev. B

Edit view
SiteManager
The View dialog box appears.
Enter the preferred view name in the Name field and click OK.
Set priority for a camera
The priority boost will be activated for the selected camera and will remain active until you stop the priority boost mode by clicking Set priority again. This feature allows you to increase a cameras FPS rate on demand. Refer to the DVN 5000 Series Installation and Configuration Manual for additional information about the priority boost.
Send to monitor (Camera)
The Monitor menu appears. Select the monitor on which you wish to display the selected camera. You must unblank a VGA monitor before camera video can be displayed on it.
Send to monitor (Map or View)
The Monitor menu appears. Select the VGA monitor on which you wish to display the selected map or view. The selected map or view will be added to the VGA monitor hierarchy but will not be displayed on the VGA monitor until you unblank the VGA monitor. 2D maps and views can only be displayed on VGA monitors connected to the SiteManager client.
NOTE
You can only send a camera, map or view to a VGA monitor when the monitor is not in the sequence resource mode.
Turn on Turn off Connect
The selected aux or alarm will be activated. The selected aux or alarm will be deactivated. A connection will be established with the alarms or auxs server. The SiteManager client will disconnect from the alarms or auxs server.
Disconnect
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-139
SiteManager
Edit resource (Alarm)
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual The Resource properties dialog box appears.
Enter the preferred alarm name in the Name field and click OK.
Edit resource (Aux)
The Resource properties dialog box appears.
Enter the preferred aux name in the Name field and click OK.
Delete resource
The Confirmation dialog box appears. Click Yes. The selected item will be removed from the group.
If a resource included in the selected group is from a server that requires the user to enter his/her user name and password to connect to the server, then the Connecting to server window appears. You must enter your DVN server or DVN 100-NET encoder user name and password to connect the resource. If a group contains resources from multiple servers, a Connecting to server window appears for each server that requires the user to enter his/her user name and password to establish a connection. For detailed information, see Creating or Importing a New Server on page 3-20 and Connecting to the Servers on page 3-38. 7. Use the options, as required. If a resource is not currently connected, selecting the Show or Turn on functions automatically connects the client to the resource server, provided that the server to which the selected resource is attached does not require the user to enter his/her user name and password to establish a connection. As audio channels are not available as group resources, you are unable to add, delete, or edit them. You may only listen to live audio transmission by individually enabling the audio channel in the corresponding camera video screen toolbar. Adjust the volume on your speakers, if required.
3-140
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
MAPS
Maps allow you to easily navigate through a surveillance site and all of its resources. This section provides information about how to create and work with 2D and 3D maps by importing surveillance site images and then populating them with the available camera, auxiliary, alarm, group, map, and view resources. A way to create a particular group of resources is to superimpose them on a map. A map is simply a 2 or 3 dimensional graphical depiction of a surveillance site. Resources from multiple servers can be superimposed over the map, as required. Using maps allows you to have a visual representation of each surveillance area and access the resources by simply clicking on the respective icon on the map. You must be granted the right to create, use, edit, and delete resources based upon your user account configuration to access all the functions.
Map Menu Options

To manage maps, the functions described in this section are available by performing one of the following actions:

Right-click on the Map icon in the hierarchy window. Right-click on the Map icon in a map screen. Right-click on the map screen. Click a map in the hierarchy window and select Map from the menu bar.
NOTE
You have to click the Maps tab and then click within the hierarchy window to activate the Map functions in the menu bar.
New map
Allows you to create/import a new 2D map. Imported 2D maps may be in any one of the following formats: .jpg, .jpeg, .png, .bmp, .ico, .wmf, .emf, and .tga. Allows you to create/import a new 3D map. Imported 3D maps may be in any one of the following formats: .3ds, .prj, .bsp, .gts, .lwo, .md2, .md3, .ms3d, .nmf, .obj, .objf, .oct, .ply, .smd, .stl and .tin. Allows you to delete a map. Accesses the Map window, which allows you to import a new map and/or change the existing map name. A toggle button that allows you to display (or remove) map screens on (or from) the virtual video desktop.
New 3D map
Delete map Edit map
Show/Hide
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-141
SiteManager
Connect
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Allows you to connect all the resources on a particular map to their appropriate servers. Allows you to disconnect all the resources on a particular map from their corresponding server. Opens the Resource window, allowing you to add a new camera, auxiliary, alarm, group, map, or view to the map hierarchy. Automatically connects each resource on the selected map to the appropriate server. The same occurs upon all subsequent logins. Automatically displays all the connected camera resources on the selected map in their individual camera video screens. The same occurs upon all subsequent logins. Only applies for 2D maps. Allows you to display the selected 2D map on the SiteManager clients VGA monitor. You can only send a map to a VGA monitor when the monitor is not in the sequence resource mode.
Disconnect
Add resource
Autoconnect
Autodisplay
Send to monitor
The map menu options are the same as the group menu options, except that editing a map allows you not only to change the map name but also import a new image, if required. See Adding Map Resources on page 3-158 for additional information. While 2D and 3D maps have identical menu options, additional functions are present when working with a 3D map and its resources due to the 3-dimensional environment. See Working with 3D Maps on page 3-151 for detailed information.
The 2D Map Screen

Each 2D map screen displays an imported .jpg, .jpeg, .png, .bmp, .ico, .wmf, .emf, or .tga image file. 2D map screens are shown on the virtual video desktop and are completely independent from one another. You may create each 2D map differently, with its own unique set of resources. There is no limit to the number of 2D map screens that can be displayed simultaneously on the virtual video desktop. See the following figure. The 2D Map screen can be split into the following:

Viewing area 2D toolbar
3-142
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
2D Toolbar
Viewing area
The 2D Map screens Viewing Area displays the map image and all of the map resources. The Resource icons allow you to perform resource specific tasks.
Buttons and Features (2D Map Toolbar)

This section provides a brief description of each feature on the 2D map toolbar. You must be granted the right to create and use resources based upon your user account configuration to access all the functions.
Add camera Add aux Add alarm Add view New 2D map Zoom level Full screen Zoom in Zoom out 1:1 Autozoom
Add camera
Opens the Resource window, allowing you to add a camera to the map. Opens the Resource window, allowing you to add an aux to the map. Opens the Resource window, allowing you to add an alarm to the map. Opens the Resource window, allowing you to add a view to the map. A view is a unique display of multiple cameras, which
Add aux
Add alarm
Add view
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-143
SiteManager
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual may be custom configured. See Views on page 3-165 for further information.
New 2D map
Allows you to create a new 2D map that will be superimposed over the original map. Allows you to select the zoom level for the displayed 2D map. Allows you to display the map across the entire monitor screen. Clicking the button again returns the SiteManager screen to its normal view. Allows you to zoom in by 10% each time you click the button. Allows you to zoom out by 10% each time you click the button. Allows you to display the 2D map in the original size/resolution. Automatically resizes the map, as needed, so that the entire map can be viewed in the current map screen.
Zoom level Full screen
Zoom in Zoom out 1:1
Autozoom
See Adding Map Resources on page 3-158 for information about adding cameras, auxiliaries, alarms, groups, views, and maps.
The 3D Map Screen

The 3D map serves the same purpose as the 2D map with some additional functions. Each 3D map screen displays an imported image file. 3D map screens are shown on the virtual video desktop and are completely independent from one another. You may create each 3D map differently, with its own unique set of resources. There is no limit to the number of 3D map screens that can be displayed simultaneously on the virtual video desktop. In addition, as it is a 3-dimensional object, you may view the map from different angles and aspects, zoom in and out, view the object framework, and choose the background color. The following file formats may be imported as a 3D map: .3ds .prj .bsp .gts .lwo .md2 .md3 .ms3d .nmf .obj .objf .oct .ply .smd .stl .tin
See the following figure. The 3D Map screen can be categorized into the Viewing area, 3D toolbar, and Background.
3-144
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
3D Toolbar
Background
Viewing Area
The 3D Maps Viewing Area displays the map image and all of the map resources. The Resource icons allow you to perform resource specific tasks. The Background is the area of the 3D map that does not contain the image and whose color can be changed.
Buttons and Features (3D Map Toolbar)

This section provides a brief description of each feature on the 3D map toolbar. You must be granted the right to create and use resources based upon your user account configuration to access all the functions.
Reset view Plan View Zoom in Navigation panel Zoom Smooth out shading Flat shading Hidden lines Wireframe Background color
Reset view Plan view Zoom in
Provides a front view of the object. Provides a birds eye view of the 3D image. Allows you to zoom in at a speed predefined in the navigation panel. Allows you to zoom out at a speed predefined in the navigation panel.
Zoom out
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-145
SiteManager
Navigation panel
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Opens the Navigation panel, which allows you to select the speed with which you may zoom in and/or out when using the zoom tool. Complex shading. When enabled, each one of the 3D objects polygons will be filled in using a color gradient. Simple shading. When enabled, each one of the 3D objects polygons will be filled in with a single color. Provides the 3D objects main frame lines. Provides the 3D objects graphic skeleton. Opens the Color window, which allows you to select the background color.
Smooth shading
Flat shading
Hidden lines Wireframe Background color
In addition to the zoom in and out tools (which may also be achieved by using the mouse wheel), you are able to view the map from any angle or aspect you require. See Working with 3D Maps on page 3-151 for detailed information. See Adding Map Resources on page 3-158 for information about adding cameras, auxiliaries, alarms, groups, views, and maps.
Creating a New Map

In order to create a 2D or a 3D map, the image that will be displayed in the map screen must be imported. The first map created always serves as a base on which you may overlay other maps. For example, the first map created might be the birds eye view of an entire airport. The subsequent maps could be individual levels within the airport displayed over the corresponding geographical area on the original map. To create or delete a map, you must be granted the right to create and delete resources based upon your user account configuration. For additional information about map screens, see the following:

The 2D Map Screen on page 3-142 The 3D Map Screen on page 3-144 Working with 3D Maps on page 3-151 Map Resources on page 3-155 Configuring the Virtual Video Desktop on page 3-242
To create a 2D map: 1. Click the Maps tab. To select the New map option, perform one of the following actions: Right-click the hierarchy window and click New map. Click the New map icon in the toolbar.
3-146
24-10248-56 Rev. B
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Select Map>New map from the menu bar.
SiteManager
The Map window appears.
2. Enter the preferred map name in the Name field. 3. Click the Browse button next to the Image field. The Open dialog box appears.
4. Select the required drive and directory. Click the image you would like to import. Click Open. The Map window reappears with the selected file name displayed in the image slot.
5. Click OK. The selected image appears in the map screen. The map will also be listed in the hierarchy window.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-147
SiteManager
6. Repeat the previous steps for each new map. To create a 3D map: 1. Click the Maps tab. To select the New 3D map option, perform one of the following actions: Right-click the hierarchy window and click New 3D map. Click the New 3D map icon in the toolbar. Select Map>New 3D map from the menu bar.
The Map window appears.
2. Enter the preferred map name in the Name field. 3. Click the Browse button. The Open dialog box appears.
3-148
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
4. Select the required drive and directory. Click the image you would like to import. Click Open. The Map window reappears with the selected file name displayed in the image slot.
5. Click OK. The selected image appears in the map screen. The map will also be listed in the hierarchy window.
6. Repeat the previous steps for each new map. To delete a map: 1. Click the Maps tab. The created maps appear in the hierarchy window.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-149
SiteManager
2. Right-click a map in the hierarchy window, or click a map in the hierarchy window and select Map from the menu bar. The map menu appears.
3. Click Delete map. When the Confirmation box appears, click Yes and the map will be deleted from the configuration.
Working with 2D Maps

Changing the 2D map screen size, resolution, and display is simple. To work with a 2D map screens resources, see Working with Map Resources on page 3-160. For additional information about map screens, see:

The 2D Map Screen on page 3-142 Map Resources on page 3-155 Configuring the Virtual Video Desktop on page 3-242
To work with a 2D map: 1. Click the Maps tab. 2. Display a map by performing one of the following steps: Double-click on the appropriate Map icon in the hierarchy window. Click and drag the Map icon from the hierarchy window to the virtual video desktop. Right-click on the Map and select Show in the menu.
3-150
24-10248-56 Rev. B
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual The 2D Map screen appears.
SiteManager
3. You may also access a map by double-clicking on a map icon that has been used as a resource on a different map. For information on using the 2D Map toolbar, see The 2D Map Screen on page 3-142.
Working with 3D Maps

While the basic functions are maintained for both 2D and 3D maps, working in a 3-dimensional environment necessarily creates the need for additional features. A 3D map may be viewed from numerous positions and angles. In addition, you may choose to work with the maps framework and skeleton or adjust the maps shading and background. For additional information about map screens, see:

The 2D Map Screen on page 3-142 The 3D Map Screen on page 3-144 Map Resources on page 3-155 Configuring the Virtual Video Desktop on page 3-242
To work with a 3D map: 1. Click the Maps tab. All the maps available appear in the hierarchy window. 2. To display the map, perform one of the following actions: Double-click the appropriate Map icon in the hierarchy window. Click and drag the Map icon from the hierarchy window to the virtual video desktop. Right-click on the Map and select Show in the menu.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-151
SiteManager The 3D map screen appears.
You may also access a map by double-clicking on a map icon that has been used as a resource on a different map. 3. Select one of the following options: The front view of the map appears.
The plan view appears.
You will zoom in at an increment specified in the navigation panel. You may also zoom in by using the mouse wheel. You will zoom out at an increment specified in the navigation panel. You may also zoom out by using the mouse wheel.
3-152
24-10248-56 Rev. B
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual The navigation panel appears.
SiteManager
To adjust the speed (zoom and positioning increment), click and drag the Speed slide bar. Use the arrows individually or in combination with the keyboard <Ctrl> or <Shift> keys for additional rotation and shifting to maneuver the map. You may also use the keyboard arrow keys individually or in combination with the <Ctrl> or <Shift> keys for shifting and rotations or the click and drag technique with a mouse to maneuver the map. To remove the navigation panel, click the Navigation button again. The shading will be smooth.
The shading will be flat.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-153
SiteManager
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual The maps main structural lines will be displayed.
The maps framework will be displayed.
The Color window appears.
Use the color options, as required. Once you have achieved the desired background, click OK. The map appears with the selected background color. 4. See The 3D Map Screen on page 3-144 for additional information about the 3D map buttons.
3-154
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
Map Resources
Resources that can be included as part of a map include:
1.
Cameras Auxiliaries Alarms Audio channels1 Talk channels1
Groups 2D maps1 Views 3D maps Monitors1
Can only be added to 2D maps.
The number of resources that can be added to any one map is only limited by the number of resources connected to the servers (cameras, alarms, auxes, audio and talk channels), the number of created resources (groups, 2D and 3D maps, and views) and the number of available VGA and network monitors. You must be granted the right to use, edit and delete resources to access all the functions. Connecting one resource automatically connects all the resources attached to the same server. Similarly, disconnecting one resource automatically disconnects all the resources attached to the same server.
2D Map Resource Menu Options

This section describes the functions available for managing 2D resource options.
Show/Hide
A toggle button that allows you to display (or remove) camera video screens, groups, views, and maps on (or from) the virtual video desktop. Not available on 2D maps for alarms, auxes, audio channels, talk channels, and monitors.
Turn on/Turn off
Allows you to activate or deactivate auxiliaries and alarms. Only applies to alarms and auxes. Allows you to connect (or disconnect) a resource to (or from) its server. Allows you to change certain resource properties. Not available on 2D maps for talk channels. Allows you to activate the priority boost mode and increase a cameras FPS rate on demand. Only applies for cameras which are connected to a DVN 5000 multiplexed server. Refer to the DVN 5000 Series Installation and Configuration Manual for additional information.
Connect / Disconnect Edit resource
Set priority
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-155
SiteManager
Rotate
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Displays the Rotation menu where you may choose the orientation of the camera icons. Displays the Size menu, allowing you to select the size of the map icon. Allows you to display a selected camera on VGA or network monitors. Also allows you to display 2D maps and views on VGA monitors. Not available on 2D maps for alarms, auxes, audio channels, talk channels, groups, 3D maps, and monitors.
Size
Send to monitor
Delete resource
Allows you to delete a resource from a map.
3D Map Resource Menu Options

This section describes the functions available for managing 3D map resource options. To access the resource menu options, right-click on the icon on the 3D map screen.
Show/Hide
Allows you to display (or remove) camera video screens and views on (or from) the virtual video desktop. Only applies to cameras and views. Allows you to activate/deactivate auxiliaries and alarms. Allows you to change certain resource properties. Allows you to delete a resource from a 3D map. Allows you to connect (or disconnect) a resource to (or from) its server. Allows you to use the resource as the point from which the entire map is viewed. Allows you to automatically move the selected resource to the exact point or position from which the map is being viewed. Allows you to fix the resources position. The function must be disabled in order to reposition the resource.
Turn on/Turn off Edit resource Delete resource Connect / Disconnect
Set as view point
Move to current view point Position locked
3-156
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
Map Hierarchy Resource Status and 2D Map Resource Icon Status

The hierarchy window resource icons display changes according to whether the resource is connected (active) or disconnected (inactive). See Table 3-10 for details. Table 3-10: 2D Map Resource Icons
Resource Camera Fixed Camera Dome Aux Alarm Audio Talk N/A N/A N/A N/A Connected or Active Disconnected or Inactive Disconnected at the Server
Connected or Disconnected or Active or Inactive Group 2D Map View 3D Map Monitor
3D Map Resource Status

The resource icons displayed on a 3D map change according to whether the resource is disconnected or connected and either active or inactive. See Table 3-11 for details.
NOTE
Groups and maps are only represented in the hierarchy window, as they do not have resource icons on a 3D map screen.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-157
SiteManager
Table 3-11: 3D Map Resource Icons

Resource Aux Connected or Disconnected Camera Alarm View Selected Inactive Active Selected
Adding Map Resources

Adding map resources is similar to adding group resources. You may add resources from all the available servers. 2D and 3D maps use the same resources, and a resource may be used simultaneously on a 2D and a 3D map. To add map resources, you must be granted the right to create resources based upon your user account configuration. A map itself can also become a resource. You may also add views as map resources. See Views as Map Resources on page 3-197 for details. To add map resources 1. Click the Maps tab. The created maps will be displayed in the hierarchy window.
2. Right-click a map in the hierarchy window or click a map in the hierarchy window and select Map from the menu bar.
3-158
24-10248-56 Rev. B
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual The map menu will be displayed (2D map menu shown).
SiteManager
3. Click Show. The map screen appears. You may also simply double-click the map in the hierarchy window to display the selected map screen. 4. To add a resource, right-click the viewing area on the map screen. Click Add resource, or in the 2D map toolbar click Add camera, Add aux, Add alarm or Add view. The resource window appears.
If you are working with a 3D map, the angle and level of zoom of the map object displayed determines the potential positions of the resource. We suggest that you position the map as required before adding the resource(s). 5. Use the Resource drop-down list to select the resource type. Audio channels, talk channels, groups, and monitors can only be added to 2D maps. 6. If applicable, use the Server drop-down list to select the server whose resource you wish to add. 7. Use the bottom drop-down list to select the resource you wish to add to the map. 8. Click OK. The specified resource has now been added to the map and will be displayed in the hierarchy window. If you added a resource to a 2D map, then the corresponding resource icon appears in the top left-hand corner of the map screen. If you added a resource to a 3D map, the corresponding resource icon appears in the center of the map screen. If you added a group, the resource icon appears in the hierarchy window, but not on the 3D map screen. It may be necessary to zoom out slightly before you will notice
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-159
SiteManager
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual the resource icon, due to the 3-dimensional environment. See Working with 3D Maps on page 3-151.
9. Position the icon on the map, as required. See Working with Map Resources on page 3-160 for information on how to organize the resource icons on a map. 10. Repeat the previous steps until you have added all the resources you require on the map. 11. Repeat the procedure for each map you wish to add resources to.
Working with Map Resources

While working with map resources is similar to working with server and group resources, there are some additional functions. The resources can be physically positioned on a map giving you visual representation of all the cameras, auxiliaries, and alarms involved in monitoring a specific area. Once you have completed configuring a map, you can locate and work with the required resources by simply clicking on the icons within the map screen. You must be granted the right to create, use, edit, and delete resources based upon your user account configuration to access all the functions available for work with map resources. Groups and maps are only represented in the hierarchy window, as they do not have resource icons on a 3D map screen. See Views as Map Resources on page 3-197 for information on how to work with a view as a resource. To position and work with map resources: 1. Click the Maps tab. Right-click a map in the hierarchy window, or click the map in the hierarchy window and select Map from the menu bar. The map menu appears. 2. Click Show. The map screen appears. 3. Once you have added a map resource, position the resource icon, as required. If it is a 2D map, simply click and drag the resource icon from the top left-hand corner of the map screen to the desired position. You may also select the angle of the camera icon by selecting the desired rotation in the camera resource menu. It is easier to see, and thus position, the resource icons on the map screen if they are connected. If it is a 3D map, zoom out slightly so that you can view the entire resource icon in the center of the map screen. Click and drag it to the desired position. Bear in mind that the resource icon will change size depending on changes in depth.
Repeat the steps until you have added and arranged all the resources for the selected map.
3-160
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
4. Right-click the resource icon on the map screen, or select and right-click the resource in the hierarchy window, or click the resource in the hierarchy window and select Resource from the menu bar. 5. Select the desired resource type. The corresponding resource menu appears. See Map Menu Options on page 3-141 and View Menu Options on page 3-166 for additional information. 6. Select the required option and click on it. Once you select Show, Turn on, or Connect, the next time you access the menu it will display Hide, Turn off or Disconnect respectively. If a resource included in a selected map is from a server that requires the user to enter his/her user name and password to connect to the server, then the Server connection window appears. You must enter your DVN 5000, DVN 3000, or DVN 100-NET user name and password to connect the resource. If a resource (such as a view) contains resources from multiple servers, a Server connection window will be displayed for each server that requires the user to enter his/her user name and password to establish a connection. See the following definitions:
Show
This function is available with the following options: Camera Group 2D or 3D map View (2D map only)
The selected camera video screen, group items, 2D map, 3D map, or view appears. The following example is a camera video screen.
For cameras, use the available camera video screen functions, as required. See Working with the Camera Video Screen Toolbar on page 3-109 for detailed information.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-161
SiteManager
Hide
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual This function is available with the following options: Camera Group 2D or 3D map View (2D map only)
The selected camera video screen, group items, 2D map, 3D map, or view will no longer be displayed.
Connect
This function is available with the following options: Camera Alarm or auxiliary Audio or talk channel Group 2D or 3D map View (2D map only)
A connection will be established with the server associated with the selected option.
Disconnect
This function is available with the following options: Camera Alarm or auxiliary Audio or talk channel Group 2D or 3D map View (2D map only)
The SiteManager client will disconnect from the server associated with the selected option.
Edit resource
This function is available with the following options: Camera Alarm or auxiliary Group 3D map View
If editing a resource for a 3D map, edit the 2D or 3D map settings, as required, and click OK.
3-162
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
For all other options, the Resource properties dialog box appears. The following example is the Resource properties dialog box for a camera.
Edit map (2D Map)
This function is available with the map option. The 2D map or the 3D map dialog box appears. Edit the settings, as needed, and click OK.
Edit view (2D Map)
This function is available with the view option. The View dialog box appears. Enter the preferred view name in the Name field and click OK.
Set priority (2D Map Only)
This function is available with the camera option. The priority boost will be activated for the selected camera. The priority boost will remain active until you stop the priority boost mode by clicking Set priority again. This feature allows you to increase a cameras FPS rate on demand. Refer to DVN 5000 Series Software Installation and Configuration Manual for additional information about the priority boost.
Rotate (2D Map Only)
This function is available with the camera option. The Rotation menu appears.
Click on the preferred orientation.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-163
SiteManager
Size (2D Map Only)
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual This function is available with the following options: Camera Alarm or auxiliary Audio or talk channel Group 2D or 3D map View Monitor
The Size menu appears.
Select the preferred icon size. If you select Custom, the Custom size window appears. Enter the preferred size and click OK.
Send to monitor (2D Map Only)
This function is available with the following options: Camera 2D map View
The Monitor menu appears. Select the monitor on which you wish to display the selected camera, 2D map, or view. If you selected to display the camera, 2D map, or view on a VGA monitor, you must unblank the monitor to see the selected image. You can only send a camera image, 2D map, or view to a VGA monitor when the monitor is not in the sequence resource mode.
Delete resource
This function is available with the following options: Camera Alarm or auxiliary Audio or talk channel Group 2D or 3D map View Monitor
3-164
24-10248-56 Rev. B
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual The Confirmation dialog box appears.
SiteManager
Click Yes. The selected resource will be removed from the map.
Turn on
This function is available with the alarm or auxiliary option The selected alarm or auxiliary will be activated.
Turn off
This function is available with the alarm or auxiliary option The selected alarm or auxiliary will be deactivated.
7. If a resource is not currently connected, selecting the Show or Turn on functions will automatically connect the client to the resource server, provided that the server to which the selected resource is attached does not require the user to enter his/her user name and password to establish a connection. 8. You can simply double-click on the resource icon to display a camera, view, group, or map, turn on an aux, or turn on audio or talk channels.
VIEWS
Views are used to do the following:
Display up to 64 cameras and/or maps on a single screen (client workstation system resources must be able to support this configuration) Perform synchronized multiple camera playback (DVN 5000 servers only) Simultaneously export multiple video clips and audio
SiteManager allows you to display camera or map resources from multiple servers on a custom made view screen, enabling you to display map images or play back footage from all the cameras included on the screen using the Synchronized Multiple Camera Playback feature. This feature provides you with an enormous advantage of playing back time-synchronized recorded video footage and lip synchronized audio from all cameras included in a particular view simultaneously. Synchronized multiple camera playback enables you to recreate an entire event or track a person/object with ease and precision. There may be as many as 64 cameras and/or maps displayed simultaneously in a view screen at any one time. You may custom build numerous view screens with specific layouts (camera and map arrangements) and thus create particular camera and map groupings. For example,
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-165
SiteManager
you may wish to watch all cameras monitoring one airport terminal or maybe you wish to simultaneously watch one camera from every terminal. By grouping cameras in this manner, you do not need to waste time searching for a few crucial cameras among hundreds of others. Views can be used as resources on maps. As a map resource, a view provides quick access to live viewing of multiple cameras on the map, thus eliminating the need to access each camera resource individually. Cameras and maps are the only resources that may be used in a view. In addition, views allow you to export multiple video clips from different cameras simultaneously. Any or all of the cameras included in a view screen can be selected and the video footage of interest from the same camera sector, date, and time can be exported simultaneously.
NOTE
The View screens playback commands, visual search, and Find functions are not functional for cameras connected to DVN 3000 Series servers or DVN 100-NET encoders.
Playback sector selection and find functions are included in views to optimize synchronized multiple camera playback. For detailed information, see:

Synchronized Multiple Camera Playback on page 3-184 Selecting a Camera Sector for Playback on page 3-113 Finding a Still Image or Video Clip on page 3-116
In addition, you may control PTZ camera domes. For additional information on views as map resources, see:

Adding Map Resources on page 3-158 Working with Map Resources on page 3-160 Views as Map Resources on page 3-197
View Menu Options

To manage views, the functions described in this section are available by performing one of the following actions:

Right-click on the View icon in the hierarchy window. Right-click on the view screen. Click a view in the hierarchy window and select View from the menu bar.
3-166
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
NOTE
You have to click the Views tab and then click within the hierarchy window to activate the View functions in the menu bar.
You must be granted the right to create, use, edit, and delete resources based upon your user account configuration to access all the functions.
New view Delete view Edit view
Allows you to create a new view. Allows you to delete a view. Opens the View window, allowing you to change the view name. A toggle button that allows you to display (or remove) view screens on (or from) the virtual video desktop. Connects all the camera and map resources to the appropriate server. Disconnects all the camera and map resources from their corresponding server. Opens the Layout editor window, allowing you to create and modify custom view screens. Opens the Layout menu, allowing you to set/change the view screen layout. Allows you to display a single view screen on the screen. This option is only available when the view screen is already displayed. Allows you to select the picture quality. Opens the Resource window and allows you to add the cameras or maps you wish to include in the selected view. Automatically connects each camera and map resource on the selected view to the appropriate server. The same occurs upon all subsequent logins. Automatically displays all the connected camera and map resources on the selected view on the view screen. The same occurs upon all subsequent logins. Allows you to the display the selected view on the SiteManager clients VGA monitor. You can only send a view to a VGA monitor when the monitor is not in the sequence resource mode.
Show/Hide
Connect
Disconnect
Edit layouts
Layout
Full screen
Quality Add resource
Autoconnect
Autodisplay
Send to monitor
See Working with the View Screen Options on page 3-172 for further information.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-167
SiteManager
The View Screen

The view screen is displayed on the virtual video desktop and may be a simple, single camera screen or a complex display of up to 64 cameras and maps. Unlike the camera video screen, you are able to custom design the screen layout. Therefore, the view screen will vary in size and appearance, depending on your design. The view screens flexibility allows you to create a display suited to your particular viewing requirements. Playback commands are the same as for the camera video screen, with the major distinction of the powerful Synchronized Multiple Camera Playback. In addition, using the visual search function on the view screen allows you to export multiple video clips from different cameras simultaneously. See Synchronized Multiple Camera Playback on page 3-184 for detailed information about this unique feature. See the following figure. The View screen can be split into the following:

Viewing area Master camera Camera or map units Playback commands Sector button Save still image button Visual search button Find button Single resource view button
3-168
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
Camera unit
Master camera
Viewing area
Playback commands Sector
Single resource view Find Visual search Save still image
Buttons and Features (View Screen)

The View screen has the following buttons and features:
NOTE
You must be granted the proper rights to access all the functions listed.
Viewing area
Displays live or played back video footage of all cameras included in the view. Also displays all map resource images. The master camera is the camera with which all other cameras in the view synchronize their playback. It is also the camera on which any PTZ commands are performed. An area of the viewing area that displays live or played back video footage of a single camera or the map resource image. Allow you to perform synchronized multiple camera playback. See Synchronized Multiple Camera Playback on page 3-184 for detailed information.
Master camera
Camera or map unit Playback commands
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-169
SiteManager
Sector
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Allows you to choose to play back video footage from one of the three sectors: Prime, Time lapse and Alarm. Allows you to save still images from the selected resource as either JPEG or BMP files. See Saving Still Images on page 3-188 for detailed information. Allows you to find particular still images and video clips by clicking on the index and export multiple video clips from different cameras simultaneously by using the index export tools. See Saving Video Clips on page 3-190 for detailed information. Allows you to find particular still images and video clips by selecting the date and time. Enables you to view a single resource on the entire View screen.
Save still image
Visual search
Find
Single resource view
In addition, the view screen layout may be customized, with countless number of unique designs. See the following diagrams. The viewing area may be divided into a maximum of 64 individual units.
View Example 1 View Example 2 View Example 3
Creating a New View

Creating a new view is simple and easy. You can use any of the camera or map resources available in the Server, Group, Map, or Monitor configurations. As with maps, you simply click and drag the desired camera or map from the hierarchy window to the view screen. To create or delete a view, you must be granted the right to create and delete resources based upon your user account configuration. There is no limit to the number of view screens you may create or how many times you can display the same camera resource. For additional information about view screens, see:

The View Screen on page 3-168 Working with the View Screen Options on page 3-172
3-170
24-10248-56 Rev. B
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Designing the View Screen Layouts on page 3-175 Adding and Removing Cameras or Maps on page 3-178 Configuring the Virtual Video Desktop on page 3-242
SiteManager
To create a new view: 1. Click the Views tab. To select the New view option, perform one of the following actions: Right-click the hierarchy window and click New view. Click the New view icon in the toolbar. Select View>New view from the menu bar.
The View dialog box appears.
2. Enter the preferred view name in the Name field and click OK. The view screen appears and a View icon is added to the hierarchy window. To delete a view: 1. Click the Views tab. To access the view menu, perform one of the following actions: Right-click a View in the hierarchy window. Right-click the view screen. Click a view in the hierarchy window and select View from the menu bar.
The View menu appears.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-171
SiteManager
2. Click Delete view. When the Confirmation box appears, click Yes and the view will be deleted from the configuration.
Working with the View Screen Options

Every View screen has its own set of options, allowing you to work with each view independently. Applying an option using the View menu affects all the cameras and maps displayed in that particular view screen, regardless of the server to which they are connected. To work with view screen options, you must be granted the right to use and edit resources based upon your user account configuration. To access the View menu and work with the options: 1. Click the Views tab. To access the view menu, perform one of the following actions: Right-click a View in the hierarchy window. Right-click the view screen. Click a view in the hierarchy window and select View from the menu bar.
The View menu appears. 2. Select one of the following options:

Edit view
The View dialog box appears. Enter the preferred view name in the Name field and click OK. Opens the selected View screen. Closes the selected View screen. The SiteManager client establishes a connection with servers associated with the Views resources. The camera currently selected as the master will have its camera name, server name, and server IP address displayed at the top of the view screen. The SiteManager client disconnects from the servers associated with the Views resources.
Show Hide Connect
Disconnect
3-172
24-10248-56 Rev. B

Edit layouts
SiteManager
The Layout editor window appears.
See Designing the View Screen Layouts on page 3-175 for detailed information.
Layout
The Layout menu appears.
Full screen
The selected view is displayed across the entire monitor screen. To return to the normal view, right-click on the screen, and click Full screen again. The View quality menu appears.
Quality
You may choose one of the following picture quality settings for each view screen: Maximum quality The images are of maximum high quality, but as a result you are using up more computer resources (CPU, bandwidth, etc.). The refresh rate is higher. User defined quality Quality is adjusted according to your connection. Maximum speed As the images are of satisfactory quality, fewer computer resources are used. The refresh rate is lower.
Add resource
The Resource dialog box appears.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-173
SiteManager
Select the server and the resource by using the Server and the bottom drop-down list respectively. Click OK. The selected camera or map appears in one of the camera/map units on the view screen. Position the camera or map on the view screen as needed. See page 3-180. Repeat the process for each camera or map you wish to add to the view.
Autoconnection
The cameras and maps will be automatically connected to their corresponding server. The same will occur upon all subsequent logins. The cameras and maps will be automatically displayed on the view screen. The same will occur upon all subsequent logins.
Autodisplay
NOTE
Enabling the Autoconnect and Autodisplay functions on multiple SiteManager clients attempting to connect to a large number of cameras (all on the same network) may delay the application during start-up if any connection issues arise during the process.
Send to monitor
The Monitor menu appears. Select the monitor on which you wish to display the view. The selected view will be added to the VGA monitor hierarchy but will not be displayed on the VGA monitor until you unblank the monitor. Views can only be displayed on the SiteManager clients VGA monitors. The view will be displayed on the VGA screen and the SiteManager Main screen will be hidden behind the view. You can only send a view to a VGA monitor when the VGA monitor is not in the sequence resource mode.
3-174
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
NOTE
If the cameras included in the selected view are from a server that requires the user to enter his/her user name and password to connect to the server, then the Connecting to server window will be displayed. You will be required to enter your DVN 5000, DVN 3000, or DVN 100-NET user name and password to view the cameras. If the view contains cameras from multiple servers, a Connecting to server window will be displayed for each server which requires the user to enter his/her user name and password to establish a connection. For detailed information, see Creating or Importing a New Server on page 3-20 and Connecting to the Servers on page 3-38.
Designing the View Screen Layouts

You may custom design all the view screen layouts. The Layout editor allows you to choose the number of cameras and maps that will be displayed on each view screen, as well as their viewing size and arrangement. As there are countless camera and map arrangement options, each view screen can be designed to specifically suit your viewing requirements. To design a view, you must be granted the right to create, use, edit, and delete resources based upon your user account configuration. To design a view screen layout: 1. Click the Views tab. To access the view menu, perform one of the following actions: Right-click a View in the hierarchy window. Right-click the view screen. Click a view in the hierarchy window and select View from the menu bar.
The View menu appears. See Working with the View Screen Options on page 3-172 for further information about the View menu. 2. Click Edit layouts. The Layout editor window appears.
Each square represents a single unit. Each individual viewing area may consist of 1, 4, 9, or 16 units. The higher the number of units selected, the bigger the resolution on the view screen. You do not have to use all the available units. If a unit is left unselected, it will not be shown on the view screen. However, if it is surrounded by two or more selected units, it will be
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-175
SiteManager
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual shown on the view screen as a blank (black) area that cannot display a camera or map.
3. If you wish for each unit to be an individual camera or map (displaying up to 64 different cameras/maps), click each square once or repeatedly click New 1x1. Each square will turn yellow and then white with a sequential number indicating that it has been enabled as an individual unit.
4. If you wish for 4 units to be one individual camera or map (displaying up to 16 different cameras and/or maps), repeatedly click New 2x2 or click a single unit and drag it to the next diagonal unit. Each merged unit will turn yellow and then white with a sequential number indicating that it has been enabled as an individual unit.
5. If you wish for 9 units to be one individual camera or map, repeatedly click New 3x3 or click a single unit and drag it to the third diagonal unit. Each merged unit will turn yellow and then white with a sequential number indicating that it has been enabled as an individual unit.
6. If you wish for 16 units to be one individual camera or map (displaying up to 4 different cameras and/or maps), repeatedly click New 4x4 or click a single unit and drag it to the fourth diagonal unit. Each merged unit will turn yellow and then white with a sequential number indicating that it has been enabled as an individual unit.
3-176
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
7. If you wish to create a combination (there are literally hundreds of options), click New 1x1, 2x2, 3x3 and 4x4, as required, or click and drag the units as required. Each merged unit will turn yellow and then white with a sequential number indicating that it has been enabled as an individual viewing area.
OR
8. To delete a unit, click the unit to be deleted and click Delete in the frame area of the window. The selected unit will be deleted, allowing you to create a different unit configuration in its place. 9. To assign a particular name to the layout, click Rename. The Layout window appears.
Type the name and click OK. 10. To create a new layout, click New. A new layout will be shown in the name box and a new unit area will be displayed. 11. To delete a layout, select the layout from the drop-down list and click Delete in the layout area of the window. The layout will be deleted.
NOTE
As there is no limit on the number of layouts that may be designed, we recommend designing a few different layouts, so that you do not have to keep returning to the Layout editor window. All layouts designed are automatically saved and may be accessed and applied to any view screen.
12. Once you have achieved the required layout(s), click Done. You will be returned to the view screen.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-177
SiteManager
13. Access the View menu again and select the Layout option by performing one of the following actions: Right-click on a View icon in the hierarchy window and click Layout. Right-click the view screen and click Layout. Select View>Layout from the menu bar.
The Layout menu appears. All of your currently available layouts will be displayed with their corresponding names.
14. Click a layout. The view screen will be configured accordingly. 15. Attach cameras and/or maps by following steps on page 3-178.
NOTE
You may change the layout of a view screen as often as you like, and you may use the same layout on different view screens. See Working with the View Screen Options on page 3-172 for further information about the View menu.
Adding and Removing Cameras or Maps

Camera and map resources can be added by clicking and dragging them from the previously built hierarchies or maps to the View screen. You may choose to add the resources from servers, groups, and/or maps. Cameras must be connected in order to be displayed on a view screen. To add and remove a camera or map on a view screen, you must be granted the right to create and delete resources based upon your user account configuration. To add cameras or maps to a View screen: 1. Click the Views tab. To access the View menu, perform one of the following actions: Right-click on a View icon in the hierarchy window. Right-click the View screen. Select a view icon in the hierarchy window and select View from the menu bar.
The View menu appears. See Working with the View Screen Options on page 3-172 for further information about the View menu.
3-178
24-10248-56 Rev. B
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual 2. Click Show. The view screen appears.
SiteManager
3. Access the camera or map resources you wish to add to the view screen by clicking on the Server, Group, or Map tab. The server, group or map hierarchy appears in the hierarchy window. 4. Display all the cameras or maps available in a particular hierarchy by clicking the Plus sign (+) in front of the Camera or Map icon. Click and drag the desired camera or map to a unit on the view screen. The camera or map will be displayed on the view screen and added to the view in the hierarchy window. Ensure that the camera resources are connected. For connecting camera resources, see: Connecting to the Servers on page 3-38 Working with Group Resources on page 3-134 Working with Map Resources on page 3-160
Once a camera is added to the view, the playback commands will be displayed at the bottom of the view screen and the cameras name, server name, and server IP address will be displayed at the top of the view screen.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-179
SiteManager
5. To position a camera or map in a new unit, simply click and drag it to a different viewing area. The camera or map will be displayed in a new unit.
6. Click and drag the next camera or map you wish to add to the view. To swap camera and/or map places on the screen, simply click and drag one camera or map to the others viewing area. The cameras and/or maps will swap places.
7. Repeat the same steps until you have added all the required cameras or maps to the view screen. 8. Once you have added all the cameras or maps, you may again wish to change camera or map positions or choose a different layout. See Designing the View Screen Layouts on page 3-175 for information about changing the screen layout. Cameras or maps may also be added by selecting View>Add resource from the menu bar. See Working with the View Screen Options on page 3-172.
The view layout has to have enough free units for the cameras or maps to be displayed when they are added to the view. To add cameras directly from a map screen, click and drag the map camera icon to the View screen. To control PTZ cameras, double-click on the particular camera unit. Either use the mouse cursor or right-click the particular camera unit and access the menu. See Working with the Camera Video Screen Options on page 3-103 for details about the Quality, Move, Zoom, Focus, Iris, Preset and Tour options.
To remove a camera or map resource from the View screen: 1. Click the Views tab.
3-180
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
2. Display all the cameras or maps available on the view screen by clicking on the Plus sign (+) in front of the View and the Camera or Map icons. All the available cameras or maps will be displayed in the hierarchy window. 3. Access the resource menu by right-clicking on the camera or map in the hierarchy window, or clicking the camera or map in the hierarchy window and selecting Resource from the menu bar. The resource menu appears.
See Working with Group Resources on page 3-134 for information about the resource menu. If removing a camera resource, and if the camera is connected to a DVN 5000 multiplexed server, the Set priority option will also be available in the Camera resource menu. 4. Click Delete resource. The Confirmation box appears.
5. Click Yes. The camera or map will be deleted from the hierarchy and will no longer be displayed on the View screen.
Working with View Resources

Views can only use cameras or maps as a resource; therefore, the following instructions only describe how to work with the cameras and maps included in a view.
NOTE
You must be granted the right to create, use, edit and delete resources to access all the functions available for work with view resources.
To work with view resources: 1. Click the Views tab.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-181
SiteManager
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual All the created views appear in the hierarchy window.
2. Double-click on (or click the Plus sign [+] in front of) the View icon whose cameras or maps you wish to access. All of the cameras and maps included in the view appear.
As one view may consist of cameras from multiple servers, some resources may be connected while the others may be disconnected simultaneously. 3. Right-click on the required camera or map in the hierarchy window, or select the required camera or map in the hierarchy window and click Resource on the menu bar. Then select one of the following options:
Show
The selected camera or map will be displayed in its individual video screen.
Camera Video Screen
Map Screen
Use the available video screen functions, as required. See Working with the Camera Video Screen Toolbar on page 3-109 for detailed information.
3-182
24-10248-56 Rev. B

Hide (Camera) Connect
SiteManager
Closes the selected cameras video screen. The SiteManager client establishes a connection with server associated with the Views camera or map. The SiteManager client will disconnect from the server associated with the Views camera or map. The Resource properties dialog box appears.
Disconnect Edit resource (Camera)
Edit map
The Map dialog box appears.
Enter the preferred map name in the Name field. Select the map image file by clicking the Browse (...) button, locating and selecting the map image file, and clicking Open. Click OK.
Set priority
This feature allows you to increase a cameras FPS rate on demand. The priority boost will be activated for the selected camera. The priority boost will remain active until you stop the priority boost mode by clicking Set priority again. Refer to the DVN 5000 Series Software Installation and Configuration Manual for additional information about the priority boost.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-183
SiteManager
Send to monitor
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual The Monitor menu appears. Select the monitor on which you wish to display the selected camera or map. If you select to display the camera or map on a VGA monitor, the selected camera or map will not be displayed on the VGA monitor until you unblank the monitor. You can only send a camera or map to a VGA monitor when the VGA monitor is not in the sequence resource mode.
Delete resource
Click Yes on the Confirmation dialog box. The selected camera will be removed from the group.
See Working with Group Resources on page 3-134 for information about the Camera resource menu. If the camera is connected to a DVN 5000 multiplexed server, the Set priority option will also be available in the camera resource menu.
Synchronized Multiple Camera Playback

Playing back recorded video footage undoubtedly provides you with certain benefits. However, you must view video footage for each camera separately. This can be time consuming and often fails to supply the global picture of an event, especially when more than one camera is used for surveillance of a site. Synchronized Multiple Camera Playback eliminates the need for individual camera footage viewing and provides you with an enormous advantage of playing back time-synchronized recorded video footage and audio from all cameras included in a particular view simultaneously. Synchronized multiple camera playback enables you to recreate an entire event or track a person/object with ease and precision. Note the following:
Remember that each camera may be uniquely configured with regard to recording time intervals and sectors. Therefore, when performing synchronized multiple camera playback, some cameras may not display video footage for the selected sector, date, and time. Synchronized multiple camera playback can only be performed in views and not in individual camera video screens. You must be granted the right to use resources based upon your user account configuration to use synchronized multiple camera playback. For additional information, see: Selecting a Camera Sector for Playback on page 3-113 Finding a Still Image or Video Clip on page 3-116 Views on page 3-165 Adding and Removing Cameras or Maps on page 3-178
3-184
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
Important Information

Cameras connected to DVN 3000 Series servers will not be played back. Cameras connected to DVN 100-NET encoders will not be played back, as these encoders only transmit live video footage. If a camera connected to a DVN 100-NET encoder or a DVN 3000 server is selected as the master camera, the playback commands and the find function will be disabled. As soon as a camera connected to a DVN 5000 server is selected as the master camera, the playback commands and the find function will be enabled.
To perform synchronized multiple camera playback: 1. Click the Views tab. To display a view screen, perform one of the following actions: Double-click on a View icon in the hierarchy window. Right-click a View in the hierarchy window and click Show. Click a view in the hierarchy window and select View>Show from the menu bar. Double-click on a View icon on a map. Double-click on a View icon on a 2D map or a 3D map screen. Ensure that you have completed the View screen by specifying its layout and adding all the cameras required. If you are not currently connected to the server(s), displaying the View screen results in an automatic connection to all the necessary servers. If the cameras included in the selected view are from a server that requires the user to enter his/her user name and password to connect to the server, then the Connecting to server window appears. You will be required to enter your DVN 5000, DVN 3000, or DVN 100-NET user name and password to view the cameras. If the view contains cameras from multiple servers, a Connecting to server window appears for each server that requires the user to enter his/her user name and password to establish a connection. For detailed information, see Creating or Importing a New Server on page 3-20 and Connecting to the Servers on page 3-38.
The View screen appears.
2. On the View screen, click the camera you wish to be the master camera of the playback. The selected camera displays a red outline.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-185
SiteManager
Master camera
The remaining cameras in a view synchronize their playback with the master camera. When the master is playing back footage from a particular date, time, and sector, the rest of the cameras will only play back the video and audio footage that corresponds to the date, time, and sector specifications of the master camera. Therefore, at certain points during the playback, particular cameras may not have any footage to play back. 3. From the Sector drop-down list in the toolbar, select the sector from which you would like to view video footage.
4. To play back the Prime sector, select Prime. The Prime sector video footage will be ready for playback and the Sector button will display the Prime sector icon.
5. To play back the Time lapse sector, select Time Lapse. The Time lapse sector video footage will be ready for playback and the Sector button will change its display.
6. To play back the Alarm sector, select Alarm. The Alarm sector video footage will be ready for playback and the Sector button will change its display.
7. Each time a view is opened, the Prime sector is always set as the default sector for the synchronized multiple camera playback.
3-186
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
If you skip steps 3 and 5 (or 6) and simply click the Play button after selecting the master camera, the synchronized multiple camera playback will commence from the start of the Prime sector video footage of the master camera. See Selecting a Camera Sector for Playback on page 3-113 for additional information. 8. You may use the find or visual search functions to select the video footage to be played back. See Finding a Still Image or Video Clip on page 3-116 for detailed information about the Find functions. 9. Click the Play button. The synchronized multiple camera playback will commence from the start of the video footage of the master camera sector that has been selected. As some cameras may have been programmed to record only at certain time intervals, these cameras may not have any recorded footage during the synchronized playback. As a result, a black screen will be displayed while the other cameras are performing the synchronized multiple camera playback. When the playback arrives at a point where a camera recorded video footage and/or audio, it will be displayed. Ensure that the speakers are connected and the volume at the required level. Audio will be played back automatically where it has been recorded, along with the corresponding video footage. See Audio Channels on page 3-53 for detailed information.
10. To go to the start of recorded video footage, click the Start button. 11. To go to the end of recorded video footage, click the End button. 12. To fast forward the video clip, right-click the Forward button. If you wish to increase the speed of the fast forward function, repeatedly right-click the
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-187
SiteManager
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Forward button until you reach the required speed (2 xs to 512 xs). To slow down again, right-click the Rewind button.
13. To fast rewind the video clip, right-click the Rewind button. If you wish to increase the speed of the rewind function, repeatedly right-click the Rewind button until you reach the required speed (2 xs to 512 xs). To slow down again, right-click the Forward button. 14. To pause the video clip, click the Pause button. Playback will stop at the chosen point in the video clip to let you view a still image. To resume, right-click Rewind or Forward, as required, or click the Play button. 15. To play back frame by frame, click the Pause button and then repeatedly click Rewind or Forward to move through the video clip frame by frame, as required. 16. To temporarily fast forward or rewind, hold down Rewind or Forward using a left click of the mouse. 17. To return to live viewing, click the Stop button. Playback will cease and live footage will be displayed on the View screen. 18. You may repeat the procedure using a different camera as the master. 19. To save still images, see Saving Still Images on page 3-188. 20. To export any video clips, see Saving Video Clips on page 3-190.
Saving Still Images

SiteManager enables you to save a still image of interest from a camera resource on the View screen. When you locate the still image of interest, you may save it in one of the following two formats: Compressed JPEG Interchange Format and Uncompressed Windows Bitmap Format. To save a still image on the View screen: 1. Click the Views tab and perform one of the following steps: Double-click on a View icon in the hierarchy window. Right-click on a view in the hierarchy window and click Show in the View menu. Select a view in the hierarchy window and select View>Show from the menu bar.
3-188
24-10248-56 Rev. B
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual The view screen appears.
SiteManager
2. Select the camera that has the image you wish to save. 3. Locate the still image by using the Find function, Visual search function, and the Playback commands. See Working with the Camera Video Screen Toolbar on page 3-109. 4. Click Pause when you locate the still image you wish to save. 5. Click the Save icon. The Save as dialog box appears.
6. Enter a file name and select the file type you wish to use. Save the file to the desired location. You can save still images either as JPEG or BMP files.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-189
SiteManager
Saving Video Clips

SiteManager allows you to export multiple video clips from different cameras simultaneously. Any or all of the cameras included in a view screen can be selected and the video footage of interest from the same camera sector, date, and time exported simultaneously. This provides the user with the advantage of having quick and easy access to video footage from multiple cameras in parallel. In addition, the time required to export all of the required video footage is drastically reduced. Views allow you to export video footage from multiple cameras in one of the following three formats:

AVI Format MP4 Format MS Mpeg4 V3 Format
NOTE
When using the AVI format to export a video clip, the video will be exported using the recorded videos resolution and quality. The video cannot be upsampled or downsampled. For example, if the video was recorded at 2CIF, you cannot export the video at 4CIF.
For further information, see:

Server Setup and Full Interface on page 3-42 Saving a Video Clip on page 3-122 Working with the Camera Video Screen Toolbar on page 3-109 Camera Video Screens on page 3-102 The View Screen on page 3-168
See also Exporting Image and Video Clip Formats on page 3-120 for information about the file formats.
NOTE
You cannot export video clips from cameras connected to a DVN 3000 Series server. In addition, you cannot export video clips from cameras connected to DVN 100-NET encoders, since these encoders only transmit live video footage and audio.
To save video clips: 1. Click the Views tab and perform one of the following steps: Double-click on a View icon in the hierarchy window.
3-190
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
Right-click on a view in the hierarchy window and click Show in the View menu. Select a view in the hierarchy window and select View>Show from the menu bar.
The view screen appears.
Also, you may double-click the required camera icon on a 2D or a 3D map. 2. Select the desired camera sector from the Sector drop-down list. 3. Click the Visual search button The visual search panel appears.
.
The blue index represents the recorded video footage. The number of rows depends on the number of cameras included in the view screen.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-191
SiteManager
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual The names on the left-hand side of the index indicate the camera to which each index row belongs. The date and time in the upper left-hand corner indicate the beginning of the available recorded video footage. The date and time in the upper right-hand corner indicate the end of the available recorded video footage. The date and time in the middle indicate the date and time of the video footage as currently selected by the pointer.
4. Use the Plus (+) and Minus (-) buttons to adjust the increments on the Time scale of the visual search panel. 5. Select the check box next to those cameras whose video footage you wish to export.
6. On the View screen, click on the camera you wish to be the master camera of the playback. The selected camera will display a red outline. The remaining cameras in the view synchronize their playback with the master camera. When the master is playing back footage from a particular date, time and sector, the rest of the cameras will only play back the video and audio footage that corresponds to the date, time, and sector specifications of the master camera. Therefore, at certain points during the playback, particular cameras may not have any footage to play back. Cameras whose video footage you do not wish to export can still be used as the master during playback. 7. Locate the beginning of the video clip(s) you wish to export by using the Find function or the playback commands.
NOTE
You may also save video clips by using only the Visual search function. Performing this procedure requires you to know the exact date and time of both the start and end points of the video clips you wish to save, since the View screen remains in live mode throughout the procedure.
If you are using only the Visual search function, click and drag the Index pointer to the start of the video clips you wish to save.
Index pointer
The date and time of the image the Index pointer is on will be displayed in the middle of the camera graphic find panel.
3-192
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
For additional information about the Find function and the playback commands, see Finding a Still Image or Video Clip on page 3-116 and Synchronized Multiple Camera Playback on page 3-184. 8. If you used the Find function, then when you click OK on the Find window, the image will be displayed in the View screen, paused and ready for playback. If you used the playback commands, when you locate the beginning of the video clip(s) you wish to save, click Pause. The desired image will be displayed in the View screen.
9. Right-click on the Index pointer and select Set start for exported video.
A green marker appears on the index, indicating the starting point of the video clip(s). 10. If you are using the Find function or the playback commands, click Play. The playback will resume, allowing you to find the end point of the video clip(s) you wish to export. If you are using only the Visual search function, click and drag the Index pointer to the end of the video clips you wish to save. 11. Use the playback functions, if applicable and as needed.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-193
SiteManager
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual During the playback, you may use the scroll bar or the index pointer to move through the recorded footage with greater speed and ease. For detailed information about playback commands, see Playing Back Video Footage and Audio on page 3-114.
12. If you are using the Find function or the playback commands, once you have arrived at the desired end point, click Pause. The playback will be paused with the desired image displayed in the view screen.
13. Right-click on the Index pointer and select Set end for exported video. A red marker line appears on the index, indicating the video clip(s) that have been selected for exporting. 14. To shorten or extend the video clip(s), position the pointer on the desired end point and repeat step 13. 15. Right-click on the Index pointer and select Export video. The Export selection window appears.
3-194
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
16. Modify the fields on this window according to the following information:
Title Start/End
Enter the preferred title of the video clip(s) you will export. Start day and time and end day and time of the video clip(s). You may modify the day and time, as needed. User-definable destination where the video file will be saved. The SiteManager folder is always the default destination for any exported video clips. The exact location of the SiteManager folder is determined by the selections made at the time of SiteManager installation. To change the destination, click the Browse button (...) and select the new location on the Save as dialog box.
File
Include text insertion Input video format Compression
If the video clip(s) include text insertion information, you may include it with the exported video clip(s) by selecting this check box. All input formats are enabled by default. Deselect any format you do not wish to use. Select the preferred compression. See Exporting Image and Video Clip Formats on page 3-120 for detailed information about the video clip formats.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-195
SiteManager
Resolution
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual From the drop-down list, select the video format (NTSC or PAL) you wish to use to export the video. For better video performance and quality, we recommend selecting the same format used to record the video. Then use the slide bar to select the preferred image resolution. For better video performance and quality, we recommend selecting the Current Video Resolution check box to use the same format used to record the video. If the Multicodec AVI compression method is selected, the current video resolution will be used. For detailed information about image resolution, refer to the DVN 5000 Series or DVN 3000 Series Software User Manual.
Quality
If you selected the Microsoft MPEG-4 Video Codec V3 AVI option in the Compression drop-down list, and the Current Video Resolution check box is deselected, the Quality slide bar will be enabled. Move the slide bar to define the video quality as high, medium, or low. Splits the exported video clip into smaller files. When enabled, an authentication signature will be created for the exported video clip. For detailed information about authentication, refer to the DVN 5000 Series or DVN 3000 Series Software User Manual.
Fixed split size (MB) Authenticate exported video
17. Click OK. The exporting process will begin. The log window will display the video export panel, allowing you to monitor the exporting process. During the exporting process, you may perform the following actions by right-clicking over the export information on the Video export panel:
Abort export Aborts the export process. Pause export Pauses the export process. Open container folder Opens the folder where the exported video will be saved.
3-196
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
NOTE
It may take a few moments before the Abort or Pause command is applied, since the system must complete exporting the current video clip segment before stopping.
Once the first video clip has been exported, the next video clip in the sequence will be exported.
NOTE
The period of time it takes to export a video clip varies, depending on the FPS rate, the selected length, compression, resolution and quality of the video clip.
18. To remove any of the completed exports from the Video export panel, or to view the exported video clips, right-click on the export information of the video clip you wish to view in the Video export panel and access the Export menu. To remove the export from the video panel, select Remove from list. To view the exported video clip, select Open exported file. To open the folder where the video footage has been saved, select Open container folder.
19. The camera video screen is still paused on the end point of the exported video clip.
Views as Map Resources

Once you have created a view screen, you may attach it to a 2D or a 3D map. For example, you may have added all cameras from the airport Terminal 1 to one view screen. You could insert this view as a resource on the airport map, giving you immediate access to all cameras involved in monitoring Terminal 1 at a click of a mouse. You may attach as many view screens, as required. To add views to maps, you must be granted the right to create resources based upon your user account configuration. For additional information see Adding Map Resources on page 3-158 and Working with Map Resources on page 3-160. To add a view to a map screen: 1. Click the Maps tab. The created maps appear in the hierarchy window.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-197
SiteManager
2. Display the map by performing one of the following steps: Double-click the appropriate Map icon in the hierarchy window. Click and drag the Map icon from the hierarchy window to the virtual video desktop. Right-click on the Map and select Show in the menu. Right-click the map in the hierarchy window and click Add resource. Right-click the map screen and click Add resource. Click the map in the hierarchy window and select Map>Add resource from the menu bar.
3. To add a view via the Map menu, perform one of the following steps:
NOTE
The Send to monitor option will not be available if you right-click on a 3D map.
The Resource window appears.
Select View from the Resource drop-down list. Select the view you wish to add and click OK. The view icon will be displayed on the map screen and added to the map hierarchy. Skip to step 6. 4. To add a view via the Views tab, click the Views tab. All the views that have been created appear in the hierarchy window.
3-198
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
The map screen will still be displayed on the virtual video desktop. Click and drag the View icon across to the desired position on the map screen. The view icon will be displayed on the map screen and added to the map hierarchy. Skip to step 6. 5. To add a view via the Add view button (for 2D maps only), click the Add view button on the 2D map screen toolbar. The Resource window appears.
Select the name of the view you wish to add. Click OK. The view icon will be displayed on the map screen and added to the map hierarchy. Continue with step 6. 6. Position the view icon on the map screen, as required. See Working with Map Resources on page 3-160 for information about icon positioning. 7. Repeat the previous steps until you have added all the desired cameras to the map screen. Double-click the view icon on the map screen to display the view screen. See Working with the View Screen Options on page 3-172 for additional information.
MONITORS
This section provides information about VGA and network monitors used to display cameras, 2D maps, and views included in SiteManager. You can play back recorded video footage and audio of a single camera or perform synchronized multiple camera playback on VGA monitors. SiteManager supports two types of monitors:

Client VGA monitors connected to the SiteManager client Network monitors (monitors connected to DVN 100-NET decoders that the SiteManager client connects to via a TCP/IP connection)
Both monitor types allow you to view live video footage and listen to live audio, as well as play back video footage and audio from any sector individually or as part of a synchronized multiple monitor playback.
NOTE
You must be granted the right to create, use, edit, and delete resources based upon your user account configuration to have access to all of the functions listed in this section.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-199
SiteManager
Monitor Menu Options

To manage monitors, you may perform one of the following actions:

Right-click on the Monitor icon in the hierarchy window. Right-click on the Sequence or the Sequence screen. Select a monitor in the hierarchy window and select Monitor in the menu bar. Right-click on a monitor on the Monitor Group screen.
To activate the Monitor functions in the menu bar, click on the Monitors tab and then click within the hierarchy window.
Monitor Menu Options for Client VGA Monitors

The following information covers the available monitor menu options for client VGA monitors. SiteManager supports multiple VGA monitors.
Edit monitor
Opens the VGA monitor window, allowing you to: Change the VGA monitor name Enable or disable the VGA monitor Enable the sequence mode for the VGA monitor
Blank
When deselected, this feature allows you to view a single resource (camera, map or view) or the VGA monitors resource sequence on the selected VGA monitor. When selected, this feature allows you to hide the single resource (camera, map or view) or the VGA monitors resource sequence from the selected VGA monitor and use the SiteManager GUI (Graphical User Interface) on the VGA monitor.
Show resource
Single resource mode only. Opens the Resource dialog box and allows you to add one camera, map, or view to the selected VGA monitors. Sequence resource mode only. Opens the Resource dialog box and allows you to add cameras, 2D maps, and views to the selected VGA monitors sequence. To add resources to a VGA monitors sequence, the selected VGA monitor must be in the sequence mode. See Editing Monitors on page 3-206 for details.
Add resource to sequence
Autodisplay
Automatically displays the connected cameras on the selected VGA monitor. The same occurs upon your next login.
3-200
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
Menu Options for Network (DVN 100-NET) Monitors

The following information covers the available menu options for network (DVN 100-NET) monitors. SiteManager supports multiple network (DVN 100-NET) monitors.
New monitor
Opens the Network monitor window, allowing you to add a network monitor. Allows you to remove a network monitor. Opens the Monitor window, allowing you to change the network monitor name and the IP address. Allows you to access the Setup screen of the DVN 100-NET decoder, which is connected to the analog network monitor, and configure the decoder, as required. Refer to the DVN 100-NET Installation and Operation Manual for detailed information about configuring DVN 100-NET decoders.
Delete monitor Edit monitor
Setup monitor
Show camera
Opens the Resource dialog box, allowing you to select the camera you wish to display on the selected network monitor. The DVN 100-NET decoder, which is connected to the analog network monitor, will automatically connect to the cameras server. The same occurs upon your next login.
Autoconnect
The Monitor Panel

The Monitor panel allows you to access all monitors (VGA and network) and monitor groups that are part of the SiteManager configuration. The number and type of available monitors depend on the available hardware on the SiteManager client and the network. The number of monitor groups available depends on how you have grouped the available monitors. The available VGA monitors will be automatically detected by the SiteManager client according to the number of available VGA monitors. The number of network monitors is determined by the number of DVN 100-NET decoders and analog monitors available on the network. You may add or remove Network monitors from the SiteManager configuration. To view the Monitor panel, from the menu bar, select Window and verify that Show monitors panel is selected. The Monitor panel can be categorized into the following areas:

Monitors drop-down list Network (DVN 100-NET) monitor section
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-201
SiteManager Client VGA monitor section Monitor panel find

Monitors drop-down list Network (DVN 100-NET) monitor section
Client VGA monitor section
Monitor panel find
Buttons and Features (Monitor Panel)

The following information covers each feature on the Monitor panel. You must be granted the right to use resources upon your user account configuration to access all the functions.
Monitors Drop-down List

Lists all the available monitors and monitor groups, and allows you to select which monitor sections you wish to display on the Monitor panel.
Network (DVN 100-NET) Monitor

Monitor and resource info
Displays the monitor name, camera name, the server to which the camera is connected, and whether the monitor is currently in single or quad view mode. The DVN 100-NET decoder, which is connected to a spot monitor, will connect to the cameras server and display the cameras video footage on the monitor. If the monitor is currently in quad view mode, you may connect specific regions by clicking the drop-down arrow and selecting the region(s) you wish to connect. See Using the
Connect
3-202
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
DVN 100-NET Quad View Spot Monitor Feature on page 227 for more information.
Disconnect
The DVN 100-NET decoder, which is connected to a spot monitor, will disconnect from the cameras server, and the cameras video footage will no longer be displayed on the monitor. If the monitor is currently in quad view mode, you may disconnect specific regions by clicking the drop-down arrow and selecting the region(s) you wish to disconnect. See Using the DVN 100-NET Quad View Spot Monitor Feature on page 227 for more information.
Sector
Allows you to choose to play back video footage from one of the three sectors: Prime, Time lapse and Alarm. Allows you to turn the DVN 100-NET decoder audio output on or off. A dynamic indicator showing the current monitor mode: live, playback, paused, etc.
Audio
Monitor mode
Client VGA Monitor

Monitor and resource info
Displays the following: Monitor name Camera name and the server to which the camera is connected when a camera is part of the VGA monitor hierarchy Map name when a map is part of the VGA monitor hierarchy or View name when a view is part of the VGA monitor hierarchy

Unblank
Allows you to display the resources (cameras, maps or views) on the VGA monitor. Only available when the VGA monitor is in sequence mode. Allows you to display the Sequence screen and add (or remove) resources to (or from) the monitor sequence. Also allows you to adjust the display time of each resource within the VGA monitors sequence. Allows you to choose to play back video footage from one of the three sectors: Prime, Time lapse, and Alarm. Not available when a map is displayed on the VGA monitor. Allows you to turn the audio transmission on and off for the audio channel associated with the camera currently displayed on the VGA monitor.
Sequence
Sector
Audio
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-203
SiteManager
Monitor mode
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual A dynamic indicator showing the current monitor mode: live, playback, paused, etc.
Monitor Panel Playback Commands

Table 3-12: Monitor Panel Toolbar Buttons and Features
Function Description Allows you to go to the beginning of the camera's video footage and audio archive on the currently selected monitor or monitor group. Allows you to quickly rewind video footage and audio for the currently selected monitor or monitor group. Also allows you to rewind the video footage and audio frame-by-frame when used with the Pause button. Allows you to stop video footage and audio playback for the currently selected monitor or monitor group. Allows you to commence video footage and audio playback on the currently selected monitor or monitor group. Allows you to pause the video footage and audio playback for the currently selected monitor or monitor group. Also allows you to forward or rewind the video footage and audio frame-by-frame when used with the FFW and REW buttons. Allows you to quickly forward video footage and audio for the currently selected monitor or monitor group. Also allows you to forward the video footage and audio frame-by-frame when used with the Pause button. Allows you to go to the end of the cameras video footage and audio archive on the currently selected monitor or monitor group. Opens the Find window, allowing you to find a particular video clip by selecting the date and time.
The Sequence Screen

VGA monitors can be configured with sequences, meaning that the monitors can be configured with a combination of cameras, maps, and/or views. The Sequence screen is displayed on the virtual video desktop and allows you to adjust the display time of each resource included in the sequence. The Sequence screen can be categorized into the Monitor scroll button and the Resource box (consisting of a Display unit and a Time field).
NOTE
Sequences cannot be used with network (DVN 100-NET) monitors.
3-204
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
Display unit Resource box Monitor scroll button
Time field
For information on the sequence screen, see Adding Resources to a VGA Monitor on page 3-208.
Buttons and Features (Sequence Screen)

The following information covers each feature on the Sequence screen.
Monitor scroll button
Allows you to create a monitor sequence that will be displayed on the selected VGA monitor. The arrows allow you to scroll left or right and access more resource boxes. Consists of a Display unit and a Time field. The Display unit provides you with information about which camera, map, or view has been added to the monitor sequence. The Time field allows you to select the resources display time.
Resource box
Adding Network Monitors

VGA monitors are automatically detected by SiteManager and therefore cannot be added or removed from the configuration. By contrast, in order to display cameras on a network monitor, you must first create it within the SiteManager configuration. The procedure only requires you to know the IP address of the DVN 100-NET decoder to which the network monitor is connected. Note the following:
Verify that the SiteManager client and the DVN 100-NET decoders are connected to the same network. You may display any camera managed by SiteManager on a network monitor. The number of network monitors you can add is determined by the number of DVN 100-NET decoders present on the network. To add a network monitor, you must be granted the right to create resources upon your user account configuration.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-205
SiteManager To add a network monitor: 1. Click the Monitors tab.
All the existing monitors appear in the hierarchy window.
2. Right-click on the hierarchy window, or click Monitor in the menu bar, and select New monitor.
3. In the Name field, enter the preferred network monitor name. 4. In the Address field, enter the IP address of the DVN 100-NET decoder to which the network monitor is connected. 5. Verify that DVN 100 server is displayed in the Type drop-down list. 6. Click OK. The network monitor will be added to the Monitors hierarchy window.
Editing Monitors
Editing a monitor allows you to change the monitors name, IP address (network monitors only), and enable and select the monitor mode (VGA monitors only).
NOTE
To edit a monitor, you must be granted the right to edit resources upon your user account configuration.
To edit a monitor: 1. Select the Monitors tab.
3-206
24-10248-56 Rev. B
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual All the available monitors appear in the hierarchy window.
SiteManager
2. Right-click on the VGA or network Monitor icon and select Edit monitor, or select the VGA or network monitor in the hierarchy window and select Monitor>Edit monitor from the menu bar. If you selected a VGA monitor, the VGA monitor dialog box appears.
If you selected a network monitor, the network monitor dialog box appears.
3. (VGA monitor only) Verify that the Enabled check box is selected. 4. In the Name field, enter the preferred monitor name. 5. (VGA monitor only) To enable the sequence resource mode (i.e. to be able to create camera, view, and map sequences on the VGA monitor), select the Sequence check box. To enable the single resource mode (i.e. to use the VGA monitor for displaying a single camera, view, or map), deselect the Sequence check box.
NOTE
If a VGA monitor has been configured in the sequence resource mode and the single resource mode is then enabled, any resources that were part of the VGA monitors sequence will be removed from the VGA monitors hierarchy.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-207
SiteManager
6. (Network monitor only) In the Address field, edit the IP address, as needed, by entering the IP address of the DVN 100-NET decoder to which the network monitor is connect. 7. Click OK.
NOTE
You may also edit a monitors name by double-clicking on the Monitor icon in the hierarchy window and entering the preferred name. When double-clicking on the Monitor icon, the second click needs to be slightly delayed.
Adding Resources to a VGA Monitor

SiteManager supports a single VGA monitor. The VGA monitor can be set to a single resource mode or a sequence resource mode and can display cameras, 2D maps, and views. When the VGA monitor is in single resource mode, only one camera, map, or view can be displayed. When a VGA monitor is in sequence resource mode, multiple cameras, maps, and views can be displayed automatically one after the other, each with a unique display time. In this mode, resources cannot be displayed on the VGA monitor by using the Send to monitor option.
NOTE
To add resources to a VGA monitor, you must be granted the right to create resources upon your user account configuration.
Cameras Displayed on VGA Monitors

All cameras included in a SiteManager configuration can be displayed on a VGA monitor connected to the SiteManager client, regardless of the server to which the camera is connected.
Camera Domes Displayed and Controlled on VGA Monitors

All camera domes included in a SiteManager configuration can be displayed and controlled on a VGA monitor connected to the SiteManager client, regardless of the server to which the camera dome is connected.
Maps Displayed on VGA Monitors

All 2D maps included in a SiteManager configuration can be displayed on a VGA monitor connected to the SiteManager client.
3-208
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
Views Displayed on VGA Monitors

All views included in a SiteManager configuration can be displayed on a VGA monitor connected to the SiteManager client. However, only cameras connected to a DVN 5000 server can be played back as part of a view displayed on the SiteManager clients VGA monitor.
Adding VGA Monitor Resources (Single Resource Mode)

To add a VGA monitor resource (single resource mode): 1. Select the Monitors tab. All the available monitors appear in the hierarchy window.
2. From the menu bar, select Window. Verify that Show monitors panel is selected. 3. Use one of the following methods to add a resource:
Drag and drop method
Select the Servers, Groups, Maps, or Views tab to access the required camera, 2D map, or view resource. Click and drag the camera, 2D map, or view resource from the hierarchy window to the required VGA monitor section on the Monitor panel.
Monitor resource method
Right-click on the VGA Monitor icon and select Show resource, or select the VGA monitor in the hierarchy window and select Monitor>Show resource from the menu bar. The Resource window appears.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-209
SiteManager
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Select the resource Type (camera, map or view), Server (cameras only), and Resource. Click OK. The resource will be added to the VGA monitor hierarchy and the resources details will be displayed in the corresponding VGA monitor section on the Monitor panel. If you added a camera or view, then the following will be displayed in the VGA monitor section on the Monitor panel:
If you added a map, then the following will be displayed in the VGA monitor section on the Monitor panel:
4. The resource will not be displayed on the VGA monitor until you unblank the VGA monitor. See Displaying Resources on VGA Monitors on page 3-216 for detailed information. A resource does not have to be connected to add it to a VGA monitor unless you are adding a camera from the Servers tab, since you cannot access the camera until the server has been connected.
Adding VGA Monitor Resources (Sequence Resource Mode)

To add a VGA monitor resource (sequence resource mode): 1. Select the Monitors tab. All the available monitors appear in the hierarchy window.
2. Right-click on the VGA monitor icon and select Edit monitor. Verify that the Sequence check box is selected. 3. From the menu bar, select Window. Verify that Show monitors panel is selected.
3-210
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
4. Click the Sequence button on the VGA monitor section on the Monitor panel. The Sequence screen appears.
5. Use one of the following methods to add a resource:

Select the Servers, Groups, Maps, or Views tab to access the required camera, 2D map, or view resource. Click and drag the resource from the hierarchy window to the required display unit on the Sequence screen or to the VGA monitor section on the Monitor panel.
Right-click on the VGA Monitor icon and select Add resource to sequence, or select the VGA monitor in the hierarchy window and select Monitor>Show resource from the menu bar. The Resource window appears.
Select the resource Type (camera, map or view), Server (cameras only), and Resource. Enter the resources display time in the Time field. The display time ranges from 0 to 100 seconds. Click OK. The resource will be added to the VGA monitor sequence hierarchy and the resources name will be shown in the display unit.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-211
SiteManager
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual The resource will not be displayed on the VGA monitor until you unblank the VGA monitor. See Displaying Resources on VGA Monitors on page 3-216 for detailed information. A resource does not have to be connected to add it to a VGA monitor unless you are adding a camera from the Servers tab, since you cannot access the camera until the server has been connected.
6. If you used the drag and drop method, specify the resources display time in the Time field. The display time ranges from 0 to 100 seconds. 7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 until you have added all the resources you wish to include in the VGA monitor sequence.
Removing VGA Monitor Resources

VGA monitor resources can be removed by using the VGA monitor menu or simply clicking and dragging.
NOTE
To remove a resource from a VGA monitor, you must be granted the right to delete resources upon your user account configuration.
To delete a VGA monitor resource: 1. Select the Monitors tab. All available monitors appear in the hierarchy window.
2. Double-click on the VGA monitor icon in the hierarchy window. The VGA monitor resource hierarchy will be displayed. If the VGA monitor is in the single resource mode, only one resource (camera, map or view) will be shown.
3-212
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
3. Select the resource which you wish to delete and select Resource>Delete resource from the menu bar, or right-click on the resource you wish to delete and select Remove from sequence. OR on the VGA monitor section on the Monitor Click the Sequence button panel. The Sequence screen appears.
Click on the required display area and drag it out of the Sequence screen. Once the mouse cursor is outside of the Sequence screen, release the left mouse button. 4. Click Yes on the Confirmation dialog box. The selected resource will be removed from the selected VGA monitor.
Adding a Camera to a Network Monitor

To add a camera to a network monitor, simply click and drag the required camera from a hierarchy to the required network monitor section on the Monitor panel, or you can add a camera resource to the network monitor. Note the following:
Before starting, verify that the SiteManager client and the DVN 100-NET decoders are connected to the same network. The number of network monitors is determined by the number of DVN 100-NET decoders present on the network. You may add a camera from any of the servers managed by SiteManager. You cannot create a camera sequence for a network monitor; however, you can use the Quad View feature to display up to four cameras on a single spot monitor. See Using the DVN 100-NET Quad View Spot Monitor Feature on page 227.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-213
SiteManager
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual To add a camera to a network monitor, you must be granted the right to create resources upon your user account configuration.
Cameras Displayed on Network Monitors

Any camera defined in SiteManager can be displayed on an analog monitor connected to the SiteManager client via a connection to a DVN 100-NET decoder (network monitor). Depending on the server to which a camera is connected, the camera may be displayed on one or two monitor types.
Camera Domes Displayed and Controlled on Network Monitors

PTZ control of camera domes is available for most camera domes displayed on SiteManager network monitors. Depending on the server to which a dome camera is connected, the dome camera may be displayed and controlled on one or two monitor types.
Adding a Camera to a Network Monitor (Procedure)

To add a camera to a network monitor: 1. Select the Monitors tab. All available monitors appear in the hierarchy window.
2. From the menu bar, select Window. Verify that Show monitors panel is selected. 3. Use one of the following methods to add a camera resource:
Select the Servers, Groups, Maps, or Views tab to access camera resources. You will need to display all the cameras used under any one of the tabs by clicking on the Plus sign (+) in front of the resource type on the hierarchy window. Click and drag the camera resource from the hierarchy window to the required network monitor section on the Monitor panel. If using the Quad View feature, see Using the DVN 100-NET Quad View Spot Monitor Feature on page 227 for more information.
3-214
24-10248-56 Rev. B

SiteManager
Right-click on the Network Monitor icon and select Show camera, or select the network monitor in the hierarchy window and select Monitor>Show camera from the menu bar. The Resource window appears.
Select the camera Server and Resource and click OK. The camera will be added to the network monitor, live video footage will be displayed on the network monitor, and the camera and server names will be displayed in the corresponding network monitor section on the Monitor panel.
Adding a camera results in an automatic connection of the network monitor (DVN 100-NET decoder) to the appropriate server. It is not necessary for a camera resource to be connected to add it to a network monitor unless you are adding it from the Servers tab, since you cannot access the camera resource until the server has been connected. If a camera is sent to a network monitor from a server, group, map, or a view hierarchy, it will simply replace the camera currently displayed on the selected network monitor. 4. For additional information, see: Working with Server Resources on page 3-46 Working with Group Resources on page 3-134 Working with Map Resources on page 3-160 Working with View Resources on page 3-181 Using the DVN 100-NET Quad View Spot Monitor Feature on page 227
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-215
SiteManager
Removing a Camera from a Network Monitor

Removing a camera from a network monitor can be achieved by using the Network monitor menu.
NOTE
To remove a camera from a network monitor, you must be granted the right to delete resources upon your user account configuration.
To delete a camera from a network monitor: 1. Select the Monitors tab. All available monitors appear in the hierarchy window. 2. Double-click on the Network Monitor icon whose camera you wish to access, or click the Plus sign (+) in front of the Network Monitor icon whose camera you wish to access. The selected network monitors camera hierarchy appears.
3. Select the camera you wish to delete and select Resource>Delete resource from the menu bar, or right-click on the camera you wish to delete and select Remove from sequence. 4. Click Yes on the Confirmation dialog box. The selected camera will be removed from the selected network monitor.
Displaying Resources on VGA Monitors

This section describes how to display cameras, maps, and views on a VGA monitor.
NOTE
When resources are displayed on the VGA monitor, the SiteManager Main screen will be hidden until you close or blank the VGA resource display.
Before starting, verify that the VGA monitor has been configured with at least one resource before performing the procedure in this section. Also, to display resources on a VGA monitor, you must be granted the right to use resources based upon your user account configuration.
3-216
24-10248-56 Rev. B
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual To display resources on a VGA monitor: 1. Select the Monitors tab. All available monitors appear in the hierarchy window.
SiteManager
2. From the menu bar, select Window. Verify that Show monitors panel is selected. 3. To display the resource(s) on the VGA monitor, click the Unblank icon a VGA monitor section of the Monitor panel, or right-click on the VGA monitor icon in the hierarchy window and deselect Blank. If the VGA monitor is in the sequence resource mode, the VGA monitor sequence will commence on the VGA screen and the SiteManager Main screen will be hidden. If the VGA monitor is in the single sequence mode, the single resource will be displayed on the VGA screen and the SiteManager Main screen will be hidden. 4. When you no longer wish to display the resource or the resource sequence on the VGA monitor, perform one of the following actions in accordance with the type of resource you are viewing: Camera or View: Right-click on the VGA screen and select Close/Blank. Map: Click on the map toolbar. in
Connecting to Network Monitors

Network monitors must be connected to view or play back video footage and audio. As each monitor has its own connection, the user has complete access to monitor display and playback without the need to connect the servers first. In addition, if one monitor experiences problems, the rest of the monitors will remain fully functional.
NOTE
To connect a network monitor, you must be granted the right to use resources upon your user account configuration.
To connect a network monitor: 1. Select the Monitors tab. All available monitors appear in the hierarchy window. 2. From the menu bar, select Window. Verify that Show monitors panel is selected. 3. Click the Connect/Disconnect toggle button . If you are using the Quad View feature, see Connecting or Disconnecting Regions on page 233.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-217
SiteManager
Disconnecting a Monitor
To disconnect a monitor, click the Connect/Disconnect toggle button in the Monitor panel. The selected monitor will be disconnected. If you are using the Quad View feature, see Connecting or Disconnecting Regions on page 233.
Playing Back Video Footage and Audio on Monitors

VGA and network monitors can be used to play back recorded video footage and audio, as well as for live viewing. Playback commands function in the same manner as they do for video footage playback in camera video and view screens.
NOTE
Video and audio playback is not supported on DVN 100-NET network monitors in Quad View mode. To play back video and audio on a network monitor, you must configure it for Single View mode. For information on Quad View mode, see Using the DVN 100-NET Quad View Spot Monitor Feature on page 227. See also Toggling Between Single and Quad View Modes on page 232.
To transmit lip-synchronized audio with the recorded video footage, speakers must be appropriately connected to the following:
The SiteManager client when video footage is played back on a VGA monitor. The DVN 100-NET decoder to which the network monitor is connected when video footage is played back on a network monitor.
See Playing Back Video Footage and Audio on page 3-114 for detailed information about using the playback commands.
Cameras Played Back on SiteManager Monitors

Video footage and audio can be played back from cameras available in the SiteManager configuration. Once the camera is displayed on the VGA or network (DVN 100-NET) monitor, standard playback commands can be used to review the video footage.
NOTE
Depending on the server to which a camera is connected, the camera may be played back on one or both monitor types. Alternatively, it may not be able to be played back at all.
See Table 3-13 for detailed information about which cameras can be played back on SiteManager monitors.
3-218
24-10248-56 Rev. B
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Table 3-13: Monitor and Server Compatibility
Server Type DVN 5000 DVN 3000 Yes Yes Monitor Type VGA Network Yes Yes No
SiteManager
DVN 100-NET Decoder No
To play back video footage and audio from a single camera on a VGA monitor: 1. Select the Monitors tab. All available monitors appear in the hierarchy window. 2. From the menu bar, select Window. Verify that Show monitors panel is selected. 3. Display the camera resource of a VGA monitor. See Displaying Resources on VGA Monitors on page 3-216. 4. Select a sector from the Sector drop-down list. 5. Use the playback commands, as needed. See Playing Back Video Footage and Audio on page 3-114 for assistance. If the VGA monitor is in sequence mode, you will need to wait until the required camera is displayed in the sequence before commencing the playback. 6. To control transmission of recorded audio during the playback, use the Audio toggle button on the VGA monitor. 7. To save a still image, see Saving a Still Image on page 3-121. To save a video clip, see Saving a Video Clip on page 3-122. 8. To play back footage from a different camera that is part of the VGA monitor sequence, click .
To play back video footage and audio on a network monitor: 1. Select the Monitors tab. All available monitors appear in the hierarchy window. 2. From the menu bar, select Window. Verify that Show monitors panel is selected. 3. Connect to the desired network monitor. See Connecting to Network Monitors on page 3-217. 4. In the Monitor panel, click on the monitor section of the monitor on which you wish to play back video footage and audio, so that the required monitor section is highlighted.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-219
SiteManager
5. Select a sector from the Sector drop-down list. 6. You may use the find functions to select the video footage to be played back. See Finding a Still Image or Video Clip on Monitors on page 3-221 for detailed information about the find functions. 7. Verify that the monitor is in Single View mode. See Toggling Between Single and Quad View Modes on page 232. 8. Click the Play playback button .
The cameras video footage will begin to play back from the selected sector. Audio will be played back automatically where it has been recorded along with video footage, assuming the speakers are connected correctly to the DVN 100-NET decoder. 9. Use the playback commands, as needed. See Playing Back Video Footage and Audio on page 3-114 for assistance. 10. To control transmission of recorded audio during the playback, use the Audio toggle button on the VGA monitor.
Synchronized Multiple Camera Playback on VGA Monitors

Views can be displayed on VGA monitors, allowing you to play back multiple cameras from multiple DVN 5000 servers simultaneously. If a camera is connected to a DVN 100-NET encoder or a DVN 3000 server, the playback commands and the Find function will be disabled.
3-220
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
To simultaneously play back video footage and audio from multiple cameras on a VGA monitor:
NOTE
Please verify that the view whose cameras you wish to play back is part of the VGA monitor hierarchy.
1. Select the Monitors tab. All available monitors appear in the hierarchy window. 2. From the menu bar, select Window. Verify that Show monitors panel is selected. 3. Display the view resource of a VGA monitor. See Displaying Resources on VGA Monitors on page 3-216. 4. Select the sector and use the playback commands, as needed. Follow the instructions starting on step 2 (page 3-185) in Synchronized Multiple Camera Playback for assistance. If the VGA monitor is in sequence mode, you will need to wait until the view whose cameras you wish to play back is displayed before selecting the master. 5. To control transmission of recorded audio during the playback, use the Audio toggle button on the VGA monitor. and
6. To repeat the procedure using a different camera as the master, click repeat steps 4 and 5. 7. To repeat the procedure using a different camera or view, click steps 3 through 5.
and repeat
8. To save multiple video clips simultaneously, see Saving Video Clips on page 3-190 for detailed information.
Finding a Still Image or Video Clip on Monitors

You may use the Find (for both monitor types) or Visual search (for VGA monitors only) buttons to locate required images or video footage. If you know the date and time of the image or video clip you require, these functions allow you to quickly access the recorded footage.
NOTE
The Find and Visual search buttons, as well as the playback commands, are disabled when a camera connected to a DVN 100-NET encoder is displayed individually (on any monitor type) or as a master of a view (on VGA monitors only), since DVN 100-NET encoders only transmit live video footage and audio.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-221
SiteManager
If you do not know the date and time, use the playback commands to view all of the footage. See Playing Back Video Footage and Audio on Monitors on page 3-218 for detailed information about playback commands. To find a still image or video clip using the Find button on network monitors: 1. Select the Monitors tab. All available monitors appear in the hierarchy window. 2. From the menu bar, select Window. Verify that Show monitors panel is selected. 3. Connect to the desired monitor. See Connecting to Network Monitors on page 3-217 for details. 4. In the Monitor panel, click on the monitor section of the monitor whose video footage and audio you wish to search, so that the required monitor section is highlighted.
5. Use the Sector drop-down list and the Find button to locate the desired still image or video clip. Follow the instructions starting on step 4 (page 3-117) in Finding a Still Image or Video Clip for assistance. 6. After clicking OK on the Find dialog box, video footage recorded at the selected date and time will be displayed on the selected monitor, paused and ready for playback. 7. Click the Play playback button .
The cameras video footage will begin to play back from the selected sector. Audio will be played back automatically where it has been recorded along with video footage, assuming the speakers are connected correctly to the DVN 100-NET decoder. 8. Use the playback commands, as needed. See Playing Back Video Footage and Audio on page 3-114 for assistance. 9. To control transmission of recorded audio during the playback, use the Audio toggle button sequence, click
3-222
on the monitor. .
24-10248-56 Rev. B
10. To play back footage from a different camera that is part of the monitor
SiteManager
To find a still image or video clip using the Find button on VGA monitors: 1. Select the Monitors tab. All available monitors appear in the hierarchy window. 2. From the menu bar, select Window. Verify that Show monitors panel is selected. 3. Display the camera(s) and/or view(s) on the VGA monitor. See Displaying Resources on VGA Monitors on page 216. If the VGA monitor is in sequence mode, the first resource in the VGA monitors sequence will be displayed first. If a map is the first resource in the sequence, wait until the required camera or view is displayed before proceeding with the next step. 4. If you are searching on a camera, continue with step 5. If you are searching on a view, click on the camera you wish to be the master of the search. The selected camera will display a red outline. Continue with step 5. 5. Use the Sector drop-down list and the Find button to locate the desired still image or video clip. Follow the instructions starting on step 4 (page 3-117) in Finding a Still Image or Video Clip for assistance. 6. After clicking OK on the Find dialog box: If you are searching on a camera, video footage recorded at the selected date and time will be displayed on the selected VGA monitor, paused and ready for playback. If you are searching on a view, video footage recorded at the selected date and time will be displayed on the selected VGA monitor for the master camera as well as all other cameras included in the view.
7. Use the playback commands, as needed. See Synchronized Multiple Camera Playback on page 3-184 for detailed information about using the playback commands on a view and Playing Back Video Footage and Audio on page 3-114 for detailed information about using the playback commands on a camera. 8. To control transmission of recorded audio during the playback, use the Audio toggle button on the monitor. 9. To save a still image, see Saving a Still Image on page 3-121. To save a video clip, see Saving a Video Clip on page 3-122. To save multiple video clips simultaneously, see Saving Video Clips on page 3-190. 10. To repeat the procedure using a different camera as the master, click repeat steps 4 through 9. 11. To repeat the procedure using a different camera or view, click steps 3 through 9. and
and repeat
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-223
SiteManager
To find a still image or video clip using the Visual search button on VGA monitors: 1. Select the Monitors tab. All available monitors appear in the hierarchy window. 2. From the menu bar, select Window. Verify that Show monitors panel is selected. 3. Display the camera(s) and/or view(s) on the VGA monitor. See Displaying Resources on VGA Monitors on page 216. If the VGA monitor is in sequence mode, the first resource in the VGA monitors sequence will be displayed first. If a map is the first resource in the sequence, wait until the required camera or view is displayed before proceeding with the next step. 4. If you are searching on a camera, continue with step 5. If you are searching on a view, click on the camera you wish to be the master of the search. The selected camera will display a red outline. Continue with step 5. 5. In the Sectors drop-down list, select the desired camera sector. The camera sector will be changed, as selected, allowing you to find the required still image and/or video footage. 6. Click the Visual search button .
If you are searching a camera and the Prime sector, then the camera visual search panel appears.
If you are searching a camera and the Time lapse sector, then the camera visual search panel appears.
If you are searching a camera and the Alarm sector, then the camera visual search panel appears.
If you are searching a view and the Prime sector, then the view visual search panel appears.
3-224
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
If you are searching a view and the Time lapse sector, then the view visual search panel appears.
If you are searching a view and the Alarm sector, then the view visual search find panel appears.
When searching cameras or views: The blue index represents the recorded video footage. The date and time in the upper left-hand corner indicate the beginning of the available recorded video footage. The date and time in the upper right-hand corner indicate the end of the available recorded video footage. The date and time in the middle indicate the date and time of the video footage as currently selected by the pointer. The number of rows depends on the number of cameras included in the view screen. The names on the left-hand side of the index indicate to which camera each index row belongs.
When searching views only:
7. Use the Plus (+) and Minus (-) buttons to adjust the increments on the Time scale. 8. Use the horizontal scroll bar to locate the correct date and/or time, or click and drag the pointer to the required time on the index. The pointer determines the start of the video clip that will be played back. 9. Click the Play playback button .
If you are searching on a camera, video footage will be played back on the selected VGA monitor starting from the time indicated by the index pointer. If you are searching on a view, video footage will be played back on the selected VGA monitor for the master camera as well as all other
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-225
SiteManager
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual cameras included in the view, starting from the time indicated by the index pointer.
10. Use the playback commands, as needed. During the playback, you may use the scroll bar or the index pointer to move through the recorded footage with greater speed and ease. See Synchronized Multiple Camera Playback on page 3-184 for detailed information about using the playback commands on a view and Playing Back Video Footage and Audio on page 3-114 for detailed information about using the playback commands on a camera. 11. To control transmission of recorded audio during the playback, use the Audio toggle button on the monitor. 12. To save a still image, see Saving a Still Image on page 3-121. To save a video clip, see Saving a Video Clip on page 3-122. To save multiple video clips simultaneously, see Saving Video Clips on page 3-190. 13. To repeat the procedure using a different camera as the master, click repeat steps 4 through 12. 14. To repeat the procedure using a different camera or view, click steps 3 through 12. and
and repeat
Deleting Network Monitors

This section describes how to remove a network monitor from the SiteManager configuration.
NOTE
VGA monitors cannot be deleted from the SiteManager configuration. Also, to delete a network monitor, you must be granted the right to delete resources upon your user account configuration.
To delete a network monitor: 1. Select the Monitors tab. All available monitors appear in the hierarchy window. 2. Right-click on the Network Monitor icon and select Delete monitor, or select the network monitor in the hierarchy window and select Monitor>Delete monitor from the menu bar. 3. Click Yes on the Confirmation dialog box. The selected network monitor will be removed from the SiteManager configuration.
3-226
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
Using the DVN 100-NET Quad View Spot Monitor Feature

SiteManager supports the DVN 100-NET Quad View feature, which enables any DVN 100-NET in decoder mode to display up to four MPEG4 cameras from a DVN 5000, DVN 3000-NET, or other DVN 100-NET server (in encoder mode) on a single spot monitor. Using SiteManager, you can:
Configure which cameras can be viewed on the spot monitor connected to the DVN 100-NET decoder Toggle the monitor display between single or quad view Disconnect one or more regions (that is, camera views), which blacks out the quadrant associated with a disconnected region
A spot monitor configured for quad view mode displays four equal quadrants, with each quadrant displaying a particular camera view. See Figure 3-1.
Figure 3-1: Quad View Architecture with DVN 100-NET Decoder
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-227
SiteManager Note the following:
Video sources are not limited to cameras connected to a DVN 5000, as shown in Figure 3-1. You can also use other video sources, such as cameras connected to a DVN 3000-NET, or a DVN 100-NET in encoder mode. The Quad View feature does not support playback of recorded video footage. The Playback icon is disabled when the monitor is in quad view mode. The Quad View feature does not support audio, on screen display text, and camera cycling on a spot monitor. However, these features are supported in single view mode. When using the quad view feature, we strongly recommend limiting each camera to CIF resolution at 30 Frames Per Second (FPS) (or 4CIF resolution at a maximum of 10 FPS). Increasing the resolution and/or FPS will overload the DVN 100-NET CPU, which will delay the time it takes to display the video. When viewing a single video stream, you may use 4CIF at a higher FPS. Camera video compressed with Wavelet or Enpacta codecs are not supported in quad view mode only video compressed with the MPEG4 codec can be viewed in this mode. If you add a video source that uses Wavelet or Enpacta compression to a quad view quadrant, the spot monitor will display only a black background.
To configure the DVN 100-NET Quad View feature: 1. On the left window pane, select the Monitors tab.
3-228
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
NOTE
The next few steps describe how to add a network monitor for a DVN 100-NET decoder. If the monitor has already been added, skip to step 7 for quad-view configuration instructions.
2. Right-click on the hierarchy window or click Monitor in the menu bar and select New Monitor. The Monitor dialog box appears.
3. In the Name field, enter the preferred network monitor name (for example, DVN 100-NET Decoder). 4. In the Address field, enter the IP address of the DVN 100-NET decoder to which the monitor is connected. 5. Verify that DVN 100 server is displayed in the Type drop-down list. 6. Click OK. The new monitor appears in the Monitors hierarchy window.
7. On the monitor panel, to change the monitor from single to quad view, click inside the monitor icon.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-229
SiteManager
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual The monitor icon displays four quadrants or regions.
8. Assign a camera to each quadrant. To start, select the Servers tab. 9. In the hierarchy tree, expand the server whose camera(s) you wish to assign to the monitor. 10. Expand the Cameras item.
11. To assign a camera to one of the monitors quadrants, drag and drop the camera from the list to the desired quadrant on the monitor icon. When hovering over a particular quadrant, a number appears, indicating the quadrant number (1-4).
3-230
24-10248-56 Rev. B
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual The quadrants are numbered as follows:
SiteManager
1 3
2 4
When you successfully assign a camera to a quadrant, a red dot appears inside the quadrant to indicate a camera assignment.
To view information about the camera assigned to the quadrant, hover your mouse cursor over the quadrant (there is no need to click a mouse button). The camera name and associated server appear in a pop-up message. 12. Repeat step 11 until all four quadrants have a camera assigned.
NOTE
The Quad View feature can also be configured using the DVN 100-NET user interface; therefore, SiteManager and the DVN 100-NET may initially be out of sync when you configure the Quad View feature from SiteManager. For example, you configure SiteManager to display Cameras A, B, C, and D, but the DVN 100-NET is configured to display Cameras W, X, Y, and Z. For this reason, we recommend that you synchronize SiteManager and the DVN 100-NET by using SiteManager to disconnect and then reconnect all regions (see Connecting or Disconnecting Regions on page 3-233). When you synchronize in this manner, the SiteManager configuration takes precedence over the DVN 100-NET configuration.
NOTE
Configuring the Quad View feature from more than one SiteManager client may also cause them to become out of sync. To resolve any synchronization problems, use SiteManager to disconnect and then reconnect all regions. The quad view configuration on the SiteManager client where the regions are disconnected and then reconnected take precedence over configurations on other clients.
Other Quad View Configuration Options

This section covers the following quad view configuration options:

Reassigning cameras to quadrants Unassigning a camera from a quadrant Toggling between single and quad view modes
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-231
SiteManager
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Connecting or disconnecting regions
Reassigning Cameras to Quadrants

To assign a different camera to a particular quadrant or rearrange cameras on the quad view, drag and drop cameras from the Server tab to the desired quadrant on the monitor icon until you have the desired configuration.
Unassigning a Camera from a Quadrant

To unassign a camera from a quadrant: 1. Select the Monitors tab. 2. In the hierarchy tree, expand the DVN 100-NET monitor whose camera(s) you wish to unassign.
3. Right-click on the camera you wish to unassign and select Remove from sequence. The red dot in the quadrant where that camera was assigned will be removed. When you unassign a camera from a quadrant, the monitor will display only a black background on the associated quadrant.
Toggling Between Single and Quad View Modes

This feature enables you to toggle between single and quad view modes, if needed.
To toggle to single view mode, click the quadrant representing the camera you wish to view in single view mode. For example, if you click quadrant number 2, the camera assigned to that quadrant will be used in single view mode. To toggle back to quad view mode, simply click the monitor icon again. Unless a camera has been manually removed from the sequence on the Monitors tab, all four cameras previously configured for quad view mode will be retained in their previous quadrant assignments.
3-232
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
Connecting or Disconnecting Regions

In addition to the toggle feature, you can disconnect a particular region (that is, quadrant). When a region is disconnected, the monitor displays only a black background for that particular quadrant.
NOTE
The camera assigned to a disconnected region remains assigned to its quadrant until it is unassigned. See Unassigning a Camera from a Quadrant on page 232.
To disconnect a single region, click the Region icons drop-down arrow and select the region you wish to disconnect. The regions icon changes according to the connection status.
Connected Regions Disconnected Region
To connect or disconnect all regions (depending on their current status), click the Region icon next to its drop-down arrow.
Monitor Groups
Monitor groups enable you to group VGA and network monitors in order to manage them with greater ease and efficiency.
NOTE
You must be granted the right to create, use, edit, and delete resources upon your user account configuration to access all the functions listed in this section.
Monitor Group Menu Options

To manage monitor groups, you may select the functions described in this section. To select a function, right-click on the Monitor group icon in the hierarchy window.
New monitor group Delete monitor group Edit monitor group
Opens the Monitor group window, allowing you to create a monitor group. Allows you to delete a monitor group. Opens the Monitor group window, allowing you to change the monitor group name.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-233
SiteManager
Show/Hide
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual A toggle button that allows you to display (or remove) monitor group screens on (or from) the virtual video desktop. Connects to all the cameras servers, allowing you to view the video footage of the monitor group. Disconnects from all the cameras servers included in the monitor group. Opens the Resource window and allows you to add monitors to the monitor group.
Connect
Disconnect
Add resource
Creating a Monitor Group

Before creating a monitor group, you must configure all individual monitors and add them as resources.
Note
In order to create a monitor group, at least two monitors must be part of the SiteManager configuration. The number and combination of monitor groups that you may create is only limited by the number of monitors available in the SiteManager configuration.
NOTE
To add a network monitor to a monitor group, you must be granted the right to create resources based upon your user account configuration.
To create a monitor group: 1. Click the Monitors tab. All available monitors appear in the hierarchy window.
2. From the menu bar, select Window. Verify that Show monitors panel is selected. 3. Right-click on the hierarchy window or click Monitor in the drop-down toolbar. The Monitor menu appears.
3-234
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
4. Select New monitor group. The Monitor group window appears.
5. Enter the preferred monitor group name and click OK. The new monitor group appears in the hierarchy window.
6. On the Monitors panel, use the Monitors drop-down list to select the monitor group you wish to be displayed on the Monitors panel. Since you have not yet added a monitor to the monitor group, the Monitors panel should be empty. 7. Right-click on the newly added monitor group in the hierarchy window. The Monitor Group menu appears.
The Show option will remain disabled until you add monitors to the monitor group. 8. Select Add resource. The Resource window appears.
The Server drop-down list is disabled. 9. Using the bottom drop-down list, select the monitor you wish to add to the group and click OK.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-235
SiteManager
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual The selected monitor will be added to the monitor group.
10. Repeat steps 8-9 for each monitor you wish to include in the monitor group. 11. Repeat steps 4-9 for each monitor group you wish to create.
Connecting a Monitor Group

A monitor group must be connected for the playback commands to become functional. The easiest way is to connect all the monitors within a monitor group at once; however, if required, you also have the option of connecting each monitor in the group individually, since monitor connections are independent. To connect a monitor group, you must be granted the right to use resources upon your user account configuration. To simultaneously connect all monitors in a monitor group: 1. Click the Monitors tab. All available monitors and monitor groups appear in the hierarchy window.
3-236
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
2. Right-click on the monitor group to which you wish to connect. The Monitor Group menu appears.
3. Select Connect. 4. If the cameras included in the selected monitor group are from a server that requires the user to enter his/her user name and password to connect to the server, the Server Connection window appears. Enter your DVN server user name and password. The selected monitor group will be connected to the cameras servers, and each monitor included in the group will display its cameras or resources.
NOTE
If a monitor group contains cameras from multiple servers, a Server Connection window will appear for each server, requiring the user to enter his/her user name and password to establish a connection.
NOTE
See Creating or Importing a New Server on page 3-20 for detailed information about user name and password settings.
To connect each monitor individually using the Monitor Group panel: 1. Click the Monitors tab. All available monitors and monitor groups appear in the hierarchy window.
2. From the menu bar, select Window. Verify that Show monitors panel is selected.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-237
SiteManager
3. From the Monitors drop-down list, select the monitor group you wish to display on the Monitors panel.
4. Click the Connect/Disconnect toggle button Monitors panel.
for each monitor in the
5. If the cameras included in the selected monitor sequence are from a server which requires the user to enter his/her user name and password to connect to the server, the Server Connection window appears. Enter your DVN server user name and password. The selected monitor will be connected to the server and the monitors camera sequence will commence.
NOTE
If a monitor group contains cameras from multiple servers, a Server Connection window will appear for each server, requiring the user to enter his/her user name and password to establish a connection.
NOTE
See Creating or Importing a New Server on page 3-20 for detailed information about user name and password settings.
3-238
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
MAINTENANCE
This section describes a variety of procedures that allow you to successfully maintain the SiteManager client function and configuration. It includes information about the following:

Virtual Video Desktop (see page 3-239) Recording Users Desktop Activity (see page 3-244) Limiting Login Attempts (see page 3-245) Configuring the System Log (see page 3-246) Log Explorer and Working with the Log Panel (see page 3-249) Configuring Regular Server Status Checks (see page 3-253) Searching the Hierarchies (see page 3-256) Configuring Proprietary Keyboard Settings (see page 3-257) Pelco 9760 Keyboard Integration (see page 3-257) Managing the SiteManager Configuration (see page 3-264) VisionWeb ActiveX Manager (see page 3-266)
Virtual Video Desktop

All camera video, map, and view screens are displayed on the virtual video desktop. It allows you to simultaneously view as few or as many screens as you require. The desktop size is infinite. A scroll bar is automatically added so that all the selected screens may be displayed simultaneously, allowing you to scroll up and down through as many different camera video, map, and view screens as required. The virtual video desktop is independent of the hierarchy window and tabs. You may jump between tabs and hierarchies without disturbing any of the screens displayed on the desktop. You may custom arrange your desktop by clicking and dragging individual screens to the desired positions or use the desktop tools and let SiteManager organize the desktop for you. The virtual video desktop functions are located on the Main screens toolbar and under Windows in the menu bar. See the following diagram.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-239
SiteManager
New server/group/ map/3D map/view/ monitor
Add aux
Cascade
2x
Bring map(s) to front
Bring server(s) to front
Add camera
Add alarm
Tile
1x
4x
Bring camera(s) to front
Bring view(s) to front
Buttons and Features (Virtual Video Desktop)

To maintain the virtual video desktop, the following functions are available by selecting Window from the menu bar or clicking the buttons in the toolbar. The following information includes a brief description of each feature.
Tile
Arranges currently displayed camera video screens in rows and columns. The number of camera video screens in each row is determined by the 1x, 2x, and 4x selection. Arranges currently displayed camera video screens on top of one another (i.e. in a cascade arrangement). Displays one camera video screen in each row. Displays two camera video screens in each row.
Cascade
1x 2x
3-240
24-10248-56 Rev. B

4x Bring cameras to front
SiteManager
Displays four camera video screens in each row. Displays camera(s) as the top layer on the virtual video desktop for clear viewing when maps, views, monitors, and/or server interfaces are also present. Displays map(s) as the top layer in the virtual video desktop for clear viewing when cameras, views, monitors, and/or server interfaces are also present. Displays view(s) as the top layer in the virtual video desktop for clear viewing when cameras, maps, monitors, and/or server interfaces are also present. Displays server interface(s) at the top layer in the virtual video desktop for clear viewing when cameras, maps, views, and/or monitors are also present.
Bring maps to front
Bring views to front
Bring server interfaces to front
Options in the Windows Menu

Show log window Show monitors panel Remember window positions
Allows you to display or hide the log window. Allows you to display or hide the monitor panel. If enabled, when any camera video, view, map, or server interface screen is closed, the next time it is shown, it will be displayed on the virtual video desktop in the same position as it was the last time it was closed. If disabled, when any camera video, view, map, or server interface screen is shown, it will be displayed in the top left-hand corner of the virtual video desktop. Allows you to display or hide the status bar.
Show status bar
NOTE
See the definitions under Toolbar on page 3-8 for information about the New server/group/view/map/3D map/monitor toggle button and the Add camera, Add aux, and Add alarm buttons. These buttons are not listed in the definitions above, as they only apply to SiteManager resources.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-241
SiteManager
Configuring the Virtual Video Desktop

SiteManager enables you to arrange the layout of the virtual video desktop, as required. In addition, the administrator can choose the interface language and select the priority level of video display. Video display priority refers to the priority given to video decompression and display within the SiteManager application, as well as the relative priority between SiteManager and other applications which may be running on the client. If the priority is high, display of video (cameras, groups, and views) on the virtual video desktop will always be the first priority of the client. To configure your virtual video desktop: 1. Display the camera video, map, view, monitor, and/or server interface screens as required. For information on displaying: Camera video screens, see Camera Video Screens on page 3-102 Map screens, see Adding Map Resources on page 3-158 View screens, see Working with the View Screen Options on page 3-172 Monitor screens, see Monitors on page 3-199 Server interfaces, see Server Setup and Full Interface on page 3-42
2. To arrange the displayed camera video screens in a cascade, click Cascade. To access an individual camera video screen that is hiding, click on it to display it in front of the others. 3. To arrange the displayed camera video screens in tiles, click Tile. 4. To display 1 camera video screen in each row of the desktop, click 1x. Use the scroll bar to access all the screens on the desktop. 5. To display 2 camera video screens in each row of the desktop, click 2x. Use the scroll bar to access all the screens on the desktop. 6. To display 4 camera video screens in each row of the desktop, click 4x. Use the scroll bar to access all the screens on the desktop. 7. To display a camera video screen when maps, views, monitors, and/or server interfaces are on the desktop, click Cameras to front. All the camera video screens will be displayed as the top layer on the desktop. 8. To display a map screen when cameras, views, monitors, and/or server interfaces are on the desktop, click Maps to front. All the map screens will be displayed as the top layer on the desktop. 9. To display a view screen when cameras, maps, monitors, and/or server interfaces are on the desktop, click Views to front. All the view screens will be displayed as the top layer on the desktop. 10. To display a servers full or setup interface when cameras, views, maps, and/or monitors are on the desktop, click Server interfaces to front. All the server setup or full interface screens will be displayed as the top layer on the desktop.
3-242
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
NOTE
You can access all of the functions previously described before by selecting Window from the menu bar. In addition, you may choose to show or hide the log bar at the bottom of the Main screen. You can also click and drag any of the screens to a specific position on the desktop.
11. If you do not wish to display the log window, select Window>Show log window from the menu bar. 12. If you do not wish to display the monitor panel, select Window>Show monitors panel from the menu bar. 13. If you do not wish to display the status bar, select Window>Show status bar from the menu bar. 14. If you do wish for SiteManager to remember the window/screen positions (each screen will always be displayed in the top left hand corner of the virtual video desktop), select Window>Remember window positions from the menu bar. When you choose to show a camera video, view, map, monitor, or server interface screen, it will always be displayed in the top left-hand corner of the virtual video desktop.
NOTE
If you wish to reverse any of the changes performed in steps 11 to 14, simply repeat the step and when you select the option, a check mark will be displayed and the selected option will be enabled.
15. To select the interface language or adjust the video display priority, select Tools>Options from the menu bar. The Options General tab window appears. Only the administrator can access the Tools menu.
16. To adjust the video display priority, click and drag the Level slide to the required position. Click Apply.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-243
SiteManager
17. To optimize the clients CPU usage by verifying that cameras displayed on the virtual video desktop are turned off when not in view, select the Enable automatic turn off of hidden video streams check box (the clients CPU usage will be lower). 18. For all cameras to be turned on at all times when displayed on the virtual video desktop, even when they are not in view (i.e. the clients CPU usage will be higher) deselect the Enable automatic turn off of hidden video streams check box. 19. To change the language of the interface, select the required language from the Language drop-down list. Click Apply. When the Information message displays, click OK. 20. Click OK on the Options General tab window. The Options window will close. If you changed the language of the interface, log out, and close SiteManager. 21. Launch and log into SiteManager as described in Logging on to SiteManager on page 3-3. The interface language will be as specified.
NOTE
If the log window is not displayed and Alarm Manager has been configured to receive an acknowledgement from the user when an alarm is triggered, the user will not be able to acknowledge the alarm until the system log (and the alarms management panel) is displayed. See Managing Alarm Events on page 3-80 for detailed information about the Alarms Management panel.
Recording Users Desktop Activity

SiteManager enables the administrator to monitor any users activity on a SiteManager client. This is accomplished by recording the SiteManager desktop upon manual activation or in response to a triggered alarm for the duration of the alarm. The administrator can manually activate desktop recording, or an alarm event can be configured to automatically turn on the screen camera upon triggering of the events alarm. If desktop recording is activated manually, user activity will be continuously recorded until the administrator manually deactivates desktop recording. If the screen camera has been configured as an action for an alarm event and an Alarm Manager notification is received, the screen camera will be automatically turned on and will record all user activity for the duration of the alarm. The screen camera footage is recorded in the .avi format and will be stored in the location as specified by the administrator. The screen camera footage can be reviewed at any time.
NOTE
Only the administrator can access the Options window to activate or deactivate the screen recorder.
3-244
24-10248-56 Rev. B
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual To manually activate desktop recording:
SiteManager
1. Verify that you have configured the screen recorder settings. See Configuring the Window Recorder on page 3-128 for detailed information. 2. From the menu bar, select Tools>Start desktop recording. If the system log lists the message Cannot start screen recorder, the screen recorder settings are not configured correctly. 3. To deactivate desktop recording, select Tools>Stop desktop recording from the menu bar. 4. The screen camera footage can be reviewed at any time by locating the .avi file in the configured destination drive and folder.
Limiting Login Attempts

SiteManager allows you to set a maximum number of times a user can enter an incorrect user name and password before SiteManager denies the person access and the software becomes disabled (lock-down) for a specific amount of time.
IMPORTANT
During the lock-down period, no users, including the administrator, can log on to SiteManager.
NOTE
By default, SiteManager allows 3 login attempts and a has lock-down period of 10 minutes.
Only the administrator can access the Options window and configure the login retry and lock settings. He/she can also choose to set the login retry limit to 0, in which case there is no login limit all users will have an unlimited number of attempts to enter their correct user name and password. See Logging on to SiteManager on page 3-3 for more information. To configure the login attempts settings: 1. From the menu bar, select Tools>Options.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-245
SiteManager
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual The Options window (General tab) appears.
2. In the Login retry limit field, select the maximum number of times a user can enter his/her user name and password to login. 3. In the Lockout duration (minutes) field, enter the number of minutes the system will be in lockout mode when a users login attempts exceed the maximum allowed. 4. Click OK or Apply.
Configuring the System Log

SiteManager allows you to select tasks and events you wish to log into the system log. You can then select to save the system log as a file in a particular directory and folder and/or in a database.
NOTE
Only the administrator can configure the system log settings.
A sitemanagerlog.mdb file is automatically uploaded when SiteManager is installed, allowing the administrator to save the system log in a database. The administrator can use a different database. However, the procedure in this section only describes how to configure a database using the sitemanagerlog.mdb file. To configure the system log: 1. From the menu bar, select Tools>Options. The Options window (General tab) appears.
3-246
24-10248-56 Rev. B
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual 2. Select the Log tab.
SiteManager
3. To save the system log in a database, skip to step 4. To save the system log as a file, verify the Log on file check box is selected. Click the Browse button (...) next to the field and select the preferred directory and folder where you wish to save the system log. Click OK and skip to step 13. You can save the system log both as a file and in a database. If the system log is configured to be saved as a file, only the administrator can manually search through all the log entries or use a keyword search. If the system log is configured to be saved in a database, only the administrator can perform advanced log entry searches.
4. To save the system log in a database, select the Log on database check box and continue with step 5. 5. Click the Browse button (...) next to the field. The Data Link properties (Provider tab) dialog box appears.
6. Select Microsoft Jet 4.0 OLE DB Provider and click Next.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-247
SiteManager
NOTE
The current version of SiteManager only supports the Microsoft Jet 4.0 OLE DB Provider option.
The Connection tab appears.
7. Click the Browse button (...) next to the Select or enter a database name field. The Select Access Database dialog box appears. 8. Locate and select the sitemanagerlog.mdb file. The SiteManager.mdb file is automatically uploaded when SiteManager is installed. Therefore, the file will be located in the SiteManager folder specified at the time of installation.
9. Click Open. 10. Click Test Connection on the on the Data Link Properties window (Connection tab).
3-248
24-10248-56 Rev. B
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual If the test was successful, the following dialog box appears.
SiteManager
If a data link error occurs, the following dialog box appears. A data link error may occur if a wrong user name and/or password are used.
11. Click OK. 12. Click OK on the Data Link Properties window (Connection tab). 13. Click Advanced on the Options window (Log tab). The Advanced log options window appears. 14. For each entry that you wish to be logged, verify the check box is selected in the correct box and column. Entries selected in the Window column will be logged and displayed in the log panel. Entries selected in the File column will be logged and saved in the log file. Entries selected in the Database column will be logged and saved in the log database.
15. Once you have selected and/or deselected all of the necessary log entries, click OK. 16. Click OK or Apply.
Log Explorer and Working with the Log Panel

SiteManager allows you to work with and search through the system log via the Log explorer. If the system log is configured to be saved as a file, the administrator can manually search through all the log entries or use a keyword search. If the system log is configured to be saved in a database, the administrator can perform advanced log entry searches as described in this section. One advantage of working with the system log in a database via the Log explorer is the ability to work with the systems resources, including automatic playback of video footage recorded in response to an alarm event. This section also includes details about how to work with the Main screen log panel.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-249
SiteManager
NOTE
Only the administrator can work with the Log explorer. However, the system log settings must be configured first.
To work with the log explorer (configured for log on file): 1. From the menu bar, select Tools>Log explorer. The Log explorer window appears.
2. To view the system log entries: Use the scroll bar on the right hand side or Enter the desired entry keyword in the text box and click the magnifying glass icon . The search is not case sensitive. . .
3. To update the retrieved log entries, click the Refresh icon 4. To split the log into separate files, click the Split log file icon
NOTE
When the log file size exceeds 1 MB, the file will automatically split into two separate log files. Also, each log file is saved with a numeric code that represents the capture date and time. These files are saved in the SiteManager directory selected during installation (e.g. C:\Program Files\JCI\Site Manager).
To work with the log explorer (configured for log on database): 1. From the menu bar, select Tools>Log explorer. The Log explorer window appears.
3-250
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
2. Click the Log on database tab. The Log explorer (Database) window appears.
3. Use the fields and buttons on this tab to retrieve the desired log entries. See Log On Database Tab for information on using the tab to retrieve entries.
Log On Database Tab

This tab consists of many fields and buttons that enable you to retrieve log entries, view detailed information about each entry, and modify a resource (depending on the entry category). The Log on database tab can be categorized into the following:

Entry categories Refresh button User and Type drop-down lists Time period Search by Entry selection table Log entry description Entry key and value Resource
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-251
SiteManager
Entry categories
Refresh button
Time period
Search by
User and Type drop-down lists Entry selection table
Log entry description
Entry key and value
Resource
Entry categories
Allows you to view log entries that correspond to one or more selected categories. By default, all category buttons are deselected. To remove a category from the retrieved entries, deselect the button of the category you wish to remove, so that the category button is no longer highlighted. As a result, entries corresponding to that category will be removed.
Refresh button User drop-down list Type drop-down list Time period
Updates the retrieved log entries. Enables you to view the activity of a particular user within the selected entry categories. Allows you to select the type of activity you wish to view within the selected categories. Allows you to view entries that occurred between specific dates, which can be applied using Local Time (LT) or Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). If applicable, modify the Start and End drop-down calendars to select the preferred time period. Enables you to find an entry by searching for a description keyword. Enter the keyword in the Search by field and click the magnifying glass icon .
Search by
The search will not be successful if there is a spelling mistake. Also, the search is not case sensitive.
Entry selection table
Lists the results of the log entry search. Select a row within the table allows you to view additional information in the Log entry description box and the Entry key and value box. In addition, if the entry has a resource, you may modify the
3-252
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
resources status by right-clicking on the resource and selecting an option from the pop-up menu.
Log entry description Entry key and value Resource
Displays the exact system log entry description for the selected category, user and type. Displays the selected entrys corresponding entry key(s) and value(s). Allows you to work with a resource. Right-click on the resource to change its status. This feature is only available when one or more of the following categories are selected: cameras, auxes, alarms, views, 2D maps, and 3D maps.
NOTE
When an alarm is triggered, SiteManager must receive an alarm notification from the server of the triggered alarm to have access to automatic playback of a camera's Alarm sector video footage in the Log explorer. To determine which cameras recorded an alarm event, select the Alarm and Camera categories.
To work with the log panel: 1. From the menu bar, select Window>Show log window if the option is not currently selected. 2. On the Main screen, select the Log actions tab. The log panel appears.
All the logged system events and tasks will be displayed.
Configuring Regular Server Status Checks

SiteManager allows you to configure any server with a regular automatic check that can detect:

If the server is offline Any disconnected cameras

3-253
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager Any active alarms
The user controls the regularity of the status checks and the parameters that should be checked for each server. To configure a server with automatic status checks: 1. Select the Servers tab. 2. Right-click on the server in the hierarchy window and select Edit server, or select the server in the hierarchy window and select Server>Edit server from the menu bar. The Server window appears. 3. Select the Status check tab. 4. Select the Check server status periodically check box.
5. Using the Check every fields, select the time interval at which the servers status will be automatically checked. The minimum length of time between each check is 1 minute. 6. To check whether the server is online and whether the SiteManager client could establish a network connection to the server, verify that the Check for connection check box is selected. 7. To check whether any cameras are physically disconnected at the server (i.e. whether there are any video inputs that do not have a camera connected), verify that the Check for disconnected cameras check box is selected. 8. To check whether there are any active alarms at the server, verify that the Check for active alarms check box is selected. 9. To have an audio alert when the status check detects a problem, click the Browse button (...), locate and select the audio file you wish to use for the alert, and click Open.
3-254
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
10. To set the number of times SiteManager will attempt to reconnect to a DVN server if the application becomes disconnected, verify that the Reset server connection if disconnected check box is selected. Then enter the number of reconnection attempts in the Number of retries (set to 0 for infinite) field. If you set the number to 0, SiteManager will continuously attempt to establish a connection with an offline server until one is achieved. If the Reset server connection if disconnected check box is deselected, SiteManager will not attempt to establish a connection with an offline server. 11. Click OK on the Status check tab. The servers status will be checked immediately and at the specified time intervals thereafter.
Monitoring the Server Status Checks

To monitor the status checks, display the Server alert panel in the log window. On the panel, each server is allocated a row and only the last server status check results are displayed. These will be updated according to the specified time interval. If a server is offline, the following appears in the Server alert panel.
NOTE
If you are not connected to the server at the time of the servers status check, the server will display Checking status next to its icon in the hierarchy window.
If disconnected cameras are detected, the following appears in the Server alert panel.
NOTE
Disconnected cameras can be detected even if the SiteManager client is not currently connected to the server, as long as the server is online.
If active alarms are detected, the following appears in the Server alert panel.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-255
SiteManager
Flag Icon Descriptions

The green flag icon appears in the Server alert panel when SiteManager detects no issues with the server, according to the types of checks enabled on the Server window (Status check tab). appears in the Server alert panel when SiteManager detects The yellow flag icon an active alarm and/or disconnected cameras at the server. appears in the Server alert panel when SiteManager detects that The red flag icon the server is offline. If a red flag is detected during a status check, the Server alert panel will be automatically displayed if the log window is shown. To display the log window, see Configuring the Virtual Video Desktop on page 3-242 for detailed information.
Searching the Hierarchies

As there may be hundreds of resources in any one or all of the hierarchies, SiteManager offers a search function that enables you to find a particular resource within a hierarchy. The search is word/symbol-based and it will display any resource with the word and/or symbol as a hit. To search a hierarchy: 1. Select the hierarchy you would like to search by clicking on the Servers, Groups, Maps, Views, or Monitors tab. The selected hierarchy appears in the hierarchy window. 2. Enter the name of the resource in the Search window. Click Find.
SiteManager will search the hierarchy for a match and will display the hit in the hierarchy window.
NOTE
The search will not be successful if there is a spelling mistake. The search is not case sensitive. The find function does not search through the entire configuration only the hierarchy currently displayed in the hierarchy window.
3. If the first hit does not produce the required resource, click Find again. The next hit will be displayed in the hierarchy window.
3-256
24-10248-56 Rev. B
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual 4. Repeat until the resource is located or refine your search.
SiteManager
Configuring Proprietary Keyboard Settings

Proprietary keyboards allow quick, easy, and user-friendly access to SiteManager functions and provide an alternative to the standard mouse and keyboard controls. Once you have connected the proprietary keyboard to the SiteManager client, you must perform the following procedure to use the keyboard.
NOTE
Only the administrator can configure the proprietary keyboard.
To configure proprietary keyboard settings: 1. From the menu bar, select Tools>Options. 2. On the Options window, select the Input devices tab. 3. Select the Console keyboard check box. 4. In the Model drop-down list, select the keyboard model. 5. In the Port drop-down list, select the port to which the keyboard is connected. 6. In the Rate drop-down list, select the keyboards transfer rate.
7. Click OK or Apply.
Pelco 9760 Keyboard Integration

The DVN 5000 (software Release 2.7 and higher) supports the following functions of the Pelco 9760 keyboard, which you can only use from a SiteManager client:
Sending live video from a camera connected to the DVN 5000 to any DVN 100-NET (decoder mode) or analog monitor Video playback from a selected camera on a selected monitor
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-257
SiteManager
NOTE
DVN 100-NET cameras can only be played back if they are set as network cameras in the DVN 5000.
Pan/Tilt/Zoom (PTZ) with variable speed control
NOTE
Setting Presets and other PTZ functions must be performed at the DVN 5000.
NOTE
You can only use the Pelco 9760 keyboard on a workstation running DVN SiteManager software. You cannot use this keyboard locally at the DVN server.
This section provides basic installation, configuration, and operation instructions of the Pelco 9760-KBD keyboard for use with a SiteManager client. For comprehensive instructions associated with the keyboard, refer to the Pelco 9760-KBD Installation and Configuration Manual.
Installing the Pelco 9760-KBD Keyboard

Figure 3-2 illustrates how to install a Pelco 9760-KBD keyboard for use with a SiteManager client. Before you begin the installation, verify that you have all the Pelco keyboard package contents (refer to the Pelco 9760-KBD Installation and Configuration Manual). In addition, you will need a full duplex RS-485 to RS-232 converter (B&B Electronics Model 485OT9L recommended).
3-258
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
Figure 3-2: Pelco 9760-KBD Keyboard Installation To install the Pelco 9760-KBD keyboard: 1. Set all of the keyboards DIP switches to OFF. 2. Connect the keyboards RJ-45 straight cable from the COM 1 port on the keyboard to the Keyboard connector on the power adapter. 3. Connect one end of the RJ-45 reversed cable to the System connector on the power adapter. Wire the other end of the cable to the RS-485 to RS-232 converter according to B&B Electronics RS-232 to RS-485 (Model 485OT9L) Converter Installation on page 259. 4. Connect the converter to a COM port on the computer running SiteManager. If the converter cannot be securely connected to the computers COM port, run a cable from the converter to the COM port using a properly wired DB9F connector.
B&B Electronics RS-232 to RS-485 (Model 485OT9L) Converter Installation

This device converts RS-485 signals to RS-232 signals and must be used when installing a Pelco 9760-KBD keyboard to a PC running SiteManager. To install the converter: 1. Set set the converters baud rate to 4800 by changing the DIP switch settings 1-4 according to the following chart.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-259
SiteManager
Baud Rate 4800
Switch 1 ON
Switch 2 OFF
Switch 3 OFF
Switch 4 OFF
2. Set the remaining switch positions for RS-485 Full-Duplex operation and termination.
Switch 5 OFF Switch 6 OFF Switch 7 OFF Switch 8 OFF
3. Using Belden 5341FE (18 AWG, shielded, 2 twisted pair) or equivalent, wire the pins from the RJ-45 reversed cable to the converters terminal block according to Figure 3-3.
DIP Switches
DB9F Connector
12345678
RJ-45 Reversed Cable PIN Layout

Pin 7 (Rx-) Pin 8 (Rx+) Pin 2 (Tx-) Pin 1 (Tx+)
To SiteManager Workstation
RS-232 to RS-485 Converter (B&B Electronics Model 485OT9L)
TDA(-) TDB(+) RDA(-) RDB(+) 422/485 GND 12VDC
Figure 3-3: RS-232 to RS-485 Converter Wiring Diagram (RJ-45 Reversed Cable) 4. When using a standard RJ-45 CAT-5 cable, wire the device according to Figure 3-4.
3-260
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
DB9F Connector
DIP Switches
12345678
RJ-45 CAT-5 Cable PIN Layout

Orange (Rx-) Orange/White (Rx+) Brown/White (Tx-) Brown (Tx+)
To SiteManager Workstation
RS-232 to RS-485 Converter (B&B Electronics Model 485OT9L)
TDA(-) TDB(+) RDA(-) RDB(+) 422/485 GND 12VDC
Figure 3-4: RS-232 to RS-485 Converter Wiring Diagram (RJ-45 CAT-5 Cable)
Configuring the Pelco 9760-KBD Keyboard

The following instructions describe how to configure the Pelco 9760-KBD keyboard for use with SiteManager. Configuring the keyboard consists of the following series of steps:
Configuring the keyboard as an input device and setting the COM port and baud rate in SiteManager. Assigning unique IDs to cameras and monitors in SiteManager, enabling you to select the cameras and monitors from the Pelco keyboard.
To configure the Pelco 9760-KBD keyboard as an input device in SiteManager: 1. From the menu bar, select Tools>Options. The Options dialog box appears. 2. Select the Input devices tab. 3. Select the Console keyboard check box. 4. In the Model drop-down list, select PELCO-9760. 5. In the Port drop-down list, select the COM port to which the converter is connected. 6. In the Rate drop-down list, select 4800 bps.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-261
SiteManager
7. Click OK. To assign unique IDs to the cameras and monitors in SiteManager: 1. Log on to the Pelco keyboard by entering your four-digit PIN from the Log In Display. Refer to the Pelco 9760-KBD Installation and Configuration Manual for more detailed information on logging on. 2. In SiteManager, select the Servers tab. 3. Select a camera under one of the servers. Right-click over the camera and select Edit resource. The Resource properties dialog box appears.
4. Assign a Unique ID number to the camera and click OK. 5. Repeat steps 3-4 for each camera you wish to control from the Pelco keyboard. 6. Select the Monitors tab on the left pane. 7. Right-click over a monitor and select Edit monitor. The Monitor or VGA Monitor dialog box appears.
3-262
24-10248-56 Rev. B
SiteManager
8. Assign a Unique ID number to the monitor and click OK. 9. Repeat steps 7-8 for each monitor you wish to select from the Pelco keyboard.
Operating the Pelco 9760-KBD Keyboard

The following instructions describe how to operate the Pelco 9760-KBD keyboard for use with SiteManager. The following functions are supported:

Selecting a camera and monitor on the keyboard Changing the camera on the current monitor Playing back video on the current monitor
To select a camera and monitor on the keyboard: 1. From the keyboard, press the number of the monitor you wish to select (Example: 1). This number corresponds to the unique ID assigned to a monitor in SiteManager. 2. Press the MON key. 3. From the keyboard, press the number of the camera you wish to assign to the selected monitor (Example: 1). This number corresponds to the unique ID assigned to a camera in SiteManager. 4. Press the CAM key. In the previous example, the camera with a unique ID of 1 in SiteManager would be assigned to the monitor with a unique ID of 1. To change the camera on the current monitor: 1. From the keyboard, press the number of the camera you wish to assign to the currently selected monitor. 2. Press the CAM key. The selected camera appears on the currently selected monitor.
NOTE
Once you select a camera to be displayed on a monitor, it becomes the selected camera for all other operations from the keyboard.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-263
SiteManager
To play back video on the current monitor: 1. Press one of the multi-purpose function keys on the keyboard according to Table 3-14 to play back video on the current monitor: Table 3-14: Function Keys
Symbol |> > >> >>> < << <<< <-* * *-> Playback Function Play Fast Forward (2x current speed) Fast Forward (4x current speed) Fast Forward (8x current speed) Playback (2x current speed) Playback (4x current speed) Playback (8x current speed) Go to beginning of video Stop playback and go to live video Go to end of video
Managing the SiteManager Configuration

By default, all SiteManager configuration settings are stored as two separate files (Users.dat and sitemanager.dat) in the SiteManager folder (the location of this folder depends on the selection made at the time of SiteManagers installation). SiteManager allows to save the configuration either locally or in a shared location on the network, which will allow for automatic updates of all SiteManager clients present on the network. When a configuration change occurs and the configuration is saved in a shared location, all of the network-connected SiteManager clients who use the shared location will be alerted and allowed to synchronize with the changes. Note the following:
A copy of the configuration is always created locally by default, even when a client has been configured to save the configuration in a shared location. Synchronization of configurations can occur automatically or manually at the request of a user. A user can deny a configuration synchronization request when prompted.
3-264
24-10248-56 Rev. B
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual To select the location for the saved configuration files: 1. From the menu bar, select Tools>Options. 2. Select the Configuration tab.
SiteManager
3. Decide whether the User accounts data and Site configuration data will be stored on the local drive or in a shared folder. Select the appropriate radio button for each data type. 4. If you selected the Shared folder radio button, click the Browse button (...) and select the location where the data will be stored and click OK. 5. Click OK or Apply on the Configuration tab. After saving the configuration changes, you will be automatically logged off. 6. Log on to SiteManager again. To save and synchronize the configuration files: 1. Assuming that certain configuration changed occurred, select User>Save configuration now from the menu bar to save the configuration. The configuration will be saved in the selected location. If the changes made only include user account settings, the Users.dat files (as well as the backup) will be updated accordingly. If the changes made completely exclude user account settings, the sitemanager.dat files (as well as the backup) will be updated accordingly. If the changes made included both user account and general settings, the Users.dat and the sitemanager.dat files (as well as their backups) will be updated accordingly.
2. If all the configuration files are saved locally, you do not need to perform any synchronization. If any configuration files are saved in a shared location, and if a user is currently logged into SiteManager on a client that also uses the same shared location for saving the configuration files, click Yes when the following message appears:
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-265
SiteManager
If any configuration files are saved in a shared location, and if a user is not currently logged onto SiteManager, but the client uses the same shared location for saving the configuration files, once the user logs onto SiteManager, the newly saved configuration will be loaded automatically. The configuration will be synchronized and the user will be logged out. 3. Log on to SiteManager again. The synchronized configuration settings will be applied. If the client you are currently logged onto only shares site configuration files, then only site configuration settings will be synchronized and applied. If the client you are currently logged into only shares user accounts files, then only user account settings will be synchronized and applied.
VisionWeb ActiveX Manager

For SiteManager to function correctly, certain software components (DVN 5000 Series Web and DVN 3000 Series Web ActiveX) must be present and properly installed on a client machine. VisionWeb ActiveX Manager provides you with ActiveX components information and an interface that allows their management (installation and removal). Only the administrator may access the ActiveX window and therefore use the VisionWeb ActiveX Manager. If you are unable to connect to a server from SiteManager or via VisionWeb interface, a faulty ActiveX control may be the cause of the problem. Note that it is recommended that versions of ActiveX components installed on a client machine and Johnson Controls DVMS server match for best performance.
3-266
24-10248-56 Rev. B
VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual To use VisionWeb ActiveX Manager:
SiteManager
1. From the menu bar, select Tools>VisionWeb ActiveX Manager. The VisionWeb ActiveX Manager window appears.
Update Refresh Delete
2. Click the Name of the ActiveX control you wish to adjust. 3. If you wish to refresh the ActiveX control, click the Refresh icon. The ActiveX Manager will automatically update the data on the screen. 4. To update the ActiveX control, click the Update icon. The Web update window appears.
5. Enter the IP address and click OK. The ActiveX Manager will update the selected ActiveX control. If you are unable to connect to a server, updating the corresponding ActiveX control may resolve the problem. 6. To delete the ActiveX control, click the Delete icon. The ActiveX Manager will automatically uninstall and remove the selected ActiveX control. You may be required to delete an ActiveX control if it is an old or an incompatible version. You may also delete the required ActiveX control in the system directory. (The path will guide you to its exact location within the directory).
NOTE
If an ActiveX control is deleted/uninstalled, the next time you are updating the control a Security Warning window will be displayed. Click Yes to update/install the selected ActiveX control.
7. Click the Cross in the top right hand corner of the ActiveX window. The ActiveX window will close.
24-10248-56 Rev. B
3-267
SiteManager
3-268
24-10248-56 Rev. B
INDEX
Index entries with (VP) are specific to VisionPocket.
Numerics 1 to 1 Ratio displaying 2D map in 3-144 1x Toolbar Option 3-8 2D Map Screen 3-142 buttons and features 3-143 2D Maps 3-141 adding resources to 3-158 creating 3-146 deleting 3-149 resource menu options 3-155 resource status 3-157 resources 3-155 using 3-150 2x Toolbar Option 3-8 3D Map Screen 3-144 buttons and features 3-145 3D Map Toolbar Option 3-8 3D Maps 3-141 adding resources to 3-158 creating 3-146 deleting 3-149 resource menu options 3-156 resource status 3-157 resources 3-155 supported file formats 3-144 using 3-151 view options 3-152 4x Toolbar Option 3-8 A Aborting video clip export 3-127, 3-196 About audio (VP) 2-27 groups 3-130 log explorer 3-249 maps 3-141 monitor groups 3-233 monitors 3-199 notes 1-3 servers in SiteManager 3-18 SiteManager 1-2, 3-1 user management 3-11 views 3-165 virtual video desktop 3-239 VisionPocket 1-1 VisionWeb ActiveX Manager 3-266
Accessing monitors 3-201 RemoteControl full interface 3-42, 3-44 server setup screen 3-42 Accounts creating user 3-13 editing admin 3-11 Activating server resources 3-46 ActiveX Information 3-266 Add Alarm (Map) 3-143 Add Alarm Toolbar Option 3-8 Add Aux (Map) 3-143 Add Aux Toolbar Option 3-8 Add Camera (Map) 3-143 Add Camera Toolbar Option 3-8 Add Resource 3-131, 3-142, 3-167, 3-173, 3-234 to sequence 3-200 Add Resource Methods 3-209, 3-211, 3-214 Add View 3-143 Adding camera to network monitor 3-213 cameras to views 3-178 group resources 3-132 map resources 3-158 maps to views 3-178 network monitors 3-205, 3-229 resources to monitor groups 3-235 resources to VGA monitors 3-208 servers 3-20 VGA monitor resources 3-209 3-210 Adjusting audio volume 3-55 PTZ camera focus/iris 3-108 video display priority 3-243 Admin Accounts changing password 3-12 creating multiple 3-13 editing 3-11 Alarm Call Priority 3-56, 3-80 3-81 Alarm Events 3-863-87, 3-90 configuring 3-64
list of actions 3-68 managing 3-80 managing with multiple operations 3-99 Alarm Manager 3-56, 3-62 managing notifications 3-63, 3-81, 3-863-87, 3-90 Alarm Notifications backup plan 3-79 Alarm Screen (VP) 2-2 Alarm Sector 3-113, 3-186 Alarms configuring notification settings 3-79 defining max number 3-79 enabling audible 3-74 log window tab 3-9 maximum supported 3-44 send email on 3-77 silencing server 3-100 triggering emails from 3-59 triggering screen recorder 3-59 turning off triggered 3-74 Alarms (VP) 2-30 Alarms Management Panel 3-63 Alert Panel icon descriptions 3-256 Assigning cameras to quadrants 3-230, 3-232 Audio 3-203 adjusting volume 3-55 listening to 3-54 muting channels 3-55 playing back 3-114 playing back (VP) 2-16 playing back on monitors 3-218 support with quad view 3-228 Audio (VP) 2-2, 2-27 Audio Channels 3-53 maximum supported 3-44 Audio Mute 3-111 Audio Specification 3-54 Authenticate Exported Video 3-196 Authenticating video clips 3-126 Autoconnect 3-19, 3-131, 3-142, 3-167, 3-201 Autoconnection 3-174
24-10248-56 Rev. B
Index-1
Index
Autodisplay 3-19, 3-131, 3-142, 3-167, 3-174, 3-200 Autozoom 3-144 Auxiliaries editing names of 3-52 maximum supported 3-44 turning off 3-52 turning on 3-52 using camera internal 3-51 Auxiliaries (VP) 2-30 AVI Files described 3-121 B Background Color 3-146 Bandwidth image quality effect on 3-20 Bandwidth Considerations (VP) 2-7 Bitmap 2-22 Blank Feature 3-200 BMP Files compared to JPEGs 3-120 Bring Cameras to Front 3-8, 3-241 Bring Maps to Front 3-8, 3-241 Bring Server Interfaces to Front 3-8, 3-241 Bring Views to Front 3-8, 3-241 Broadband Connections editing 3-33 Buttons 2D map screen 3-143 3D map screen 3-145 of cam video screen toolbar 3-110 of virtual video desktop 3-240 on main screen 3-6 on monitor panel 3-202 on sequence screen 3-205 on view screen 3-169 Buttons and Features (VP) 2-2 C Calendar 2-21 Camera Cycling support with quad view 3-228 Camera Domes configuring control settings of 3-52 using auxiliaries of 3-51 Camera Sectors selecting 3-113 Camera Unit 3-169 Camera Video Screen 3-6, 3-102 functions 3-101 using options of 3-103 using toolbar on 3-109 Cameras adding to network monitor 3-213 adding to views 3-178 assigning to quadrants 3-230, 3-232

controlling PTZ (VP) 2-11 controlling PTZ domes 3-106 displaying 3-50 displaying on VGA monitors 3-216 maximum supported 3-44 playing back multiple synchronized 3-184 removing from network monitors 3-216 resolution limits with quad view 3-228 selecting (VP) 2-2, 2-6 unassigning from quadrants 3-232 using identical names 3-49 using PTZ (VP) 2-9 Cascade 3-8, 3-240 Changing admin password 3-12 camera on monitor 3-263 interface language 3-243 quad to single view 3-229 server IP address 3-26 single to quad view 3-229 user passwords 3-17 Channels audio 3-53 Chapter Summaries 1-2 Check for Active Alarms 3-254 Check for Connection 3-254 Check for Disconnected Cameras 3-254 CIF Resolution (VP) 2-7 Closing SiteManager 3-11 VisionPocket 2-3 Colors background for 3D maps 3-146 Compatibility DVN servers and monitors 3-218 Compression 3-195 video clip 3-126 Configuration saving SiteManager 3-10 Configuration Options quad view 3-231 Configuring alarm call priority 3-56 alarm events 3-64 alarm notification settings 3-79 dome control settings 3-52 Pelco 9760 keyboard 3-261 proprietary keyboard settings 3-257 quad view feature 3-228 screen recorder 3-59 send email settings 3-77 server connections 3-18 SMTP settings 3-59 system log 3-246 virtual video desktop 3-242 window recorder 3-128 Connect 3-19, 3-473-48, 3-131, 3-134, 3-1383-139, 3-142, 3-1553-156, 3-162, 3-167, 3-172, 3-183, 3-202, 3-234 Connect to Server 3-69 Connecting monitor group 3-236 regions in quad view 3-233 to network monitors 3-217 to servers 3-38 to servers (VP) 2-4 Connection Manager (VP) 2-3 Connection Quality 3-20 Controlling PTZ camera domes 3-106 Converter RS-232 to RS-485 3-259 CPU Usage optimizing 3-244 Creating maps 3-146 monitor groups 3-234 multiple admin accounts 3-13 new groups 3-131 servers 3-20 user accounts 3-13 views 3-170 Cycle Alarmed Cameras 3-72 D Date/Time Search 3-111, 3-116 monitor panel 3-204 Default Login Attempts 3-245 Defining max alarms 3-79 Delete Group 3-131 Delete Map 3-141 Delete Monitor 3-201 Delete Monitor Group 3-233 Delete Resource 3-134, 3-140, 3-156, 3-164, 3-184 Delete Server 3-19 Delete View 3-167 Deleting ActiveX controls 3-267 camera from network monitors 3-216 groups 3-132 layout units 3-177 layouts 3-177 maps 3-149 network monitors 3-226 server connections 3-35 servers 3-41 user accounts 3-16 VGA monitor resources 3-212 VGA monitors 3-226 views 3-171 Denying configuration sync request 3-264 Descriptions of flag icons 3-256
Index-2
24-10248-56 Rev. B

Designing view screen layouts 3-175 Desktop Activity recording 3-244 Detecting disconnected cameras 3-253 when server is offline 3-253 Dial-Up editing server connections 3-27 Digital Zoom using (VP) 2-12 using on PTZ cameras 3-107 Direct Connections editing 3-31 Disconnect 3-19, 3-45, 3-48, 3-131, 3-134, 3-139, 3-142, 3-1553-156, 3-162, 3-167, 3-172, 3-183, 3-203, 3-234 Disconnect (VP) 2-3 Disconnect All 3-19 Disconnect All Servers 3-69 Disconnect Camera 3-47, 3-138 Disconnect from Server 3-69 Disconnect Map 3-138 Disconnect View 3-138 Disconnecting from server (VP) 2-5 from servers 3-40 monitors 3-218 regions in quad view 3-233 Display Four Cameras 3-241 Display Single Camera 3-240 Display Two Cameras 3-240 Displaying 2D map in 1 to 1 ratio 3-144 alarm acknowledge window 3-75 cameras 3-50 cameras on monitors 3-218 cameras on network monitors 3-214 cameras on VGA monitors 3-208 four images on spot monitor 3-227 maps on VGA monitors 3-208 resources on VGA monitors 3-216 setup screen (VP) 2-2 views on VGA monitors 3-209 Documentation 1-4 Domes configuring control settings of 3-52 controlling PTZ 3-106 DVN 100-NET adding network monitors for 3-229 configuring quad view feature 3-228 full interface support 3-42 network monitors 3-201 quad view feature 3-227 server setup support 3-42 sync multiple camera playback 3-185 using views with 3-166 DVN 3000 exporting video clips 3-122 sync multiple camera playback 3-185 using views with 3-166 E Edit 2D Map 3-163 Edit Alarm Resource 3-140 Edit Aux Resource 3-140 Edit Camera Resource 3-48 Edit Group 3-131 Edit Map 3-138, 3-141, 3-183 Edit Monitor 3-2003-201 Edit Monitor Group 3-233 Edit Resource 3-45, 3-48, 3-134, 3-138, 3-1553-156, 3-162, 3-183 Edit Server 3-19 Edit View 3-139, 3-163, 3-167, 3-172 Edit View Layouts 3-167, 3-173 Editing admin account 3-11 auxiliary names 3-52 monitors 3-206 server broadband connections 3-33 server dial-up connections 3-27 server direct connections 3-31 server network connections 3-26 server properties 3-41 server VPN connections 3-29 user accounts 3-16 Emails alarm triggered 3-59, 3-77 Enabling audible alarms 3-74 audio (VP) 2-2 End Function (VP) 2-18 End of Archive 3-110 monitor panel 3-204 End Time 3-195 Enhance High Resolution MPEG 3-104 Enhance Video Quality 3-104 Enpacta support in quad view 3-228 Entry Categories 3-252 Entry Key and Value 3-253 Entry Selection Table 3-252 Events managing alarm 3-80 Exiting SiteManager 3-11 VisionPocket 2-3, 2-31 Export Selection Fields 3-195 Export Server 3-19 Exporting
Index
AVI files 3-121 MP4 files 3-121 MS Mpeg4 V3 AVI files 3-121 servers 3-25 still images 3-121, 3-188 still images (VP) 2-2, 2-22 2-23 video clips 3-122, 3-190 F Fast Forward 3-110 monitor panel 3-204 Features 2D map screen 3-143 3D map screen 3-145 cam video screen toolbar 3-110 main screen 3-6 monitor panel 3-202 sequence screen 3-205 view screen 3-169 virtual video desktop 3-240 File Formats supported for 3D maps 3-144 Find Image 3-170 Find Screen (VP) 2-2 Find Video Clip 3-170 Finding images (VP) 2-19 still images 3-116 still images on monitors 3-221 video clips 3-116 video clips on monitors 3-221 Fixed Split Size (MB) 3-196 Flag Icon Descriptions 3-256 Flat Shading 3-146 Focus 3-105 adjusting on PTZ cams 3-108 Focus Controls (VP) 2-10 Formats 3-1203-121, 3-190 of still images (VP) 2-222-23 Forward Function (VP) 2-18 Full Interface 3-19, 3-42 Full Resolution (VP) 2-7 Full Screen 3-144, 3-167, 3-173 G Grab a Picture (VP) 2-3 Green Flag 3-256 Group Menu 3-7 Group View Toolbar Option 3-8 Grouping resources 3-130 Groups about 3-130 adding resources to 3-132 creating new 3-131 deleting 3-132 menu options 3-130 monitor 3-233 resource menu options 3-134 status of resources 3-135 using resources in 3-134 Groups Tab 3-8
24-10248-56 Rev. B
Index-3
Index
H Help Menu 3-8 Hidden Lines 3-146 Hide Camera 3-47, 3-137 Hide Group 3-131 Hide Map 3-137, 3-141 Hide Monitor Group 3-234 Hide Resource 3-45, 3-134, 3-1553-156, 3-162, 3-183 Hide Sequence Screen 3-200 Hide View 3-138, 3-167, 3-172 Hierarchies searching 3-256 Hierarchy Window 3-6, 3-9 I Icons 2D map resource 3-157 3D map resource 3-157 selecting size of 3-156, 3-164 server resources 3-46 Image Formats 3-120 Image Quality effect on bandwidth 3-20 selecting (VP) 2-7 Image Resolution selecting (VP) 2-7 Images exporting (VP) 2-222-23 file type features of 3-120 finding (VP) 2-19 finding still 3-116 saving still (VP) 2-19 Import Server 3-19 Importing maps 3-146 servers 3-20 Include Text Insertion 3-195 Input Video Format 3-195 Inputs monitoring alarm (VP) 2-30 Installing Pelco 9760 keyboard 3-258 RS-232 to RS-485 converter 3-259 Integrating Pelco 9760 keyboard 3-257 Interface Language changing 3-243 Introduction 1-1 IP Address changing server 3-26 Iris 3-105 adjusting on PTZ cams 3-108 Iris Controls (VP) 2-10 ISDN Connection 3-22 J JPEG Files 2-22 compared to BMPs 3-120

K Keyboard (Pelco 9760) configuration 3-261 installation 3-258 integration 3-257 operation 3-263 Keyboard PTZ Camera Control 3-108 Keyboard Settings 3-257 Keyboard Shortcuts (PTZ) 3-108 L LAN See Local Area Connection (LAN) Language changing interface 3-243 Layout Editor 3-175 Layout Menu 3-173 Layouts deleting 3-177 deleting units in 3-177 designing view screen 3-175 naming 3-177 Limitations Pelco 9760 integration 3-258 Limiting camera resolution 3-228 login attempts 3-245 Listening to audio 3-54 to audio (VP) 2-27 Live Audio listening to (VP) 2-27 Live Mode 3-204 Live Video viewing 3-199 viewing (VP) 2-6 Local Area Connection (LAN) server connection 3-22 Locating still images 3-116 video clips 3-116 Lock-Down 3-245 Log configuring system 3-246 Log Actions log window tab 3-9 Log Entry Description 3-253 Log Explorer about 3-249 Log Files splitting 3-250 Log On Database Tab 3-251 Log Panel using 3-249 Log Window Tabs 3-9 Logging On 3-3 limiting attempts when 3-245 VisionPocket 2-4 Logging Out 3-10 M Main Screen buttons and features 3-6 using 3-5 Main Screen (VP) 2-1 displaying 2-2 Maintenance 3-239 Managing ActiveX components 3-266 alarm events 3-80, 3-99 alarm manager notifications 3-81, 3-86 3-87, 3-90 alarms 3-56, 3-62 monitor groups 3-233 multiple resources 3-130 SiteManager configuration 3-264 Manual Conventions 1-3 Map Menu 3-7 Map Resources 3-155 Map Unit 3-169 Maps 2D screen 3-142 2D toolbar 3-142 3D screen 3-144 3D toolbar 3-144 about 3-141 adding resources to 3-158 adding to views 3-178 background (3D) 3-144 creating 3-146 deleting 3-149 displaying on VGA monitors 3-216 menu options 3-141 positioning resources on 3-160 resource menu options (2D) 3-155 resource menu options (3D) 3-156 resource status 3-157 resources 3-197 supported file formats (3D) 3-144 using 3-1503-151 using resources of 3-160 viewing area 3-142 viewing area (3D) 3-144 views (3D) 3-152 Maps Tab 3-8 Master Camera 3-169, 3-185 Maximum Quality 3-173 Maximum Speed 3-173 Menu Bar 3-7 Menu Buttons (VP) 2-3 Menu Options group resources 3-134 groups 3-130 maps 3-141 monitor groups 3-233 monitors 3-200 network monitors 3-201 server resources 3-45
Index-4
24-10248-56 Rev. B

VGA monitors 3-200 views 3-166 windows 3-241 Menus view 3-172 Modem Connection 3-22 Monitor Groups about 3-233 adding resources to 3-235 connecting 3-236 creating 3-234 menu options 3-233 Monitor Information 3-2023-203 Monitor Menu 3-7 Monitor Mode 3-2033-204 Monitor Panel 3-9, 3-201 buttons 3-202 features 3-202 playback commands 3-9, 3-204 Monitor Scroll Button 3-205 Monitor Toolbar Option 3-8 Monitoring alarm inputs/outputs (VP) 2-30 desktop activity 3-244 server status checks 3-255 Monitors about 3-199 adding cameras to network 3-213 adding network 3-205 adding resources to VGA 3-2083-210 cameras displayed on 3-218 cameras displayed on network 3-214 cameras displayed on VGA 3-208 connecting to network 3-217 deleting network 3-226 disconnecting 3-218 displaying resources on VGA 3-216 drop-down list 3-202 editing 3-206 maps displayed on VGA 3-208 menu options 3-200 menu options for network 3-201 playing back video on 3-218, 3-264 removing resources from VGA 3-212 searching still images on 3-221 searching video clips on 3-221 server compatibility 3-218 VGA 3-200 views displayed on VGA 3-209 Monitors Drop-Down List 3-9 Monitors Tab 3-9 Move 3-105 Move to Current Viewpoint 3-156 Moving PTZ camera domes 3-106 MP4 Files described 3-121 MPEG4 3-61 MS Mpeg4 V3 AVI Files described 3-121 Multiple Camera Playback 3-1 on VGA monitors 3-220 Mute Audio 3-49 Mute Option 3-45 Muting audio channels 3-55 N Name Reset Function 3-49 Naming layouts 3-177 Navigation Panel 3-146 Network editing server connections 3-26 Network Connection Options 3-23 Network Monitors 3-199, 3-201 adding 3-205, 3-229 adding cameras to 3-213 cameras displayed on 3-214 connecting to 3-217 deleting 3-226 disconnecting 3-218 editing 3-206 grouping 3-233 menu options 3-201 panel options 3-202 playing back video on 3-218 removing camera from 3-216 Network Scanner (VP) 2-3 New 2D Map 3-144 New 3D Map 3-141 New Group 3-131 New Groups 3-131 New Map 3-141 New Monitor 3-201 New Monitor Group 3-233 New Server 3-19 New Server Toolbar Option 3-8 New View 3-167 Notes about 1-3 Notifications alarm 3-63 configuring alarm 3-79 managing alarm manager 3-81, 3-863-87, 3-90 O On Screen Display Text support with quad view 3-228 Open View Layout 3-167 Operating Pelco 9760 keyboards 3-263 Operations managing alarm events with 3-99 Optical Zoom using (VP) 2-12 using on PTZ cameras 3-107 Optimizing client CPU usage 3-244 Options connection quality 3-20 Outputs monitoring (VP) 2-30
Index
P Pan/Tilt Controls (VP) 2-11 Pan/Tilt/Zoom (PTZ) 2-9 configuring 3-52 control with VisionPocket 2-2 controlling cameras 3-106 controlling cameras (VP) 2-11 keyboard shortcuts 3-108 Passwords changing admin 3-12 changing user 3-17 Pause Function (VP) 2-19 Pause Playback 3-110 monitor panel 3-204 Pausing video clip export 3-127, 3-196 PDA See Personal Digital Assistant (PDA) Pelco 9760 configuring 3-261 installing 3-258 keyboard integration 3-257 operating 3-263 Permissions user 3-15, 3-21 Personal Digital Assistant (PDA) 1-1, 2-4, 2-16 Plan View 3-145 Play Function (VP) 2-18 Play Mode (VP) 2-3 Playback selecting cam sectors for 3-113 support with quad view 3-228 synchronized multiple camera 3-220 Playback Commands 3-110, 3-169 monitor panel 3-204 Pelco 9760 keyboard 3-264 Playback Functions (VP) 2-18 Playback Pad (VP) 2-2 Playing Back multiple synchronized cameras 3-184 video (VP) 2-16 video and audio 3-114 video on monitors 3-218, 3-264 PNG See Portable Network Graphics (PNG) Portable Network Graphics (PNG) 2-22 Position Locked 3-156 Positioning resources on maps 3-160 resources on views 3-180
24-10248-56 Rev. B
Index-5
Index
Preset 3-105 Presets (VP) 2-3, 2-10 using 2-14 Prime Sector 3-113, 3-186 Prime Sector (VP) 2-16 Print Image 3-110 Proprietary Keyboard Settings 3-257 PTZ See Pan/Tilt/Zoom (PTZ) PTZ Camera Control on network monitors 3-214 on VGA monitors 3-208 PTZ Cameras (VP) 2-9 controlling 2-11 PTZ Control Button (VP) 2-2 PTZ Controls (VP) 2-6 PTZ Panel Screen (VP) using 2-9 Q QCIF Resolution (VP) 2-7 Quad View Feature 3-66, 3-227 assigning cameras to quadrants 3-232 changing to single view 3-229 configuration options 3-231 configuring 3-228 connecting regions 3-233 disconnecting regions 3-233 playback support 3-218 toggle between single 3-232 unassigning cameras from quadrants 3-232 Quadrants assigning cameras to 3-230, 3-232 unassigning cameras from 3-232 Quality 3-19, 3-104, 3-173, 3-196 selecting view 3-167 video clip 3-126 Quality Controls (VP) 2-10 Quit (VP) 2-3 Quitting VisionPocket 2-31 R RAS See Remote Access Service (RAS) Record User Activity 3-72 Recorded Audio listening to (VP) 2-27 Recording desktop activity 3-244 SiteManager screen 3-59 Red Flag 3-256 Refresh Button 3-252 Refresh Rate improving 3-52 Regions connecting/disconnecting in quad view 3-233

Related Documentation 1-4 Remember Window Positions 3-241 Remote Access 3-22 Remote Access Service (RAS) 1-2 RemoteControl 1-11-2 access to 3-42 accessing full interface of 3-44 RemoteView 1-1 Removing camera from network monitors 3-216 groups 3-132 network monitors 3-226 VGA monitor resources 3-212 Renaming server connections 3-35 Reset View 3-145 Resetting camera names 3-49 Resolution 3-196 limits with quad view 3-228 video clip 3-126 Resolution (VP) 2-7 Resource 3-7, 3-253 Resource Box 3-205 Resource Information 3-202 3-203 Resource Options 2D maps 3-155 3D maps 3-156 Resource Status 3-135 Resources 2D maps 3-157 3D maps 3-157 adding to groups 3-132 adding to monitor groups 3-235 adding to sequences 3-200 adding to VGA monitors 3-2083-210 adding to views 3-178 displaying on VGA monitors 3-216 grouping 3-130 map 3-155, 3-197 removing from VGA monitors 3-212 searching the hierarchies 3-256 server 3-44 status of 3-46 using in groups 3-134 using in maps 3-160 using in views 3-181 Return to Live Mode 3-110 monitor panel 3-204 Rewind 3-110 monitor panel 3-204 Rewind Function (VP) 2-18 Rotate 3-156, 3-163 RS-232 installing converter 3-259 RS-485 installing converter 3-259 S Save Image 3-110 Save Still Image 3-170 Saving configuration files 3-265 SiteManager configuration 3-10 still images 3-121, 3-188 still images (VP) 2-19, 2-23 video clips 3-122, 3-190 video footage on the fly 3-129 Screen Recorder configuring 3-59 Search Box 3-6, 3-9 Search By 3-252 Search Recorded Footage (VP) 2-2 Searching images (VP) 2-19 resource hierarchies 3-256 still images on monitors 3-221 video clips on monitors 3-221 Sector Selection 3-110 Sectors 3-170 playing back video from 3-203 prime (VP) 2-16 selecting 3-186 selecting for playback 3-113 Selecting camera sectors 3-113 cameras (VP) 2-2, 2-6 cameras with Pelco 9760 3-263 file location (config) 3-265 image quality (VP) 2-7 image resolution (VP) 2-7 monitors with Pelco 9760 3-263 sectors 3-186 size of icon 3-156, 3-164 Send Email 3-73 Send Email Alarm 3-77 Send to Monitor 3-45, 3-48, 3-105, 3-134, 3-139, 3-142, 3-156, 3-164, 3-167, 3-174, 3-184, 3-208 Sequence Mode 3-203 Sequence Resource Mode 3-207 3-208, 3-210 Sequence Screen 3-204 buttons and features 3-205 Sequences 3-200 Server Alert log window tab 3-9 Server Alert Panel flag icon descriptions 3-256 Server Connection Options 3-23 Server Full Interface 3-42 Server Menu 3-7 Server Resource Icons 3-46 Server Resources 3-44 working with 3-46 Server Setup 3-42 accessing 3-42
Index-6
24-10248-56 Rev. B

Server Status checks 3-253 monitoring 3-255 Servers about in SiteManager 3-18 connecting to 3-38 connecting to (VP) 2-4 creating 3-20 deleting 3-41 deleting connections to 3-35 disconnecting from 3-40 disconnecting from (VP) 2-5 editing broadband connections 3-33 editing dial-up connections 3-27 editing direct connections 3-31 editing network connections 3-26 editing properties of 3-41 editing VPN connections 3-29 exporting 3-25 importing 3-20 monitor compatibility 3-218 renaming connections to 3-35 resource menu options 3-45 resources 3-44 setting up 3-18 silencing alarms 3-100 Servers Tab 3-8 functions of 3-19 Set as View Point 3-156 Set Camera Priority 3-139 Set Priority 3-45, 3-48, 3-134, 3-155, 3-163, 3-183 Setting reconnect attempts 3-255 Setting Up servers 3-18 Setup Monitor 3-201 Setup Screen displaying (VP) 2-2 Setup Server 3-19 Shading 3D maps 3-146 Show 3D Map 3-72 Show All Alarmed Cameras 3-69 Show Camera 3-47, 3-69, 3-136, 3-201 Show Camera on Monitor 3-72 Show Group 3-71, 3-131 Show Log Window 3-241 Show Map 3-71, 3-137, 3-141 Show Monitor Group 3-234 Show Monitors Panel 3-241 Show Resource 3-45, 3-134, 3-1553-156, 3-161, 3-182, 3-200 Show Sequence Screen 3-200 Show Status Bar 3-241 Show Toolbar 3-103 Show View 3-71, 3-137, 3-167, 3-172 Show View on Monitor 3-71 Silencing server alarms 3-100 Single Resource Mode 3-207 3-209 Single Resource View 3-170 Single View Mode 3-218 changing to quad view 3-229 toggle between quad 3-232 SiteManager about 1-2, 3-1 exiting 3-11 managing configuration of 3-264 saving configuration of 3-10 sitemanager.dat File 3-264 sitemanagerlog.mdb File 3-246 Smooth Shading 3-146 SMTP configuring settings for 3-59 Source (VP) 2-3 Specifications audio 3-54 Splitting log files 3-250 video clip files 3-126 Spot Monitor quad view feature 3-227 Start Function (VP) 2-18 Start of Archive 3-110 monitor panel 3-204 Start Playback 3-110 monitor panel 3-204 Start Time 3-195 Status monitoring server 3-255 of group resources 3-135 of resources 3-46 Status Bar 3-7 Status Bar (VP) 2-3 Status Checks server 3-253 Still Images exporting (VP) 2-2, 2-222-23 file type features 3-120 finding 3-116 formats of 3-120 saving 3-121, 3-188 saving (VP) 2-19 searching on monitors 3-221 Stop Function (VP) 2-19 Support 1-2 Supported Formats 3-1203-121, 3-190 Synchronized Multiple Camera Playback 3-165, 3-184 Synchronizing quad view feature 3-231 SiteManager configurations 3-264 System Log 3-6 configuring 3-246 log window tab 3-10
Index
T Tabs 3-8 log on database 3-251 Talk Channels maximum supported 3-44 Technical Support 1-2 Text Insertion 3-126 Tile 3-8, 3-240 Time Lapse Sector 3-113, 3-186 Time Period 3-252 Title 3-125, 3-195 Toolbar Options 3-8 Toolbars using camera video screen 3-109 Tools Menu 3-7 Tour 3-105 Tours (VP) 2-3, 2-10 using 2-14 Turn Alarm Off 3-70 Turn Alarm On 3-70 Turn Aux Off 3-70 Turn Aux On 3-70 Turn Camera Aux Off 3-73 Turn Camera Aux On 3-73 Turn Off 3-45, 3-48, 3-134, 3-139, 3-1553-156, 3-165 Turn On 3-45, 3-48, 3-134, 3-139, 3-1553-156, 3-165 Turning Off auxiliaries 3-52 triggered alarms 3-74 Turning On auxiliaries 3-52 Type Drop-Down List 3-252 Types of user accounts 3-14 U Unassigning cameras from quadrants 3-232 Unblank 3-203 Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) going offline 3-62 UPS See Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) User Accounts creating 3-13 deleting 3-16 editing 3-16 editing admin 3-11 types of 3-14 User Drop-Down List 3-252 User Management about 3-11 User Menu 3-7 User Passwords changing 3-17 User Permissions 3-15, 3-21 User-Defined Quality 3-173 Users.dat File 3-264 Using
24-10248-56 Rev. B
Index-7
Index
2D maps 3-150 3D maps 3-151 camera dome auxiliaries 3-51 camera video screen options 3-103 digital zoom (VP) 2-12 group resources 3-134 identical camera names 3-49 log panel 3-249 main screen 3-5 map resources 3-160 optical zoom (VP) 2-12 Pelco 9760 keyboard 3-263 presets (VP) 2-14 PTZ keyboard shortcuts 3-108 PTZ Panel Screen (VP) 2-9 PTZ zoom 3-107 server resources 3-46 talkback feature 3-54 tours (VP) 2-14 view resources 3-181 view screen options 3-172 VisionWeb ActiveX Manager 3-266 V VGA Monitors 3-199, 3-201 adding resources to 3-208 3-210 cameras displayed on 3-208, 3-214 deleting 3-226 disconnecting 3-218 displaying resources on 3-216 editing 3-206 grouping 3-233 maps displayed on 3-208 menu options 3-200 multiple camera playback on 3-220 panel options 3-203 playing back video on 3-218 removing resources from 3-212 sequence screen 3-204 views displayed on 3-209 Video Adaptive (VP) 2-3 Video Clips authenticating 3-126 destination of 3-195 file format descriptions 3-121, 3-190 finding 3-116 formats of 3-120 playing back 3-114 playing back (VP) 2-16 playing back on monitors 3-218 saving 3-122, 3-190 searching on monitors 3-221 splitting files of 3-126 title of 3-195 Video Display Priority adjusting 3-243 Video Export log window tab 3-9

Video Footage playing back on monitor 3-264 saving on the fly 3-129 Video Resolution 3-104 Video Window (VP) 2-2 View Menu 3-7 View Screen 3-168 buttons and features 3-169 designing layouts for 3-175 using options 3-172 Viewing live video footage 3-199 Viewing Area 3-169 dividing 3-170 Views about 3-165 adding cameras to 3-178 adding maps to 3-178 as map resources 3-197 creating 3-170 deleting 3-171 displaying on VGA monitors 3-216 menu options 3-166 of 3D maps 3-152 positioning resources on 3-180 selecting quality 3-167 using resources with 3-181 Views Tab 3-8 Virtual Private Network (VPN) 1-2 connection 3-22 editing server connections 3-29 Virtual Video Desktop 3-6 about 3-239 buttons and features 3-240 configuring 3-242 VisionPocket 2-1 about 1-1 buttons and features 2-2 exiting 2-3, 2-31 logging on 2-4 using main screen 2-1 VisionWeb 1-1 ActiveX manager 3-266 Visual Search 3-111, 3-118, 3-123, 3-170, 3-192, 3-221 Volume adjusting audio 3-45, 3-55 VPN See Virtual Private Network (VPN) W Wavelet 2-16 support in quad view 3-228 Window Menu 3-7 Window Recorder 3-110 configuring 3-128 Window Size 3-104 Windows Menu Options 3-241 Wireframe 3-146 Y Yellow Flag 3-256 Z Zoom 3-105, 3-1443-145 using (VP) 2-12 using PTZ 3-107 Zoom Control (VP) 2-11 Zoom Level 3-144
Index-8
24-10248-56 Rev. B

Manual de Usuario Site Manager (CCTV)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual de Usuario Site Manager (CCTV)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Digital Vision Network

VisionPocket and SiteManager Software User Manual

September, 2011 24-10248-56 Revision B

Digital Vision Network

VisionPocket and SiteManager Software User Manual

September, 2011 24-10248-56 Revision B

Security Solutions (805) 522-5555 www.johnsoncontrols.com

Johnson Controls, Inc.

VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual

VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual

VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual

See also Related Documentation on page 1-4.

VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual

VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual

Navigating Through the System

Click and Drag

VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual

VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual

VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual

USING THE MAIN SCREEN

Close Video window

PTZ control Camera selection

Playback pad Login/Setup Audio

Menu button Save Find

VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual

Buttons and Features

VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual

Menu Button Reference

Source Play mode Video adaptive Presets Tours Grab a picture

VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual

2. Press the VisionPocket icon. The VisionPocket application launches.

VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual

Disconnecting from a Server

VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual

For additional information, see:

VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual

Selecting Image Resolution and Quality

Full resolution CIF resolution QCIF resolution

VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual

VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual

PTZ panel on a Fixed Camera

PTZ panel on a PTZ camera dome

USING THE PTZ PANEL SCREEN

VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual

Iris controls Quality controls

Focus controls Presets drop-down list Tours drop-down list

Buttons and Features

Iris controls Quality controls

VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual

Controlling a Pan/Tilt/Zoom (PTZ) Camera

3. Press the PTZ button. The PTZ panel screen appears.

VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual

Using the Optical and Digital Zooms

VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual

3. Press the PTZ button. The PTZ panel screen appears.

VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual

Using Presets and Tours

VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual

3. Press the PTZ button. The PTZ panel screen appears.

VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual

PLAYING BACK VIDEO FOOTAGE AND AUDIO

VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual

VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual